[go: up one dir, main page]

TW200846750A - Large-pixel multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal using fringe fields - Google Patents

Large-pixel multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal using fringe fields Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW200846750A
TW200846750A TW96134791A TW96134791A TW200846750A TW 200846750 A TW200846750 A TW 200846750A TW 96134791 A TW96134791 A TW 96134791A TW 96134791 A TW96134791 A TW 96134791A TW 200846750 A TW200846750 A TW 200846750A
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
color
pattern
dot
component
column
Prior art date
Application number
TW96134791A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TWI338797B (en
Inventor
Hiap L Ong
Original Assignee
Hiap L Ong
Kyoritsu Optronics Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US11/751,387 external-priority patent/US7956958B2/en
Application filed by Hiap L Ong, Kyoritsu Optronics Co Ltd filed Critical Hiap L Ong
Publication of TW200846750A publication Critical patent/TW200846750A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI338797B publication Critical patent/TWI338797B/en

Links

Landscapes

  • Liquid Crystal (AREA)
  • Liquid Crystal Display Device Control (AREA)
  • Control Of Indicators Other Than Cathode Ray Tubes (AREA)

Abstract

A multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display that does not require physical features on the substrate (such as protrusions and ITO slits) is disclosed. Each pixel of the MVA LCD is subdivided into color components, which are further divided into color dots. The polarities of the color dots are arranged so that fringe fields in each color dots causes multiple liquid crystal domains in each color dot. Specifically, the color dots of a pixel are arranged so that each color dot of a first polarity has four neighboring pixels of a second polarity. Thus, a checkerboard pattern of polarities is formed. Furthermore, the checkerboard pattern is extended across multiple pixels in the MVA LCD. In addition, many display unit include multiple pixel designs to improve color distribution or electrical distribution.

Description

200846750 九、發明說明: 【發明所屬之技術領域】 [0003]本發明是有關於一種液晶顯示器(licjuid crystal display,LCD),且特別是有關於一種具有大晝素之多域垂 直配向(multi-domain vertically alignment)液晶顯示器,且 此液晶顯示器是製作在平滑的基板上。 【先前技術】 [0004] 液曰曰顯示器最早是用於如計算機與電子錶之單 色顯示器,而如今已成為顯示科技中的主流,且在電腦顯 不器或電視顯示器產業中,液晶顯示器均已取代了降極射 J t (cathode ray tube, CRT) 0 , ^ ^ , ^ . - ^ ^ 於被動陣列驅動顯示而言,主動陣列驅動顯=氏= 現象(ghosting),並可提升解析度、色階、 -= 及反應時間。 對比度以 [0005] 然而’傳統液晶顯示器主 與低對比度,甚至主動陣列驅動顯示的視角視角 射線管的視角。具體而言,當位於:二於陰極 田收看到*口貝白勺影像時,位於液晶顯示器兩 二更無法收看到高品f的影像。因此, =200846750 IX. Description of the Invention: [Technical Field of the Invention] [0003] The present invention relates to a liquid crystal display (LCD), and more particularly to a multi-domain vertical alignment with a large element (multi- A domain display is a liquid crystal display, and the liquid crystal display is fabricated on a smooth substrate. [Prior Art] [0004] Liquid helium displays were originally used in monochrome displays such as computers and electronic watches, and have now become the mainstream in display technology, and in the computer display or television display industry, liquid crystal displays are Has replaced the cathode shot Jt (cathode ray tube, CRT) 0 , ^ ^ , ^ . - ^ ^ In the passive array drive display, the active array drive shows the phenomenon of ghosting and can improve the resolution. , color scale, -= and reaction time. Contrast is [0005] however 'conventional liquid crystal display mains with low contrast, even the active array drives the viewing angle of view of the ray tube. Specifically, when the image is located at the cathode of the cathode, the image of the high-quality f is not available on the liquid crystal display. Therefore, =

Ua)〜i⑷洛干垂吉,上曰曰曰;為的視角和對比度。圖 ()、、、日不金直配向液晶頌示器1〇〇查 處,而為求圖示清楚,岡〗之、、六a 旦素的基本機 (domain)。再者3疋κ圖=日日顯示器僅,示單-領域 冉者® !⑻〜⑽(以及圖2)之液晶顯示器是 200846750 在描述灰階操作的作動方式。 [0006] 液晶顯示器100包括第一偏振片105、第一基板 110、第一電極120、第一配向層125、多個液晶130、第 二配向層140、第二電極丨45、第二基板150以及第二偏振 片155。一般而言,第一基板11()與第二基板150是由透 明玻璃所構成,且第一電極120與第二電極145是由如銦 錫氧化物(Indium Tin Oxide)之透明導電材質所構成。第一 配向層125與第二配向層140通常是由聚亞醯胺(polyimide, PI)所構成,並在靜態下可使液晶130垂直排列。當操作時, 光源(未繪示)會從第一偏振片105下方發出光束,其中第 一偏振片105是貼附在第一基板11〇上。第一偏振片1〇5 通系會以第一方向偏振化,而第一偏振片j與第二偏振 片155的偏振方向會相互垂直,且第二偏振片155是貼附 在第二基板15〇上。所以,光源發出的光束無法同時穿越 第一偏振片105與第二偏振片155,除非光束的偏振方向 被旋轉90。而至第一偏振片105與第二偏振片155的偏振 方向之間。為求清楚表示,圖中僅繪示少量的液晶,而在 實際上,液晶是有如柱狀之分子結構,其中液晶直徑約為 ^人,且液晶長度約為20A〜25A。所以’在—個長3〇〇μιη、 覓ΙΟΟμηι、高3μηι的晝素區域,約有超過—千萬個液晶分 子於其中。 [0007] 在圖1(a)中,液晶130是垂直排列,且在垂直排 列下的液晶130並不會旋轉光源的偏振方向,所以光源發 出的光束無法通過液晶顯示器100。然而,如圖1(b)所示Χ, 當施加電場於第一電極120與第二電極145之間時,Ζ晶 7 200846750 130會重新定向至傾斜姿態。在傾斜姿態下的液晶會將通 過第一偏振片105之偏振光的偏振方向旋轉9〇。,而使得 • 光束可以穿越第二偏振片155。液晶傾斜的程度是正比於 • 電場強度’並用來控制通過液晶顯示器的光量(即晝素的亮 度)。一般而 έ,單一個薄膜電晶體(thin_film4ransist〇r,TFT) 疋對應配置於單一晝素中。但是在彩色顯示下,單一個的 薄膜電晶體是對應配置於如紅藍綠之單一顏色分量(c〇1〇r component)中。 • [0008]然而,對在不同視角觀看液晶顯示器100的觀 眾而言’其觀看到的光束並非均勻。如圖1(c)所示,因為 液晶130寬邊(將光偏振方向旋轉)是正對偏左的觀眾172, 所以觀眾172會看到全壳的晝素。此外,因為液晶13〇寬 邊是部份正對中間的觀眾174,所以觀眾174可看到灰階 的晝素。相對地,因為液晶130寬邊幾乎沒有正對偏右的 觀眾176,所以觀眾176會看到全暗的晝素。 [0Ό09]多域垂直配向液晶顯示器之發展便是用來提升 參 單域(single_domain)垂直配向液晶顯示器之視角過小的問 題。圖2繪示多域垂直配向液晶顯示器(MVA LCD)2〇()中 的單一晝素。多域垂直配向液晶顯示器2〇〇包括第一偏振 片205、第一基板210、第一電極22〇、第一配向層225、 多個液晶235、237、多個突起物(pr〇tmsi〇n)26〇、第二配向 層240、第二電極245、第二基板250以及第二偏振片255, 其中液晶235構成晝素的第一領域,而液晶237構成晝素 的第二領域。當施加電場於第一電極220與第二電極245 之間時,突起物260會使液晶235與液晶237往不同的方 8 200846750 向傾倒。如此一來,低 偏左的觀眾272所看到的左邊領扒r、、右 晶2谢,點’而右邊領域(液晶237)會如亮液 中::二觀伞274會看到的兩個灰階的領域。相對地,偏右 的276所看到的左邊 真 領域(液晶237)會如暗& 7 U而右邊 均非常微小,所無論如何’由於個別晝素的區域 態均為灰階的效果。^個觀眾而言,其感受到晝素的狀 第-電極220與第二ΐΓ 液晶傾斜的程度是取決於Ua) ~i(4) Logan Chongji, Captain; for viewing angle and contrast. Figure (),,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, Furthermore, the 3 疋 map = day display only, the single-domain ® ® ® ! (8) ~ (10) (and Figure 2) liquid crystal display is 200846750 in the description of the grayscale operation. The liquid crystal display 100 includes a first polarizing plate 105, a first substrate 110, a first electrode 120, a first alignment layer 125, a plurality of liquid crystals 130, a second alignment layer 140, a second electrode 45, and a second substrate 150. And a second polarizing plate 155. Generally, the first substrate 11 ( ) and the second substrate 150 are made of transparent glass, and the first electrode 120 and the second electrode 145 are made of a transparent conductive material such as Indium Tin Oxide. . The first alignment layer 125 and the second alignment layer 140 are generally composed of polyimide (PI), and the liquid crystals 130 can be vertically aligned under static conditions. When in operation, a light source (not shown) emits a light beam from below the first polarizing plate 105, wherein the first polarizing plate 105 is attached to the first substrate 11A. The first polarizing plate 1〇5 is polarized in a first direction, and the polarization directions of the first polarizing plate j and the second polarizing plate 155 are perpendicular to each other, and the second polarizing plate 155 is attached to the second substrate 15 〇上. Therefore, the light beam emitted from the light source cannot pass through the first polarizing plate 105 and the second polarizing plate 155 at the same time unless the polarization direction of the light beam is rotated by 90. And between the polarization directions of the first polarizing plate 105 and the second polarizing plate 155. For the sake of clarity, only a small amount of liquid crystal is shown in the drawing, and in practice, the liquid crystal has a columnar molecular structure in which the liquid crystal diameter is about 2 Å and the liquid crystal length is about 20 A to 25 Å. Therefore, there are more than ten million liquid crystal molecules in the area of the alizarin with a length of 3〇〇μιη, 觅ΙΟΟμηι, and high 3μηι. In FIG. 1(a), the liquid crystals 130 are vertically arranged, and the liquid crystal 130 in the vertical arrangement does not rotate the polarization direction of the light source, so that the light beam emitted from the light source cannot pass through the liquid crystal display 100. However, as shown in FIG. 1(b), when an electric field is applied between the first electrode 120 and the second electrode 145, the twin crystal 7 200846750 130 is redirected to the tilting posture. The liquid crystal in the tilting posture rotates the polarization direction of the polarized light passing through the first polarizing plate 105 by 9 turns. So that the light beam can pass through the second polarizing plate 155. The degree to which the liquid crystal is tilted is proportional to the electric field strength' and is used to control the amount of light passing through the liquid crystal display (i.e., the brightness of the halogen). In general, a single thin film transistor (thin_film 4 ransist 〇 r, TFT) 疋 is correspondingly arranged in a single halogen. However, in color display, a single thin film transistor is correspondingly disposed in a single color component (c〇1〇r component) such as red, blue and green. • [0008] However, the beam viewed by the viewer of the liquid crystal display 100 at different viewing angles is not uniform. As shown in Fig. 1(c), since the wide side of the liquid crystal 130 (rotating the polarization direction of the light) is the viewer 172 facing the left side, the viewer 172 will see the whole shell of the pixel. In addition, since the wide side of the liquid crystal 13 is a portion of the viewer 174 facing the middle, the viewer 174 can see the pixels of the gray scale. In contrast, since the wide side of the liquid crystal 130 has almost no right-to-right viewer 176, the viewer 176 will see a full dark pixel. [0Ό09] The development of multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal displays is to improve the viewing angle of the single-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display. Figure 2 illustrates a single pixel in a multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display (MVA LCD). The multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display 2 includes a first polarizing plate 205, a first substrate 210, a first electrode 22, a first alignment layer 225, a plurality of liquid crystals 235, 237, and a plurality of protrusions (pr〇tmsi〇n 26〇, the second alignment layer 240, the second electrode 245, the second substrate 250, and the second polarizing plate 255, wherein the liquid crystal 235 constitutes the first field of halogen, and the liquid crystal 237 constitutes the second field of halogen. When an electric field is applied between the first electrode 220 and the second electrode 245, the protrusion 260 causes the liquid crystal 235 and the liquid crystal 237 to be tilted toward different sides 8 200846750. As a result, the left-handed viewer 272 sees the left collar r, the right crystal 2 thanks, the point 'and the right field (liquid crystal 237) will be like a bright liquid:: two observation umbrella 274 will see the two The field of gray scales. In contrast, the left real field (liquid crystal 237) seen by the right 276 will be as dark & 7 U and the right side is very small, anyway, because the individual states of the alizarin are grayscale effects. ^ For the audience, the degree to which the second electrode 220 and the second liquid crystal are tilted depends on the degree of the element.

感受到灰階程度便直^ 245之間㈣度’而觀眾所 配向液晶顯示器4;:糊斜的程度有關。多域垂直 分割為四個領域,而5到使用四個領域,以將單-晝素 廣視角效果。 使在垂直與水平方向均可提供對稱之 [0010]儘管多域夺 廣視角效果,然而Λ配向液晶顯示11可以提供對稱之 卻是非常昂貴 =麵直配向液㈣示器的製作成本 物是很困難的q上要原因便是要在上、下基板製作突起 常困難,_是下&amp;下基板的突起物要精確對位亦是非 u坡4 m/ 土板的一個突起物必須要能精確對準於 曰=括口大起物中間。此外,銦錫氧化物溝槽(IT〇slit) ^ ^用於基板上產生實體形貌(physical feature)的 1丁&amp;段而其可取代突起物或是與突起物結合。然而, 铟、’氧?物4槽的製作成本亦非常昂貴。再者,無論是突 起物或是銦锡氧化物溝槽,其均會阻擋光束通過而降低多 域垂直配向液晶顯示器的亮度。所以,一種適用於多域垂 直配向液晶顯示器之方法或系統是非常有必要的,其中此 方法或系統必須要能夠不用製作如突起物或是銦錫氧化物 9 200846750 、下基板對位 溝槽之實體形貌,且亦不需要超精準的將上 組裝。 、 【發明内容】 …_1]有鑑於此,本發明提供—種多域垂直配向液晶 -員不杰’而其热需製作突s物或是銦錫氡化物溝槽 ,所以 t據本發明而製作的多域垂直配向液晶顯示器的成本會比 % S知之多域垂直配向液晶顯示器來的便宜。具體而言,依 據本發明一實施例之多域垂直配向液晶顯示器可將單一晝 素分刎成多個顏色分量,而每個顏色分量再被分割成多個 j色質點(color dot)。這些顏色質點的排列方式是用來增強 $緣電場(fringe field),其中每一顏色質點與其相鄰的顏色 質點分別具有不同的電極性(electrical polarity)。因此,在 你〜顏色質點中的邊緣電場會造成此顏色質點之液晶往不 Θ方向傾倒而形成多域的效果。 % [0012]舉例而言,在本發明之某些實施例中,晝素包 杈第一組顏色質點與第二組顏色質點,其中第一組顏色質 •、與弟一組顏色質點分別具有第一質點極性(dot p〇iarity) Θ苐二質點極性,且這些具有第一質點極性以及第二質點 愚丨生之顏色質點是排列成為西洋棋盤圖案(checkerboard Pattern)。舉例而言,在本發明之一實施例中,晝素包括多 匈彥員色分量(color component),其中具有第一質點極性的顏 色質點是包含於第一顏色分量與第三顏色分量,而具有第 〜質點極性的顏色質點是包含於第二顏色分量。 [0013]在本發明大多數的實施例中,相異質點極性所 200846750 構成的西洋棋盤圖案會使得每一顏色質點具有多個液晶領 域,特別是在每一顏色質點的邊緣電場會藉由相鄰晝素之 中相異的質點極性而增強。增強的邊緣電場會造成顏色質 點中的液晶重新定向以及往不同方向傾倒而形成多域的效 果0 [0014] 為了要在整個顯示畫面中設計由顏色質點構成 的西洋棋盤圖案,則需要利用到畫素圖樣(pixel design)間不 同的排列配置。舉例而言,在本發明之一實施例中,顯示 器包括多個對應奇數列的晝素以及多個對應偶數列的晝 素。對應奇數列的晝素可為第一畫素圖樣,並以第一質點 極性圖案與第二質點極性圖案反覆交替排列。對應偶數列 的畫素亦為第一晝素圖樣,亦以第一質點極性圖案與第二 質點極性圖案反覆交替排列。在本發明之另一實施例中, 對應偶數列的晝素可為第二晝素圖樣,並以第一質點極性 圖案與第二質點極性圖案反覆交替排列。在本發明之其他 實施例中’當每一行中的晝素是由質點極性圖案反覆交替 排列時,每一列上的晝素可為相同的質點極性圖案。這些 晝素的排列方式是取決於特定之晝素圖樣,且會被顏色分 佈(color distribution)以及電性分佈(eiecfricai distribution) 所影響。 [0015] 為讓本發明之上述和其他目的、特徵和優點能 更明顯易懂,下文特舉較佳實施例,並配合所附圖式,作 詳細說明如下。 【實施方式】 200846750 [0048] 如前所述,由於習知技藝必須要製作如突起物 或是銦錫氧化物溝槽之實體形貌,以於每個晝素中達成多 域的效果,所以習知之多域垂直配向液晶顯示器的製作成 本非常昂貴。然而’依據本發明概念之多域垂直配向液晶 顯示器是利用邊緣電場以產生多域的效果,並且不需要於 基板上设置如突起物或是銦錫氧化物溝槽之實體形貌。再 者,當不需要這些實體形貌後,習知技藝中需要精準地將 上下基板上的實體形貌對位组裝的困難亦可一併消除。所 以,相較於習知之多域垂直配向液晶顯示器而言,依據本 發明之多域垂直配向液晶顯示器具有較高的良率與較低的 製作成本。 [0049] 圖3(a)與3(b)繪示依據本發明之多域垂直配向 液昍_示态300之基本概念,其中多域垂直配向液晶顯示 器300並不需要藉助基板上的實體形貌便可達成多域的效 果。具體而言,在圖3(a)與3(b)中,晝素310、320、330 是位於第一基板305與第二基板355之間。第一偏振片302 是貼附在第一基板305上,而第二偏振片357是貼附在第 二基板355上。晝素310包括第一電極3U、液晶312、313 以及第二電極315,而晝素320包括第一電極321、液晶 322、323以及第二電極32S,且晝素330包括第一電極331、 液曰曰332、333以及弟一電極335,其中這些電極主要是由 如銦錫氧化物之透明導電材料所構成。再者,第一配向層 307覆盍於第一基板305上的電極。類似地,第二配向層 352覆蓋於第二基板355上的電極。第一配向層3〇7與第 一配向層352均可使液晶垂直配向。更詳細而言,第二電 12 200846750 極315、325、335 是維持在公用電壓(common voltage)V—Com,所以為求製作方便,第二電極315、325、 335可被設計為單一結構(如圖3(a)與3(b)所示)。多域垂直 配向液晶顯示器300是利用交替的極性而操作晝素310、 320、330。舉例而言,當晝素310、330的極性為正時,則 晝素320的極性即為負。相反地,當晝素310、330的極性 為負時,則畫素320的極性即為正。一般而言,每個晝素 的極性會在圖框(frame)之間切換,但是這些交替極性所構 成的圖案在單一個圖框時間内是會維持不變。在圖3(a) 中,晝素310、320、330是處於’’關閉’’狀態,亦即這些第 一與第二電極之間的電場是被關閉。不過在”關閉”狀態 下,仍有部份殘留電場會分佈於第一與第二電極之間。然 而,這些殘留電場的強度一般均不足以使液晶傾倒。 [0050]在圖3(b)中,畫素310、320、330是處於”開啟” 狀態,且”+”與是用來標示電極的充電狀態,亦即第一 電極311、331是處於充正電的狀態,而第一電極321是處 於充負電的狀態。需特別說明的是,充電極性是定義為相 對於公用電壓V_Com而言,其中當第二基板355與第二電 極315、325、335是維持在公用電壓V_Com時,正極性是 表示第一電極的電位大於公用電壓V_Com,而負極性是表 示第一電極的電位小於公用電壓V_Com。第一電極321與 第二電極325之間的電場327(圖中以電力線表示)會使得液 晶322、323傾倒。一般而言,當沒有突起物或是其他實體 形貌時,僅依靠第一配向層307或第二配向層352而垂直 配向的液晶並不會有固定的傾倒方向。然而,在晝素邊緣 13 200846750 處的邊緣電場可用來控制液晶的傾倒方向。舉例而言,第 一電極321與第二電極325之間的電場327在晝素320中 間處是呈垂直狀態,而在畫素320偏左處是呈偏左傾斜的 • 狀態,且在晝素320偏右處是呈偏右傾斜的狀態。如此一 來,第一電極321與第二電極325之間的邊緣電場會使液 晶323向右傾倒而形成一個領域,並使液晶322向左傾倒 而形成另一個領域。所以,畫素320即為多域的晝素,並 具有對稱之廣視角效果。 • [0051]類似地,第一電極311與第二電極315之間的 電場(未繪示)亦會產生邊緣電場的效果,使畫素310右方 之液晶313重新定向而向右傾倒,並使晝素310左方之液 晶312向左傾倒。類似地,第一電極331與第二電極335 之間的電場(未繪示)亦會產生邊緣電場的效果,使晝素330 右方之液晶333向右傾倒,並使晝素330左方之液晶332 向左傾倒。 [0052] 相鄰晝素間交替的極性可增強每個晝素的邊緣 φ 電場效應。因此,藉由在列方向的晝素(或行方向的畫素) 之間重複交替極性的圖案,即可不需設置實體形貌便達成 多域垂直配向液晶顯示器的效果。更進一步而言,交替極 性的西洋棋盤圖案可用於在每個畫素中形成四個領域。 [0053] —般而言,邊緣電場效應是相對較小且較弱, 因此當晝素變的較大時,位於畫素邊緣處的邊緣電場便不 足以傳到畫素中的所有液晶。如此一來,在大畫素中,沒 有靠近晝素邊緣處的液晶便會呈現隨機傾倒的狀態,以致 於無法產生多域晝素的效果。一般而言,當晝素大到約 14 200846750 40-60μπι時,畫素的邊緣電場便無法有效控制液晶的傾倒 方向。所以對於大畫素的液晶顯示器而言,一種新的畫素 分割方式便可用於使畫素達成多域效果。 [0054]關於彩色液晶顯示器的具體構造而言,畫素通 常會分割成為數個顏色分量(color c〇mponent)。每個顏色分 量是由一個獨立的開關元件所控制,而此開關元件可為薄 膜電晶體(thin-film transistor)。一般而言,這些顏色分量即 •為紅、綠與藍。根據本發明的概念,單一晝素中的各個顏 色分量更可再分割成為數個顏色質點(color dot)。圖4(a)繪 示依據本發明一實施例之一種新穎的晝素圖樣。具體而 言,圖4(a)中的晝素圖樣400是被分割成為三個顏色分量, 而每個顏色分量更進一步被分割成為三個顏色質點。為求 清楚表示,這些顏色質點是標示為CD_X_Y,其中X為顏 色分量的序號(對晝素圖樣400而言為1〜3),而γ為顏色 質點的序號(對畫素圖樣400而言為1〜3),亦即晝素圖樣 40Ό是由九個顏色質點所構成。顏色質點cDj—l(即為第 一顏色分量之第一個顏色質點、CD_2J(即為第二顏色分 量之第一個顏色質點)、CD一3—1(即為第三顏色分量之第一 個顏色質點)構成畫素圖樣400的第一列。水平鄰接的顏色 貝點疋間隔一個水平質點間距(|j〇rizontal dot spacing, HDS),且水平質點間距HDS的大小通常是取決於製程設 備的準確度而約為2-5μιη。在本發明之一實施例中,顏色 質點寬度(color dot width, CDW)為40μηι,而水平質點間距 HDS 為 2μιη。顏色質點 CD—1—2、CD—2—2、CD_3—2 構成 畫素圖樣400的第二列。不過,第二列偏移(〇ffset)第一列 15 200846750 以使得顏色質點CD一 1 一2水平對準顏色質點cd_2J。第一 列中的顏色質點是與第二列中的顏色質點間隔一個垂直質 點間距(verticaldot spacing,VDS),所以垂直鄰接的顏色質 點之間是間隔一個垂直質點間距VDS。一般而言,垂直質 點間距VDS的大小亦是取決於製程設備的準確度而約為 2-5μπι,而在本發明之一實施例中,顏色質點高度(c〇1〇rd〇t height,CDH)為60μπι,且垂直質點間距VDS為3μπι。顏色 貝,f D—1—3、CD—2—3、CD—3—3構成畫素400的第三列, 且第二列疋與第一列對背以使得顏色質點CD_2_3水平對 準顏色質點CD_1_2。 —— [0055]單-個顏色分量中的這些顏色質點是由如薄膜 電晶體之開關元件職制,所叫—個顏色分量中所有顏 色質點的極性均為㈣。許多不_設計方式可用於在顏 色分量的顏色質點之間產生電性連接。舉例而言,本發明 的某些κ加例疋利用透光的銦錫氧化物(IT〇)作為從開關 几件到顏色g點之間的連接構件(如圖4(a)中的粗黑線所 不)。圖4(b)#不-種液晶顯示器4〇1的局部透視圖,其中 液晶顯示器4G1 *應用如圖4(a)之晝素圖樣楊。在圖4(b) 中’晝素圖樣的乾圍是用陰影標示,而此陰影僅用於 解釋圖4⑻,且無任何功能上的意義。具體而言,圖4(b) 繪示第-基板405以及貼附於第一基板彻上之第一偏振 片4〇2,而晝素4〇〇的顏色質點CDJ—卜CD—1—2、CD_l—3、 CD—2—1、CD 2—2、CD、2」、CD—3—!、CD—3—2、CD 3—3 是形成於第-基板4G5的上表面:為求清楚表示,前述之 顏色質點仍標示為CD〜(Y的形式,而其他晝素中的其他 16 200846750 顏色質點CD亦是形成於第一基板405上,並以虛線表示。 此外,配向層(未繪示)是覆蓋於這些顏色質點上。圖4(b) 亦繪示晝素圖樣400的開關元件SE—1、SE J2、SE_3。在 本發明之一實施例中,開關元件是採用薄膜技術(thin film technology)而製成之η通道場效電晶體(n-channel Field Effect Transistor),而為求清楚起見,圖4(b)便沒有繪示其 他晝素之開關元件。如圖4(b)所示,這些顏色質點是排列It is felt that the degree of gray scale is directly between 245 (four degrees) and the audience is directed to the liquid crystal display 4; The multi-domain vertical is divided into four areas, and the five-to-four areas are used to give a single-halogen wide viewing angle effect. It can provide symmetry in both vertical and horizontal directions [0010] Although the multi-domain wide viewing angle effect, the Λ alignment liquid crystal display 11 can provide symmetry but is very expensive = the surface direct aligning liquid (four) display is very expensive to produce The reason for the difficulty q is that it is often difficult to make protrusions on the upper and lower substrates. The protrusions of the lower and lower substrates must be precisely aligned. It is also a non-u slope of 4 m/the protrusion of the earth plate must be accurate. Align with 曰 = in the middle of the big mouth. In addition, an indium tin oxide trench (IT〇slit) is used to form a 1 &amp; segment of the physical feature on the substrate which can be substituted for or combined with the protrusion. However, indium, 'oxygen? The production cost of the 4 tank is also very expensive. Furthermore, whether it is a bump or an indium tin oxide trench, it blocks the passage of the light beam and reduces the brightness of the multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display. Therefore, a method or system suitable for a multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display is necessary, wherein the method or system must be able to be fabricated without using a protrusion or indium tin oxide 9 200846750, the lower substrate alignment trench The physical appearance and the need for super-precise assembly. [Invention] [_1] In view of the above, the present invention provides a multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal-members, and its heat needs to make a sputter or an indium tin telluride trench, so according to the present invention The cost of a multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display produced is less expensive than that of a multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display. In particular, a multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display according to an embodiment of the present invention can split a single pixel into a plurality of color components, and each color component is further divided into a plurality of j color dots. These color dots are arranged to enhance the fringe field, where each color dot has a different electrical polarity from its adjacent color dot. Therefore, the fringe electric field in your ~ color dot will cause the liquid crystal of this color dot to fall in the direction of the undulation to form a multi-domain effect. [0012] For example, in some embodiments of the present invention, the pixel contains a first set of color dots and a second set of color dots, wherein the first set of color quality and the set of color dots respectively have The first dot polarity (dot p〇iarity) is the polarity of the second particle, and these color dots having the first particle polarity and the second dot are ignorant are arranged into a checkerboard pattern. For example, in an embodiment of the present invention, the halogen element includes a multi-Hungarian color component, wherein a color particle having a first particle polarity is included in the first color component and the third color component, and The color dot having the polarity of the ~th dot is included in the second color component. [0013] In most embodiments of the present invention, the checkerboard pattern formed by the heterogeneous dot polarity 200846750 causes each color dot to have a plurality of liquid crystal domains, particularly at the edge of each color dot. The different particle points in orthologin are enhanced by polarity. The enhanced fringe electric field causes the liquid crystal in the color dot to reorient and tilt in different directions to form a multi-domain effect. [0014] In order to design a western checkerboard pattern composed of color dots in the entire display, it is necessary to use the painting. Different arrangement configurations between pixel designs. For example, in one embodiment of the invention, the display includes a plurality of pixels corresponding to the odd columns and a plurality of pixels corresponding to the even columns. The pixels corresponding to the odd columns may be the first pixel pattern and alternately arranged in a pattern of the first dot polarity and the second dot polarity pattern. The pixel corresponding to the even column is also the first pixel pattern, and is also alternately arranged with the first dot polarity pattern and the second dot polarity pattern. In another embodiment of the present invention, the pixels corresponding to the even columns may be the second pixel pattern and are alternately arranged in a pattern of the first dot polarity and the second dot polarity pattern. In other embodiments of the present invention, when the halogens in each row are alternately arranged alternately by the dot polarity pattern, the pixels on each column may be the same dot polarity pattern. The arrangement of these alizarins depends on the specific alizarin pattern and is influenced by the color distribution and the eiecfricai distribution. The above and other objects, features and advantages of the present invention will become more <RTIgt; [Embodiment] 200846750 [0048] As described above, since the prior art has to fabricate a solid surface such as a protrusion or an indium tin oxide trench to achieve a multi-domain effect in each element, The conventional multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display is very expensive to manufacture. However, the multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display according to the concept of the present invention utilizes a fringe electric field to produce a multi-domain effect, and does not require a solid topography such as a protrusion or an indium tin oxide trench to be provided on the substrate. Moreover, when these physical topography are not required, the difficulty in accurately assembling the physical topography on the upper and lower substrates in the conventional art can be eliminated. Therefore, the multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display according to the present invention has higher yield and lower fabrication cost than the conventional multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display. 3(a) and 3(b) illustrate the basic concept of a multi-domain vertical alignment liquid helium state state 300 according to the present invention, wherein the multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display 300 does not need to be formed by a solid shape on the substrate. The appearance can achieve multi-domain effects. Specifically, in FIGS. 3(a) and 3(b), the halogen elements 310, 320, and 330 are located between the first substrate 305 and the second substrate 355. The first polarizing plate 302 is attached to the first substrate 305, and the second polarizing plate 357 is attached to the second substrate 355. The halogen element 310 includes a first electrode 3U, liquid crystals 312, 313, and a second electrode 315, and the halogen element 320 includes a first electrode 321, a liquid crystal 322, 323, and a second electrode 32S, and the halogen 330 includes a first electrode 331, a liquid曰曰332, 333 and the first electrode 335, wherein the electrodes are mainly composed of a transparent conductive material such as indium tin oxide. Furthermore, the first alignment layer 307 is overlying the electrodes on the first substrate 305. Similarly, the second alignment layer 352 covers the electrodes on the second substrate 355. Both the first alignment layer 3〇7 and the first alignment layer 352 can vertically align the liquid crystal. In more detail, the second electric 12 200846750 poles 315, 325, 335 are maintained at a common voltage V-Com, so the second electrodes 315, 325, 335 can be designed as a single structure for ease of fabrication ( As shown in Figures 3(a) and 3(b)). The multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display 300 operates the pixels 310, 320, 330 with alternating polarities. For example, when the polarity of the halogen elements 310, 330 is positive, the polarity of the halogen element 320 is negative. Conversely, when the polarity of the pixels 310, 330 is negative, the polarity of the pixel 320 is positive. In general, the polarity of each element will switch between frames, but the pattern of these alternating polarities will remain the same for a single frame time. In Fig. 3(a), the halogen elements 310, 320, 330 are in the ''off'' state, that is, the electric field between the first and second electrodes is turned off. However, in the "off" state, some residual electric field is still distributed between the first and second electrodes. However, the strength of these residual electric fields is generally insufficient to cause the liquid crystal to pour. [0050] In FIG. 3(b), the pixels 310, 320, 330 are in an "on" state, and "+" is used to indicate the state of charge of the electrodes, that is, the first electrodes 311, 331 are in charge. In the positive state, the first electrode 321 is in a negatively charged state. It should be particularly noted that the charging polarity is defined as being relative to the common voltage V_Com, wherein when the second substrate 355 and the second electrodes 315, 325, 335 are maintained at the common voltage V_Com, the positive polarity is indicative of the first electrode. The potential is greater than the common voltage V_Com, and the negative polarity means that the potential of the first electrode is less than the common voltage V_Com. The electric field 327 (indicated by the power line) between the first electrode 321 and the second electrode 325 causes the liquid crystals 322, 323 to fall. In general, when there are no protrusions or other physical topography, the liquid crystal that is vertically aligned by only the first alignment layer 307 or the second alignment layer 352 does not have a fixed tilting direction. However, the fringing electric field at the edge of the alizarin 13 200846750 can be used to control the tilting direction of the liquid crystal. For example, the electric field 327 between the first electrode 321 and the second electrode 325 is in a vertical state at the middle of the pixel 320, and is leftwardly tilted to the left of the pixel 320, and is in the state of The right side of 320 is in a state of being tilted to the right. As a result, the fringing electric field between the first electrode 321 and the second electrode 325 causes the liquid crystal 323 to be tilted to the right to form a field, and the liquid crystal 322 is tilted to the left to form another field. Therefore, the pixel 320 is a multi-domain morpheme with a symmetrical wide viewing angle effect. [0051] Similarly, an electric field (not shown) between the first electrode 311 and the second electrode 315 also produces an effect of a fringing electric field, causing the liquid crystal 313 on the right side of the pixel 310 to be reoriented and tilted to the right, and The liquid crystal 312 on the left side of the halogen 310 is tilted to the left. Similarly, the electric field (not shown) between the first electrode 331 and the second electrode 335 also produces an edge electric field effect, so that the liquid crystal 333 on the right side of the alizarin 330 is tilted to the right, and the left side of the alizarin 330 is The liquid crystal 332 is tilted to the left. [0052] The alternating polarity between adjacent elements enhances the edge φ electric field effect of each element. Therefore, by repeating the pattern of alternating polarities between the pixels in the column direction (or pixels in the row direction), the effect of the multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display can be achieved without setting the physical topography. Furthermore, alternating polar checkerboard patterns can be used to form four fields in each pixel. [0053] In general, the fringing electric field effect is relatively small and weak, so when the morpheme becomes large, the fringing electric field at the edge of the pixel is not enough to pass to all the liquid crystals in the pixel. As a result, in the large pixel, the liquid crystal that is not near the edge of the pixel will be randomly dumped, so that the effect of the multi-domain element can not be produced. In general, when the element is as large as about 14 200846750 40-60μπι, the fringe electric field of the pixel cannot effectively control the tilting direction of the liquid crystal. Therefore, for a large pixel liquid crystal display, a new pixel segmentation method can be used to achieve a multi-domain effect on the pixel. Regarding the specific configuration of the color liquid crystal display, the pixels are usually divided into a plurality of color components (color c〇mponent). Each color component is controlled by a separate switching element, which can be a thin-film transistor. In general, these color components are • red, green and blue. According to the concept of the present invention, each color component in a single pixel can be further divided into a plurality of color dots. Figure 4 (a) depicts a novel enamel pattern in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention. Specifically, the pixel pattern 400 in Fig. 4(a) is divided into three color components, and each color component is further divided into three color dots. For the sake of clarity, these color points are labeled as CD_X_Y, where X is the number of the color component (1 to 3 for the alizarin pattern 400), and γ is the number of the color dot (for the pixel pattern 400 1~3), that is, the enamel pattern 40Ό is composed of nine color dots. The color dot cDj-1 (that is, the first color dot of the first color component, CD_2J (that is, the first color dot of the second color component), CD 3-1 (that is, the first of the third color component) The color color points constitute the first column of the pixel pattern 400. The horizontally adjacent color dots are separated by a horizontal dot spacing (|j〇rizontal dot spacing, HDS), and the horizontal dot spacing HDS is usually determined by the process equipment. The accuracy is about 2-5 μηη. In one embodiment of the invention, the color dot width (CDW) is 40 μηι, and the horizontal dot spacing HDS is 2 μιη. Color dot CD-1-2, CD- 2-2, CD_3-2 constitutes the second column of the pixel pattern 400. However, the second column offsets (〇ffset) the first column 15 200846750 so that the color dot CD-1 is aligned horizontally with the color dot cd_2J. The color dot in a column is separated from the color dot in the second column by a vertical dot spacing (VDS), so the vertically adjacent color dots are separated by a vertical dot spacing VDS. In general, the vertical dot The size of the VDS is also about 2-5 μm depending on the accuracy of the process equipment. In one embodiment of the invention, the color point height (c〇1〇rd〇t height, CDH) is 60 μm, and vertical. The particle spacing VDS is 3 μπι. The color shell, f D—1-3, CD-2-3, CD-3-3 constitute the third column of the pixel 400, and the second column is opposite to the first column to make the color The dot CD_2_3 is horizontally aligned with the color dot CD_1_2. —— [0055] These color dots in the single-color component are made up of switching elements such as thin film transistors, and the polarity of all color points in the color component is (4) Many non-design methods can be used to create an electrical connection between the color points of the color components. For example, some of the κ additions of the present invention utilize light-transmissive indium tin oxide (IT〇) as a slave switch. a connecting member between the dots to the color g (as shown by the thick black line in Fig. 4(a)). Fig. 4(b)# is a partial perspective view of the liquid crystal display 4〇1, wherein the liquid crystal display 4G1* Apply the alizarin pattern as shown in Fig. 4(a). In Fig. 4(b), the dry circumference of the alizarin pattern is shaded. This shadow is only used to explain Figure 4 (8), and does not have any functional significance. Specifically, Figure 4 (b) shows the first substrate 405 and the first polarizing plate 4 attached to the first substrate 〇2, and the color point of the 昼素4〇〇 CDJ—Bu CD—1—2, CD_l—3, CD—2—1, CD 2—2, CD, 2”, CD—3—!, CD—3 — 2, CD 3—3 is formed on the upper surface of the first substrate 4G5: for the sake of clarity, the aforementioned color dots are still marked as CD~(Y form, while other 16 of the other elements are 200846750 color dot CD It is formed on the first substrate 405 and is indicated by a broken line. In addition, an alignment layer (not shown) is overlaid on these color dots. FIG. 4(b) also shows the switching elements SE-1, SE J2, SE_3 of the alizarin pattern 400. In an embodiment of the invention, the switching element is an n-channel Field Effect Transistor made by thin film technology, and for the sake of clarity, FIG. 4(b) ) The switching elements of other elements are not shown. As shown in Figure 4(b), these color dots are arranged

成網格圖案,其中每個顏色質點是與鄰接的顏色質點間隔 水平質點間距HDS與垂直質點間距VDS。圖4(b)亦顯示列 與列之間的晝素通常會間隔一些空間以配置開關元件,而 這些配置開關元件之空間的高度一般會與顏色質點高度 CDH相同,以保持網格圖案的一致性。本發明之某些實施 例還包括元件裝置區域(device cornp〇nent area)(之後會進 步洋述)以覆蓋開關元件與儲存電容(st〇rage capacitor)。 開關元件是藉由閘極線G3、G4與源極線S3、S4、S5、S6、 S7、S8所控制’而以晝素圖樣400而言,開關元件SE_1、 SE—2、SE_3之聞極是耦接至閘極線g3,且開關元件SEj、 SE—2、SE—3之源極是分別耦接至源極線以、S5、S6。之 後圖4(c)會進—步細說明顯示器45〇之閘極線與源極線的 使用方式。開關元件SE_1是電性耦接至顏色質點 CD—1 一3 CD—1、2、CD丄i的電極,其中顏色質點CD丄2 的電極是藉由&amp;所 稽顏色貝點CD_1 3的電極而耦接至開關元 件,且顏色質點Ί 1 , Ά 的電極是藉由顏色質點CD_1_2、 CD—1—3的電極# 9 而稱接至開關元件。類似地,開關元件SE一2 疋電性耦接至顏#皙 1 ^ ^ 貝巴貝點CD 2 3、CD 2 2、CD 2 I的電 17 200846750A grid pattern in which each color dot is spaced from the adjacent color dot by a horizontal dot spacing HDS and a vertical dot spacing VDS. Figure 4(b) also shows that the pixels between the columns and columns are usually spaced apart to configure the switching elements, and the height of the space of these configuration switching elements is generally the same as the color dot height CDH to maintain the uniformity of the grid pattern. Sex. Some embodiments of the present invention also include a device device area (which will be described later) to cover the switching elements and the storage capacitors. The switching element is controlled by the gate lines G3, G4 and the source lines S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, and in the case of the pixel pattern 400, the switching elements SE_1, SE-2, SE_3 It is coupled to the gate line g3, and the sources of the switching elements SEj, SE-2, SE-3 are respectively coupled to the source lines, S5, S6. Figure 4(c) will further illustrate the use of the gate and source lines of the display 45〇. The switching element SE_1 is an electrode electrically coupled to the color dot CD-1, 3 CD-1, 2, CD丄i, wherein the electrode of the color dot CD丄2 is an electrode of the color dot CD_1 3 by &amp; The electrode coupled to the switching element and having the color point Ί 1 , Ά is connected to the switching element by the electrode # 9 of the color dot CD_1_2 and CD-1. Similarly, the switching element SE-2 is electrically coupled to the light of the 皙#皙 1 ^ ^Bababe point CD 2 3, CD 2 2, CD 2 I 17 200846750

配向層(未繪示)。儘管圖4(b)未繪 %性連接構件一般是由如銦錫 成’且電極上方會再覆蓋一層 )未繪示儲存電容,本發明的某 些貫施例亦可更包括域至顏色質點與開關元件之儲存電 容,以維持適當的電荷數量(等效於電壓),而儲存電容的 功能將會於之後的段落再詳加解釋。 [0056]圖4(c)缘示顯示器450的局部,而顯示器450 具有如晝素圖樣400之晝素410、420、430、44〇。在圖4(c) 中,每個顏色質點的質點極性是標示成,,+,,或',,,而質點 極性會於之後的圖5(a)〜5(c)再詳加解釋。晝素410、420、 430、440在位ϊ以及極性上是分別等同於晝素ρ(〇,ι)、 P(l,l)、P(0,0)、PO,0),且圖 4(c)亦繪示出源極線 S0_1、 SO—2、SO—3、SU1、S1 〜2、S1—3 以及閘極線 GO、Gl、G2。 一般而言,標乔成Sx—z之源極線是用於任一列中之第Z 個晝素的第X個顏色分量,而標示成GY之閘極線是用於 第Y列。電晶體的源極是耦接至源極線,而電晶體的閘極 是耦接至閘極線’且電晶體的汲極是耦接至各個顏色質點 的電極。為求説明清楚,特定的電晶體可表示成電晶體 18 200846750 T(S —Z,GY),其中電晶體是麵接至 GY。如此-來,因為電晶體的二shz與閉極線 Μ一3,且電晶體4〇8 #閘極是耦接至間^禺妾至源極線 贈408艮口主- &amp; a 甲]極線,所以雷曰 體即表不為電晶體T(S1_3,G2)。^ —尸㈣电日日 圍是以陰影表示,而此陰影僅用於釋母個畫素的範 功能上的意義。受制於圖4_空2圖4(C),且無任何 示為Uc而有別於其他圖示中的ci^限’顏色質點是標 性,以下的敘述中仍會沿$ CDj 、彳’不過為求一致 件是標示成粗黑線。舉例而言,^性連接構 線S0J、S0—2,3所控制的書素41=線:1以及源極 G1)的没極是耦接至顏色質點CD i 3二’^體T(S(U, 又減至顏色質點⑶丄2,且顏色賢=色m3 顏色質點ΓΠ 1 1上 、“、、占CD—1—2再孝馬接至 顏巳貝2 CD—1J。類似地,電晶體 耦接至顏色質點CD一2一3,而顏色質點一,、々ΰ疋 色質點Cn ? 〇 /、 、·、、、CD—2_3又辆接至顏 CD 2 1 ——,且顏色質點CD〜2、2再耦接至顏色質點 。電晶體,」,叫的_是辆接至顏色質點 而顏色吳點CD一3一3又耦接至顏色質點CD 2, ^顏色貝點CD一3一2再耦接至顏色質點。再者,電 日日體T(S〇J,Gl)、T(S0 一2, Gl)、T(S0〜3, G1)的閘極是耦接 至閘極線 G1,而電晶體 T(SOj,G1)、T(s〇—2, G1)、T(s〇J, G1)的源極是分別耦接至源極線SO—1、s〇_2、SO—3。類似 地’晝素420是耦接至閘極線G1與源極線si_l、Sl__2、 S1 一3而晝素430是耦接至閘極線G〇與源極線s〇j、 S0_2 S〇〜3,且晝素440是耦接至閘極線GO與源極線 Sl—l 、 Sl、2 、 S1 3 。 19 200846750 [0057]母一條閘極線是從顯示器45〇的左邊延伸至右 邊,並控制顯示器450中同一列上的所有晝素,且對於任 一列上的畫素而έ,顯示器450會具有對應的閘極線。此 外,每一條源極線是從顯示器450的頂邊延伸至底邊,且 顯示器450具有多條源極線,其中源極線的數量是在任一 列上晝素數里的二倍(亦即一條源極線對應一個晝素的一Alignment layer (not shown). Although FIG. 4(b) does not depict that the % connecting member is generally made of, for example, indium tin and the layer is overlaid on the electrode, the storage capacitor is not shown. Some embodiments of the present invention may further include domain to color dots. The storage capacitor with the switching element is used to maintain the proper amount of charge (equivalent to voltage), and the function of the storage capacitor will be explained in more detail in the following paragraphs. 4(c) shows a portion of the display 450, and the display 450 has pixels 104, 420, 430, 44A such as a tilapia pattern 400. In Figure 4(c), the particle polarity of each color particle is marked as , , , , , or ',, and the polarity of the particle will be explained in detail later in Figures 5(a) to 5(c). The halogens 410, 420, 430, and 440 are equivalent to the pixels ρ(〇, ι), P(l, l), P(0, 0), PO, 0) in terms of position ϊ and polarity, respectively, and FIG. 4 (c) Also depicted are source lines S0_1, SO-2, SO-3, SU1, S1 〜2, S1-3, and gate lines GO, Gl, G2. In general, the source line of the standard Sx-z is the Xth color component of the Zth element in any column, and the gate line labeled GY is used for the Yth column. The source of the transistor is coupled to the source line, and the gate of the transistor is coupled to the gate line ' and the drain of the transistor is the electrode coupled to each color point. For clarity of description, a particular transistor can be represented as a transistor 18 200846750 T(S - Z, GY), where the transistor is face-to-face to GY. So - come, because the two shz of the transistor and the closed-pole line Μ3, and the transistor 4〇8 # gate is coupled to the source to the source line to give 408 主 mouth main - &a; a] The pole line, so the Thunder body is not the transistor T (S1_3, G2). ^ — The corpse (4) The electric day and the day are represented by the shadow, and this shadow is only used to explain the functional meaning of the parent pixel. According to Figure 4_空2Fig. 4(C), and there is nothing shown as Uc and different from the other illustrations, the color point is the standard, and the following description will still follow $CDj, 彳' However, for consistency, the parts are marked as thick black lines. For example, the gates 41=line:1 and the source G1) controlled by the splicing line S0J, S0-2, 3 are coupled to the color dot CD i 3 ′′ body T(S (U, reduced to color point (3) 丄 2, and color y = color m3 color point ΓΠ 1 1 on, ",, accounted for CD 1-2 and then filial piety to Yan Yubei 2 CD-1J. Similarly, The transistor is coupled to the color dot CD 2-3, and the color dot one, the 々ΰ疋 color dot Cn 〇/, 、,,, CD_2_3 is connected to the face CD 2 1 ——, and the color The dots CD~2, 2 are recoupled to the color dot. The transistor, ", is called _ is connected to the color point and the color Wu point CD 3-1 is coupled to the color dot CD 2, ^ color shell point CD A 3-1 is recoupled to the color point. Furthermore, the gates of the electric day T (S〇J, Gl), T (S0-2, Gl), T (S0~3, G1) are coupled. To the gate line G1, and the sources of the transistors T(SOj, G1), T(s〇-2, G1), T(s〇J, G1) are respectively coupled to the source lines SO-1, s 〇_2, SO-3. Similarly, the 昼420 is coupled to the gate line G1 and the source lines si_l, S1__2, S1-3, and the 430 is coupled to the gate line G〇 is connected to the source line s〇j, S0_2 S〇~3, and the pixel 440 is coupled to the gate line GO and the source lines S1-1, Sl, 2, S1 3. 19 200846750 [0057] The gate line extends from the left to the right of the display 45A and controls all of the pixels on the same column in the display 450, and for any of the pixels on the column, the display 450 will have a corresponding gate line. Each source line extends from the top edge to the bottom edge of the display 450, and the display 450 has a plurality of source lines, wherein the number of source lines is twice the number of primes in any column (ie, one source) The line corresponds to a single element

個顏色分量)。當顯示器進行操作時,每次僅有一條閘極線 會啟動(active) ’且在此作用的閘極線上的所有電晶體會藉 由正向閘極脈衝(positive gate impulse)而呈現導通的狀 態,至於在其他閘極線上的電晶體則會因為接地(gr〇unding) 的非啟動(non-active)閘極線而呈現斷路的狀態。此外,所 有的源極線均會同時啟動,而每條源極線會提供影像資料 至啟動列(active row)上的電晶體,其中啟動列是由啟動閘 極線所控制。所以根據閘極線與源極線的操作方式,閘極 線又被稱為匯流排線(bus line),而源極線亦可稱為資料線 (data line)。電壓會對液晶電容進行充電至一個特定的灰階 (gray scale level),並藉由濾光片而產生色彩。當電晶體= :N㈣’顏色質點的電極便是處於電性隔離二:二的 :悲,而能夠維持電場的強度以控制液晶。麸而,穸生爲 失對於列(卿)數目不多的小尺寸螢幕而言 電壓是經常在更新,所以漏電不算是個問題。^ 數目較多的大尺寸顯示||而言,各列在兩次 ^ 士^ r員等待較長的時間。如此一來,本發明的2:;:: 更可為了顏色質點而配置一個或多個的儲存電;:二 20 200846750 ,存電容是與顏色質點的電容一起充電,並於非啟動列狀 恶I提供所謂的維持(maintenance)電荷。此外,匯流排線 與資料線之材質可由如鋁(A1)或鉻(Cr)之非透光導體 (opaque conductor)所組成。 _58]液晶顯示器的畫素佈局(lay〇ut)通常會有兩個主 孩的方式以置放開關元件與儲存電容,而最常見的是將開 ㈣容配置在—起。傳統上,配置開關元件與 :子电合的區域便稱作4元件震置區域(device component 立的元㈣置區域是對應晝素中的單 的頂邻二广知之晝素中,元件裝置區域是位於晝素 件與儲存電容是配同=7配Γ式下,開關元 式的晝素會將開關元件配】:::二=言’採用此方 存電容配詈於蚩去&amp;置於旦素的頂郤或底部,而將儲 容方式之實施例,而為求完整 4⑷之晝素圖樣為基礎而緣示出沒 有疋件衣置&amp;域的情形,且圖5(d)〜 5(f)是以 口樣為基礎而繪示出具有元件裝置區域的情 ::、 為基礎而繪示出沒有素圖樣的其他晝素圖揭 是以相同之晝素圖樣為的::::6(d)〜6(f 情::為求簡潔’之後文中所述其他畫素圖J = 元件裝置區域的情形,=二過本發明的原則對㈣ 200846750 —[0059]為使圖4(a)之畫素圖樣達成多域的效果,畫素的 第與第二顏色質點是具有相同的極性,而第二顏色質點 是具有相反的極性。此外,鄰接之兩個畫素的極性亦為相 π 乂圖4(a)之畫素圖樣為基礎的多域垂直配向液晶顯示 器而言,兩種不同的質點極性圖案(d 用於這些畫素上,而圖5(a)與零咖繪^此兩種)= 極性圖案。在® 5⑻中,是以畫素圖樣51〇_作為第一質點 極性圖案的範例說明,其中符號”別·,,是代表負質點極性 =案=意°在第-質點極性圖案中,第二顏色分量(即為開 關7G件SE—2與顏色質點CD_2—卜CD—2—2、CD 2 具有 木f生而第與第二顏色分量(即為開關元件se 1、3 與顏色質點 ΐ 3 ^ ^0:3—具有負極性。在® 5(b)中,是以畫素圖樣51〇+作 為乐一質點極性圖案的範例說明,其中符號,,谢,,是 =點極性圖案之意。在第二質點極性圖案中,第^ 为置(即為開關元件SE_2與顏色質點CDj hcD /2、 ΓδϋΓ極性,而第—與第三顏色分量(即為開關元 件 SEJ、SE—3 與顏色質點 CDjj、cn2、cD } 3、 —3—1 CD—3一2、CD—3—3)具有正極性。在實際作 制固”在影像圖框之間反覆切換第一質點極性圖:盥 二-貝點極性圖案。為求簡單明瞭,對於第—顏色分二之、 弟-顏色質點為正極性之質點極性圖案而言 = 性圖案。反之,對於第—顏色分量之第-顏色= :負:1±二質點極性圖案而言,便稱之為負質 木。所以對於圖4⑻之畫素圖樣而言,圖⑽為負質點= 22 200846750 性圖案’而圖5(b)為正質點極性圖案。 掸般4⑻之4相#,即可將畫素排列成西洋 ΐ::Ϊ: 半的晝素是具有正極性,而另-半的畫 般2性。®5(c)繪示此西洋棋盤圖案,而西洋棋 ί〇1Γ、=示器、500 的晝素 _)、_)、_)、 n θ ,小叩,1)所組成。為求清楚表示,每個畫素的 二=用陰影標示,而此陰影僅用於解釋圖⑽,且Color components). When the display is operating, only one gate line will be active at a time and all transistors on the active gate line will be rendered conductive by a positive gate impulse. As for the other gate lines, the transistor will be in an open state due to the grounded (non-active) gate line. In addition, all source lines are activated at the same time, and each source line provides image data to the transistor on the active row, where the startup column is controlled by the startup gate line. Therefore, according to the operation mode of the gate line and the source line, the gate line is also called a bus line, and the source line can also be called a data line. The voltage charges the liquid crystal capacitor to a specific gray scale level and produces color by the filter. When the transistor = :N (four)' color particle electrode is in electrical isolation two: two: sad, and can maintain the strength of the electric field to control the liquid crystal. Bran, the twins are missing. For small screens with a small number of columns, the voltage is constantly updated, so leakage is not a problem. ^ For a large number of large size displays ||, each column is waiting twice for a longer time. In this way, the 2:::: of the present invention can be configured to store one or more storage powers for color dots; 2200 200846750, the storage capacitor is charged together with the capacitance of the color dot, and is in a non-starting column. I provides a so-called maintenance charge. In addition, the material of the bus bar and the data line may be composed of an opaque conductor such as aluminum (A1) or chromium (Cr). _58] The liquid crystal display's picture layout (lay〇ut) usually has two ways to place the switching elements and storage capacitors, and the most common is to set the on (four) capacity. Conventionally, a region in which a switching element is arranged and a sub-electrode is referred to as a 4-element region (a device component) is a cell in a corresponding pixel. It is located in the case that the element and the storage capacitor are matched with the =7 type, and the switch element will be equipped with the switch element::::2=言'This capacitor is used to match the &amp; The top or bottom of the element, but the embodiment of the storage mode, based on the complete 4 (4) elemental pattern, shows the case without the device and the field, and Figure 5 (d) ~ 5 (f) is based on the mouth sample and shows the area with the component device::, based on the other elements, the other elementary picture is not the same: ::6(d)~6(f 情:: For the sake of simplicity 'the other pixel diagrams described later in the text J = the case of the component device area, = two principles of the invention (4) 200846750 - [0059] The 4(a) pixel pattern achieves a multi-domain effect, the first and second color particles of the pixel have the same polarity, and the second color particle has The opposite polarity. In addition, the polarity of the adjacent two pixels is also the phase π 多 Figure 4 (a) pixel pattern based multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display, two different particle polarity patterns (d On these pixels, and Figure 5 (a) and zero coffee painted ^ two) = polarity pattern. In the ® 5 (8), is the pixel pattern 51 〇 _ as an example of the first particle polarity pattern, where the symbol "Do not, is the negative particle polarity = case = meaning ° in the first - particle polarity pattern, the second color component (that is, switch 7G SE-2 and color dot CD_2 - CD CD-2-2, CD 2 The first and second color components (ie, the switching elements se 1 and 3 and the color dot ΐ 3 ^ ^0:3) have a negative polarity. In the ® 5(b), the pixel pattern is 51〇. + As an example of the pattern of the polarity of the dot, the symbol, Xie, is the meaning of the dot polarity pattern. In the second dot polarity pattern, the second is set (ie, the switching element SE_2 and the color dot CDj hcD / 2, ΓδϋΓ polarity, and the first and third color components (ie, switching elements SEJ, SE-3 and color points CDjj, cn 2, cD } 3, —3—1 CD—3, 2, CD—3—3) have positive polarity. In actual production, “the actual polarity of the first particle is switched between the image frames”: 盥二-贝Point polarity pattern. For simplicity and clarity, for the first color, the color-color point is positive polarity polarity pattern = sex pattern. Conversely, for the first color component - color = : negative: 1 The ± two-dot polarity pattern is referred to as negative wood. Therefore, for the pixel pattern of Fig. 4 (8), the figure (10) is a negative particle = 22 200846750 pattern and the figure 5 (b) is a positive dot polarity pattern.掸like 4 (8) of the 4 phase #, you can arrange the pixels into the ocean ΐ:: Ϊ: The half 昼 是 is positive, and the other - half of the painting. ®5(c) depicts this western checkerboard pattern, which is composed of chess, 〇1Γ, =, 500, _), _), _), n θ, 叩, 1). For clarity, the two of each pixel are shaded, and this shadow is only used to explain Figure (10), and

以的意義。如圖5⑷所示,畫素p(x,y)是表示為;左 ,行,且下方算來第丫列之畫素,亦即晝素桃〇) 二=2。此外,畫素柳卜卿卜⑽具有正 貝…、占極性圖案,而查去 極性圖案。所以在圖5、’,數、m, 1 )Ύ田序數X加上序數y為奇數 、、旦素P(x,y)具有負質點極性圖案。相反地,當序數X 口上序數y為偶數時,則畫素P(x,y)具有正質點極性圖宰。 =當換到下一個圖框時’所有的畫素均會變換質點極 木。如此一來,應用圖4(a)之畫素圖樣的多域垂直配 :頒不更具有第一組畫素與第二組晝素’其中第一組晝 弟:質點極性圖案’而第二組畫素具有第二質點極 ’圖木,且第一組晝素與第二組畫素排列成西洋棋盤圖案。 [0061 ]當再細看圖5⑷後,不同極性的顏色質點亦構成 :洋棋盤圖案。亦即對每個具有第一極性的顏色質點而 言,其鄰接的四個顏色質點便具有第二極性。舉例而言, 畫素Ρ(0,0)的顏色質點CD_3J具有正極性,且被四個^有 ,極性的顏色質點所包圍。明確地說,顏色質點CD〕1 是由畫素P(0,1)的顏色質點CD—3」、晝素p(1,〇)的顏色質 23 200846750 點CD—l—1以及晝素P(〇,〇)的顏色質點CDjj、2 2 所包圍。如前所述,相_色質點間相異的純會增強顏 色質點中的邊緣電場。由於顏色質點相對較小,所以顏色 質點中的邊緣電場便會於每個顏色質點中的液晶產生多域 的效果’而達成多域效果的原理已於前述之圖3(a)與圖U) 闡釋。為未簡單表示,® 5⑷以及之後類似的圖示均簡化 為僅繪示晝素的制,而省略開關科的控制線(閘極線與 源極線)。不過圖4⑷已巨細靡遺地緣示出此等顯示器之控 制線’所以熟悉此項技藝之人#可參造前述說明而由°精^ 的敘述中輕易推出控制線的配置方式。 [0062]如前職而在連續的圖框巾,每個晝素的質點 極性圖案會不斷於正質點極性圖案與負質點極性圖幸之間 =換。此種極性切換的方式可以預防降低影像品質了而^ 得液晶在每個圖框均可扭轉(twist)至相同的方向。然而, 當所有開關元件都具有相同極性時,切換f點極性:會影 響影像品質,而產生晝面閃爍(flicker)的問題。為了要&amp; = 畫面閃爍’開關元件(即電晶體)是以驅動機制(心 scheme)而排列成具有正負極性。再者’為了降低串音 邊)現象’正極性以及負極性的開關元件f排列成均句的 型態,而此亦使得電性分佈更加均勻。許多開關元件 機制均可應祕本發明的實施财,而三個主要的開關元 件驅動機制分別是開關元件點反轉(pGint ίην_η)驅動機 制、開關元件列反轉(row inversion)驅動機制以及開關元件 行反轉(column inversion)驅動機制。在開關元件點反轉驅 動機制巾’交替極性的開關元件形成西洋棋盤圖幸。在 24 200846750 關70件列反轉驅動機射,同—列上的開關元件具有相同 的極性’不縣—列上關元件的極性會與相鄰列上開關 元件的極性相在開關元件行反轉驅動機財,同一行 上的開關元件具有相_極性,不過任—行上開關元件的 極性會與相鄰行上«元件的極性相反。由於_元件的 1性形成西洋祺盤圖案’所以圖5(c)之畫素圖案是應用開 關元件點反轉驅動機制。The meaning of it. As shown in Fig. 5(4), the pixel p(x, y) is expressed as: left, line, and the pixel of the third column is counted below, that is, 昼素桃〇) 2=2. In addition, the picturer Liu Buqing Bu (10) has a positive..., a polar pattern, and the polarity pattern is checked. Therefore, in Fig. 5, ', number, m, 1), the order number X and the ordinal number y are odd, and the denier P(x, y) has a negative dot polarity pattern. Conversely, when the ordinal number y on the ordinal X port is even, then the pixel P(x, y) has a positive particle polarity pattern. = When switching to the next frame, all pixels will change the particle. In this way, the multi-domain vertical matching of the pixel pattern of FIG. 4(a) is applied: the first group of pixels and the second group of pixels are included, wherein the first group of brothers: the particle polarity pattern and the second The group of pixels has a second dot-pole, and the first group of pixels and the second group of pixels are arranged in a checkerboard pattern. [0061] When we look closely at Figure 5 (4), the color dots of different polarities also constitute: a checkerboard pattern. That is, for each color dot having the first polarity, the adjacent four color dots have the second polarity. For example, the color dot CD_3J of the pixel Ρ(0,0) has a positive polarity and is surrounded by four color polar dots. Specifically, the color dot CD]1 is the color quality of the pixel P(0,1) CD-3", the color quality of the alizarin p(1,〇) 23 200846750 dot CD-l-1 and the alizarin P The color points (〇, 〇) are surrounded by CDjj and 2 2 . As mentioned earlier, the distinct purity of the phase-color points enhances the fringing electric field in the color point. Since the color dots are relatively small, the edge electric field in the color dot will produce a multi-domain effect in the liquid crystal in each color dot', and the principle of multi-domain effect is achieved in the above-mentioned FIG. 3(a) and FIG. Interpretation. For the sake of simplicity, the ® 5(4) and later similar illustrations are simplified to show only the halogen system, and the control lines (gate lines and source lines) of the switch section are omitted. However, Fig. 4(4) has shown the control lines of these displays in a very detailed manner. Therefore, those skilled in the art can easily introduce the arrangement of the control lines from the description of the above. [0062] As in the predecessor and in the continuous frame towel, the particle polarity pattern of each element will continue to change between the positive dot polarity pattern and the negative particle polarity pattern. This polarity switching method can prevent the image quality from being lowered and the liquid crystal can be twisted to the same direction in each frame. However, when all switching elements have the same polarity, switching the f-point polarity will affect the image quality and cause flicker problems. In order to &amp; = picture flickering, the switching elements (i.e., transistors) are arranged to have positive and negative polarities in a driving scheme (heart scheme). Further, in order to reduce the crosstalk phenomenon, the positive and negative polarity switching elements f are arranged in a uniform sentence pattern, which also makes the electrical distribution more uniform. Many switching element mechanisms can be implemented in the implementation of the invention, and the three main switching element driving mechanisms are switching element dot inversion (pGint ίην_η) driving mechanism, switching element column inversion driving mechanism and switching Component line inversion driver mechanism. In the switching element point inversion drive mechanism towel 'alternating polarity switching elements form a checkerboard map. On the 24 200846750 off 70-column inversion drive machine, the switching elements on the same column have the same polarity 'no county' - the polarity of the off-going element will be opposite to the polarity of the switching element on the adjacent column. Turning the drive, the switching elements on the same line have phase-polarity, but the polarity of the switching elements on any line will be opposite to the polarity of the elements on the adjacent lines. The pixel pattern of Fig. 5(c) is a point-inversion driving mechanism applied to the switching element because the _ element is one-sided to form the western enamel pattern.

[0063]圖5(d)與圖5(e)繪示一種晝素圖樣52〇,而晝素 圖樣520與圖4⑻之畫素圖# _具有相同的顏色質排 列,但是晝素圖樣520更包括元件裝置區域DCAj、 DCA—2、DCA—3。如前所述’ 元件與儲存電容是配置 於=件1置區域’不過受限於圖面空間,圖中未綠示儲存 電容。具體而言,顏色質點CD—u(即為第_顏色分量之 第-個顏色質點)、CD义!(即為第二顏色分量之第 色質點)、0)」—1(即為第三顏色分量之第一個顏色質_ 構成晝素圖樣520的第一列。顏色質點CD」」、cD 2 2 CD丄2構成晝素圖樣52〇的第二列。不過:第二列偏移第 -列以使得顏色質點CD丄2 7jc平對準顏色質點CD—2丨 第-列中的顏色質料與第二射的顏色質關隔二個° 直質點間距VDS。顏色質點cdj」、CD 2 3、⑶3 構成晝素圖樣520的第三列,且第三列是與第一列對赢以 使得顏色質點CD_2_3水平對準顏色質點CDj—2。元ς壯 置區域DCA J、DCA—2、DCA—3構成晝素圖樣似的第= 列’且第四列是與第三列對齊以使得元件裝置區域d 水平對準顏色質點CDJ—3。此外,開關元件犯i、- 25 200846750 SE—3疋分別位於元件裝置區域〇以」、2、dc 内,而開關兀件SE」是耗接至顏色質點CDjj—、 以,E-2是耗接至顏色 〜— 一2一3的電極,又開關元件S£ 3 疋耦接至顏色質點CD」J、⑶—3—2、CD 3 3的電極。— 性圖Γ=Γ)與圖5(·示晝素圖樣520的兩種質點極 性圖:L 晝素圖樣52〇(標示為52〇_)的負質點極 —圖木、體而言’在晝素圖樣52〇之負質點極性圖宰中, ,-顏色分量(即為開關元件SE—2與顏色質點CD 2卜 為門2ϋ—2—3)具有正極性,而第—與第三顏色分量(即 為開關轉SE-卜犯―3與顏色質點(^丄卜⑶1 2、 :D—1查3、CD—3—1、CD_3—2、CD—3—3)具有負極性。圖- :不旦素圖樣520(標示為520+)的正質點極性圖案。在書 元:=22〇,正質點極性圖案中’第二顏色分量(即為開關 讀SE—2與顏色質點cd_2j、cd—2—2、cd 2取 f性’而第—與第三顏色分量(即為開關元件W 3 與顏色質點 CDjj、CD丄2、CD13、CD 3i、m 3 &amp; CD—3—3)具有正極性。在實際操作中,每個晝在: :框之間反覆切換第一質點極性圖案與第:質:極 [⑽65]應用目5(d)與圖5⑷之晝素圖樣,即可將 =西洋棋盤圖案’其中一半的畫素是具有正極性旦而另 、’的晝素是具有負極性。目5(躲示此西洋棋盤, 而西年棋盤圖案是由顯示器550的畫 〇; p⑽,山、⑽所組成。為求“表;;0)每 26 200846750 個晝素的範圍是用陰影標示’而此陰影僅用於解釋 且,、、、任何功此上的思義。如圖5⑴所示,晝素p(x,y)是示 為從左邊算來第X行,且下方算來第丫列之畫素,亦即^ 素ρ(ο,ο)是位於左下角。此外,晝素p(00)、P(20)、ρ(ι^ 具有正質點極性圖案,而晝素ρ(1,0)、ρ(0,υ、ρ(2 有 負^點極性圖案。所以在圖5(f)中,當序數χ加上序數y 2奇數時’則畫素P(X,y)具有負質點極性圖案。相反地, 當序數X加上序數y為偶數時,則晝素p(x,y)具有正質點 極性圖案。然而,當換到下一個圖框時,所有的晝素均會 變換質點極性圖案。如此—來,應關柳與圖⑽之書 素圖樣的多域垂直配向顯示器便具有第一組畫素與第二組 晝素’其中第-組晝素具有第—質點極性圖案,而第二組 晝素具有第二質點極性圖案,且第一組畫素與第二組畫素 排列成西洋棋盤圖案。 [0066]顯示器550與顯示器5〇〇的差別僅在於元件裝 置區域。如果元件裝置區域夠小,則構成西洋棋盤圖案之 顏色質點便可維持增強的邊緣電場。然而,本發明的某些 實施例是藉由較大的元件裝置區域以使各個區域中的顏^ 質點彼_立。在這些實施财,在每魅勒部的顏色 質點的極性仍可構成西洋棋盤圖案,不過卻不必然可擴展 到整個顯示區。舉例來說,顯示器55〇可將西洋棋盤圖案 佈滿整個顯示區。然而,當元件裝置區域足夠大時,本發 明之其他實施例可將晝素P(〇,〇)、p(】,〇)、p(2的極性反 轉。 [〇〇67]在圖5(c)與圖5(£)中,在晝素中之任一顏色分量 27 200846750 顏色質點是呈現出鑛齒圖案⑵啊,所以上 兩晝素中之特定顏色分量的顏色質點會於畫素的邊 洛所娣接舉例而言,在顯示器500中,畫素以0,1)之顏 f貝點CD—L3便位於畫素P_之顏色質點CD丄1的正 、=口此在本發明之某些實施例中,結合兩種畫素圖樣 =曰曰顯不器具有更對稱的顏色分佈效果。圖6(a)-6(b)繪 不晝素圖樣610的質點極性圖案,而晝素圖樣議是應^ 圖⑷與圖5(b)之畫素圖樣以使多域垂直配向顯示器具 更對稱的顏色分佈效果。 —[〇〇68]在圖6(幻中,晝素圖樣61〇具有三個顏色分量, 而每個顏色分量又分割成三個顏色質點,關個顏色分量 =的顏色貝點的電極是彼此耦合。顏色質點CD一 1 一 1(即為 第:顏色分量之第一個顏色質點)、cd_2」(即為第一二顏色 分量之第一個顏色質點)、CD一3_丨(即為第三顏色分量之第 一個顏色質點)構成晝素圖樣610的第一列。顏色質點 CD—1_2、CD—2-2、CD—3_2構成畫素圖樣61〇的第二列二 不過,第二列偏移第一列以使得顏色質點CD—1 一1鄰接於 顏色質點CD—2_2。如前所述’在此所述的顏色質點通常會 間隔鄰接的顏色質點一個垂直(或水平)質點間距。顏色^ 點CD_1 _3、CD—2—3、CD_3—3構成晝素圖樣6丨〇的第三列^ 且弟二列是與第一列對齊以使得顏色質點CJ)一1 3鄰接於 顏色質點CD一2一2。此外,晝素610更包括開關元件i ;、 SE—2、SE—3 ’其中開關元件SE_1、SE—2、SE 3是分別束 接至顏色質點CDJ」、CD—2—3、CD」」。再者,開^ 件SE—1、SE—2、SE—3亦構成一列,並與晝素61〇之第一 28 200846750 列對背。開關元件SE_1是城至顏色質點c ί、 ⑶丄2、CD丄3的電極,其中顏色質點 的電 是藉由顏色質點CD 1 2、CD丨―― 电柽 件,且顏色質點CDr2^t 的電極而搞接至開關元件。^由顏色質點⑷」 , f .* CO 2 + CD ' ' D*f# SE-2 ^ 關开株ςρ , 3 + — — - D—2-1的電極,而開 奇件-3疋龟性耦接至顏色質點CD__3j、CD 3 2、 Γη^的/rf。前述圖中已綠示開關元件與顏色質點電極 定;接方式’而每個圖示均代表本發明之特 輕易推出這些連結關係。技斉者田了依據本發明的概念而 [0069]在圖6(a)中,金音同接 的範例。在此負質點極性G L =負質f極性圖案 元件SE—2與顏色質·點CD 2卜弟=色上!(即為開關 極性,而繁一 一一 ―2—2、CD—2—3)具有正 ^ SE-J' SE-3 CD」」)具有負圖—丄^ CD」J、CD—3—2、 量(即為開關元件SE 2與顏色f ^木中,第二顏色分 件SEJ、SE 3與顏色f = c;;,二顏色分量(即為開關元 CD-3^ . Cd'3 2' CD 3 3)?,L1 ' ^1-2 ' ^1-3 ' 每個晝素會在影像關―之間)反覆 ==在實際操作令’ 質點極性圖案。 设切換正貝點極性圖案與負 ]對於同和應用圖4、5⑻、5⑻之畫素圖樣與圖 29 200846750 6(a)-6(b)之畫素圖樣的多域垂直配向液晶顯示器的晝素而 言,其應以交替列的方式排列成為交替的質點極性圖案。 舉例而言,奇數列的晝素便應用圖4、5(a)、5(b)之晝素圖 樣,而偶數列的晝素便應用圖6(a)、6(b)之晝素圖樣,且每 列中的畫素具有交替的質點極性圖案。圖6(c)繪示顯示器 600的局部,而顯示器600便是具有以交替列的方式排列 之交替的質點極性圖案。具體而言,顯示器600包括晝素 P(0,0)、P(1,0)、P(2,0)、P(0,1)、P(l,l)、P(2,l)。為求清楚, 每個晝素的範圍是用陰影標示,而此陰影僅用於解釋圖 6(c),且無任何功能上的意義。由於每行上的開關元件具有 相同的極性,所以圖6(c)需要採用開關元件行反轉驅動機 制,亦即為相鄰兩行之開關元件的極性是彼此相反。晝素 P(0,0)、P(1,0)、P(2,0)是應用圖6(a)-6(b)之晝素圖樣,而晝 素 P(0,1)、P(l,l)、P(2,l)是應用圖 4、5(a)、5(b)之晝素圖 樣。具體而言,晝素P(〇,〇)、p(2,0)是如圖6(a)之負質點極 性圖案,而畫素P(l,〇)是如圖6(b)之正質點極性圖案。類 似地,畫素P(〇,l)、P(2,l)是如圖5(a)之負質點極性圖案, 而畫素P(l,l)是如圖5(b)之正質點極性圖案。如此一來, 圖6(c)之顯示器600便具有第一組畫素、第二組畫素、第 三組晝素以及第四組晝素,其中第一組晝素是應用第一種 晝素圖樣並具有第一質點極性圖案,而第二組晝素亦是應 用第一種晝素圖樣但具有第二質點極性圖案,且第三組晝 素是應用第二種晝素圖樣並具有第一質點極性圖案,又第 四組畫素亦是應用第二種晝素圖樣但具有第二質點極性圖 案。換句話說,圖6(c)的質點極性圖案是以行反覆交替排 30 200846750 列。舉例而言’在某一圖框中,偶數行的畫素是具有正質 點極性圖案,而奇數行的畫素便具有負質點極性圖荦。在 二偶數行的晝素便具有負質點極性圖案:、而奇 數订的里素疋具有正質點極性圖案。 成西=細:圖6(C)後,不同極性的顏色質點亦構 ΐ,2 個= 畫素ρ(0,0)的顏色質點CD\ /且/ 。舉例而言, 正極性的彥 =所二⑽ θ ώ查本D、 、 〇圍。明確地說,顏色質點CD_3 1 Ϊ ciLTl顏色質點CD—2—1、晝素P(U)的顏色質 色分量均為鑛齒圖案圖内界本,個顏 之顯示器具有更對稱的顏色;:二 P(〇;imi^f(,cD__u.CD_L,CD 2 3 :;=D-U,」—2,則構成‘^ 發明之某些實施例仍沿用如圖之孝 為圖5⑷是採用開_件點反轉驅動機制,而圖:(c) 分:!。亦即相較於採用開關元件行反轉驅動:二 =:,採用開關元件點反轉驅動 … 升影像的品質。 了p牛低晝面閃燦料音現象以提 [0072]圖6(d)_6(e)綠示晝素圖樣62〇的質點極性圖 200846750 二::f = 用圖5(d)與5⑷之晝素圖樣以使 夕域垂直配向顯示器具有更對稱的顏色 中’畫素圖樣620具有三個顏色分量,而每個顏色;量1 ==色質點,且同個顏色分量中的顏色質點的電 極疋彼_合。顏色質‘點CD—u(即為第—顏 :個顏色質點)、C.D—2J(即為第二顏色分量之第一個顏2 :=)、CD_3_1(即為第三顏色分量之第—個顏色質點鳩成 旦素圖樣620的第一列。顏色質點CD—1—2、CD 2 2、 CD_3—2構成晝素圖樣㈣的第二列。不過,第二列偏移第 一列以使得顏色質點CD」j鄰接於顏色質•點cd 2 色質點CD:1?、CD_2」、cd_3—3構成晝素圖樣^ 二列,且弟二列是與第—列對齊以使得顏色質點cd ^ 3 鄰接於顏色質點CD又2。此外,畫素62〇更包括開關元件 SE—1、SE_2、SE—3 ’ 其令開關元件兕」、SE—2、se 3 3 分·接至顏色質點CD」」、CD—2」、CD」——3,且分= ^於元件裝置區域DCA— i、DcA—2、DCA—3。元件裝置區 / DCA_1 DCA_2、DCA一3構成晝素圖樣620的第四列, 且第四列是與第二列對齊。此外,如目_所示,開關元 件SE—1是耦接至顏色質點CD_U、cd」_2、cd工3 電極,其中顏色質點CD—u的電極是藉由顏色質點 CD—1 一2、CD_1_3的電極而耦接至開關元件,且顏色質點 CD—1—2的電極是藉由顏色質點CDj—3的電極而麵接 關7L件。類似地,開關元件SE—2是電性祕至顏色質點 CD_2_3、CD—2—2、CD—2—1 的電極,而開關元件 SE 3 3 電性輕接至顏色質點CD_3_3、CD_3_2、eD_3」@ 32 200846750 _3]在圖6(d)中’晝素圖樣62〇_為負質點極性 的在此負質點極性圖案中,第二顏色分量(即為開關 70 E—2與顏色質點CD又j、CD—2—2、cd 3正 極性,而第-與第三顏色分量(即為開關元件^ :、有 與顏色質點⑶丄卜⑶」—2、CD1—3、CD」_ia) CD 3_3)具有負極性。在圖⑽中,畫素圖樣⑽+為正質 的^ °在此正質點極性圖案中,第二顏色分 里(即為開關兀件SE—2與顏色質點CD 2 κ 具s!負極性’而第一與第三顏色分量(即為開關元 件—1、SE_3與顏色質點CDj」、CD—匕2、⑶3 2、CD~3'3)具有正極性:在實際操作中: _框之間反覆⑽正#點姉圖宰愈負 質點極性圖案。 口木共貞 6rd、:r]f於同時應用圖5(d)、5(e)之晝素圖樣與圖 -二之旦素圖樣的多域垂直配向液晶顯示器的書+而 二,其應以交替列的方式排列成為交 圖^而 舉例而言’奇數列的畫素便應用圖5⑷、5⑷之書^圖了。 而f數列的畫素便應用圖6(句、6⑷之畫素圖樣,且每列 的旦素具有交替的質點極性圖案。圖6_示顯示 的局部,而顯示器65〇便是 650 替的質點極性圖荦。^^^父曰列的方式排列之交 每個晝素的範岐㈣影標*,而此陰’ 6(f)’且無任何功能上的意義。由於每行 元 相同的極性,所以同]闕凡件具有 斤以圖6(f)需要採用開關元件行反轉驅動機 33 200846750 制,亦即為相鄰兩行之開關元件的極性是彼此相反。晝素 m〇)、P(l,0)、P(2,0)是應用圖6(d)姻之晝素圖樣^晝 素P(〇,l)、P(l,l)、p(2,l)是應用圖5⑻、5(e)之畫素圖樣。 八體而σ I素p(G’G)、p(2,G)是如圖6⑹之負質點極性圖 案,而畫素P(1,0)是如圖6(e)之正質點極性圖案。類似地, 旦素P(0,1)、P(2,l)是如圖5⑷之負質點極性圖案,而晝素 P(U)是如圖5⑷之正質點極性圖案。然而,在下一圖框 中,所有的晝素便會切換質點極性圖案。如此一來,圖 之顯示器650便具有第一組晝素、第二組畫素、第三組畫 素^及第四組畫素,其中第—組晝素是應用第—種畫素圖 樣亚具有第-質點極性圖案,而第二組畫素亦是應用第一 種,素®樣但具有第二f點極性㈣,且第三組畫素是應 用第二種晝素圖樣並具有第一質點極性圖案,又第四組晝 素亦=應用第二種畫素圖樣但具有第二質點極性圖案。換 勹舌。兒圖6(f)的貝點極性圖案是以行反覆交替排列。舉 例而σ在某一圖框中,偶數行的晝素是具有正質點極性 圖案,而奇數行的晝素便具有負質點極性圖案。在下一圖 框中’偶數行的晝素便具有負質點極性圖案,而奇數行的 畫素是具有正質點極性圖案。 、㈧075]當再細看圖6(f)後,不同極性的顏色質點亦構 ^西洋棋盤圖案。亦即對每個具有第—極性的顏色質點而 。其鄰接的四個顏色質點(忽略沒有極性的元件裝置區域) =具有第二極性。舉例而言,畫素ρ(〇,〇)的顏色質點cD_3 ^ -、有負極〖生,且被四個具有正極性的顏色質點所包圍。明 確地5兄’顏色質點CD—3J是由晝素p(l,l)的顏色質點 34 200846750 CD_1_3(忽略晝素P(l,l)的元件裝置區域)、晝素P(0,0)的顏 色質點CD_2_1以及晝素P(1,0)的顏色質點CD_1_1、 CD_1_2戶斤包圍。如此一來,無論在畫素的内部或是邊界, 每個顏色分量均為鋸齒圖案,所以相較於圖5(f)而言,本 實施例之顯示器具有更對稱的顏色分佈效果。舉例而言, 晝素P(〇,l)的顏色質點CD_1_1、CD_1_2、CD_1_3以及晝 素P(0,0)的顏色質點CD_1_1、CD_1_2、CD_1_3則構成鋸 齒圖案。然而,本發明之某些實施例仍沿用如圖5(f)之畫 素圖案,這是因為圖5(f)是採用開關元件點反轉驅動機制, 而圖6(f)是採用開關元件行反轉驅動機制,其中開關元件 點反轉驅動機制相較於開關元件行反轉驅動機制具有更均 勻的電性分佈。亦即相較於採用開關元件行反轉驅動機制 的液晶顯示器而言,採用開關元件點反轉驅動機制的液晶 顯示器具有較均勻的電性分佈,而可降低畫面閃爍與串音 現象以提升影像的品質。 [0076]如前所述,當液晶顯示器的晝素變大時,邊緣 電場會變的相對較小,而使得有必要將畫素進一步分割。 圖7(a)-7(b)為依據本發明另一實施例之晝素圖樣710之質 點極性圖案。在圖7(a)中,每個晝素圖樣710之顏色分量 是分割成四個顏色質點,而且同個顏色分量中的顏色質點 的電極是彼此耦合。此外,對應每個顏色分量,晝素圖樣 710會具有一個元件裝置區域。在本發明之許多實施例中, 開關元件是位於元件裝置區域。在這些實施例中,元件裝 置區域可與對應之顏色分量的顏色質點以對角、水平或垂 直的方式鄰接,以減少開關元件與顏色質點之間的導線長 35 200846750 步而言,在本發明之某些實施例中,元件裝置 m或疋非透光的,而在本發明之其他實施例中,元件裝置 區域可進行著色以產生特定的顏色效果。儘管圖$⑷、 日)、5(c)、6⑻、6⑻、6⑷並未緣示元件裝置區域,本發 月=其他實施例仍可應用與畫素圖樣51〇、⑽之相同的顏 貝^配置’並為每個顏色分量配置—個元件裝置區域。 陶7]在畫素圖樣7U)中,顏色f點CD—即為第一 ^色分量之第一個顏色質點)、CD力(即為第—二顏色分量 個顏色質點)、CD-3—1(即為第三顏色分量之第一個 =質點«成晝素圖樣710的第一列。顏色質點CD丄2、 一 —2—2、CD—3一2構成晝素圖樣71〇的第二列。不過,第 -列偏移第-列以使得顏色質點CD—L2 。顏色質點CD丄3、CD—2—3 三列,且第三列是與第—列對齊以使得顏 色貝2 CD_2—3水平對準顏色質點CD丄2。亦即顏 HU水平對準顏色質點〇^2,並與顏色質點cd 垂直間隔一個垂直質點間距VDS (未繪示)。顏色質點 ⑶:1—4、CD—2」、CD-3-4構成畫素圖樣的第四列, 且第四列是與第二列對齊以使得顏色質點CD Η 顏色質點CD—2—3。元件裝置區域DCAj、Dc:;、% a—3 構成畫素圖樣71〇的第五列’且第五列是與第四列(以及第[0063] FIG. 5(d) and FIG. 5(e) illustrate a morpheme pattern 52〇, and the morphe pattern 520 has the same color quality arrangement as the pixel map # _ of FIG. 4(8), but the tilapia pattern 520 is more It includes component device areas DCAj, DCA-2, DCA-3. As mentioned above, the component and the storage capacitor are disposed in the area of the device 1 but are limited by the space of the drawing, and the storage capacitor is not shown in the figure. Specifically, the color dot CD_u (that is, the first color dot of the _th color component), CD sense! (ie, the first color component of the second color component), 0)"-1 (ie, the third The first color _ of the color component _ constitutes the first column of the tilde pattern 520. The color dot CD"", cD 2 2 CD 丄 2 constitutes the second column of the tilde pattern 52 。. However: the second column offset - listed so that the color dot CD丄2 7jc is aligned with the color dot CD-2. The color material in the first column is separated from the second color by two degrees. The straight dot spacing VDS. Color dot cdj", CD 2 3. (3) 3 constitutes the third column of the pixel pattern 520, and the third column is won with the first column so that the color dot CD_2_3 is horizontally aligned with the color dot CDj-2. The meta-splitting region DCA J, DCA-2, The DCA-3 constitutes the =-column of the 昼 prime pattern and the fourth column is aligned with the third column such that the component device region d is horizontally aligned with the color dot CDJ-3. Furthermore, the switching element commits i, - 25 200846750 SE - 3疋 is located in the component device area 」, 2, dc, and the switch element SE" is consumed to the color point CDjj—, E-2 is Connected to the color ~ - a 2 - 3 electrode, and the switching element S £ 3 疋 is coupled to the color dot CD" J, (3) - 3 - 2, CD 3 3 electrode. - Sexual map Γ = Γ) and Figure 5 (· Two kinds of particle polarity maps of 昼素素 pattern 520: L 昼 prime pattern 52 〇 (labeled as 52 〇 _) negative point pole - figure wood, body in the 昼 prime pattern 52 〇 negative point polarity map The slaughter, - color component (that is, the switching element SE-2 and the color dot CD 2 is gate 2ϋ2-3) has positive polarity, and the first and third color components (ie, switch to SE- ―3 and color point (^丄(3)1 2: :D-1, 3, CD—3—1, CD_3—2, CD—3—3) have negative polarity. Figure-: Non-denier pattern 520 (marked as 520+) positive dot polarity pattern. In the book element: =22〇, the positive color dot pattern 'the second color component (that is, the switch read SE-2 and the color dot cd_2j, cd-2-2, cd 2 f The first and third color components (ie, the switching element W 3 and the color dots CDjj, CD丄2, CD13, CD 3i, m 3 &amp; CD-3-3) have positive polarity. In actual operation, Each 昼:: repeatedly switches between the first box The polarity pattern of the particle and the mass: polar [(10)65] application of the element 5 (d) and the element of the figure of Fig. 5 (4), then = the half of the checkerboard pattern 'half of the pixels are positive and the other, ' It has a negative polarity. Head 5 (to hide this checkerboard, and the checkerboard pattern of the West is composed of the picture 550 of the display 550; p(10), mountain, (10). For the sake of "table;; 0) every 26 200846750 vegetative The scope is marked with a shadow 'and this shadow is only used to explain and,,,, anything else. As shown in Fig. 5(1), the pixel p(x, y) is shown as the Xth row from the left, and the pixel of the third column is counted below, that is, the ρ(ο,ο) is located in the lower left corner. . Further, the alizarins p(00), P(20), and ρ(ι^ have a positive dot polarity pattern, and the pixels ρ(1,0) and ρ(0, υ, ρ(2 have a negative dot polarity pattern. Therefore, in Fig. 5(f), when the ordinal number χ plus the ordinal number y 2 is odd, then the pixel P(X, y) has a negative particle polarity pattern. Conversely, when the ordinal number X plus the ordinal number y is even, then The alizarin p(x, y) has a positive particle polarity pattern. However, when switching to the next frame, all the pixels will change the particle polarity pattern. So, the pattern should be Guan and Liu (10) The multi-domain vertical alignment display has a first group of pixels and a second group of pixels, wherein the first group of pixels has a first-particle polarity pattern, and the second group of pixels has a second particle polarity pattern, and the first group The pixels and the second set of pixels are arranged in a checkerboard pattern. [0066] The difference between the display 550 and the display 5 is only in the component device area. If the component device area is small enough, the color dots constituting the checkerboard pattern can be maintained. Enhanced edge electric field. However, certain embodiments of the present invention utilize regions of larger component devices to enable various regions In the domain, the polarity of the color dot in each charm can still form a checkerboard pattern, but it does not necessarily extend to the entire display area. For example, the display 55〇 The checkerboard pattern can be spread over the entire display area. However, other embodiments of the present invention can take the polarities of alizarin P (〇, 〇), p(], 〇), p (2) when the component device area is sufficiently large. Inverted. [〇〇67] In Figure 5(c) and Figure 5(£), any color component in the elementary crystal 27 200846750 The color particle is a mineral tooth pattern (2), so the upper two elements are The color point of the specific color component will be connected to the edge of the pixel. For example, in the display 500, the pixel is 0, 1), the face f, CD-L3 is located at the color point of the pixel P_. Positive and = mouth of CD丄1 In some embodiments of the present invention, combining two pixel patterns = 曰曰 display has a more symmetrical color distribution effect. Figure 6 (a) - 6 (b) The particle polarity pattern of the FT-like pattern 610, and the pixel pattern is the pixel pattern of Figure (4) and Figure 5 (b) to make the multi-domain vertical alignment display device More symmetrical color distribution effect. —[〇〇68] In Figure 6 (the illusion, the 昼素 pattern 61〇 has three color components, and each color component is divided into three color mascupoints, and the color component is turned off. The electrodes of the color point are coupled to each other. The color dot CD 1-1 (that is, the first color point of the color component), cd_2" (that is, the first color dot of the first two color component), CD A 3_丨 (that is, the first color dot of the third color component) constitutes the first column of the pixel pattern 610. The color dots CD-1_2, CD-2-2, CD-3_2 constitute a pixel pattern 61〇 Second column two, however, the second column is offset from the first column such that the color dot CD-1 is adjacent to the color dot CD-2_2. As previously mentioned, the color dots described herein will typically be spaced apart by a vertical (or horizontal) dot spacing of adjacent color dots. The color ^ point CD_1 _3, CD 2-3, CD_3 - 3 constitute the third column of the enamel pattern 6 ^ ^ and the second column is aligned with the first column so that the color point CJ) - 1 3 is adjacent to the color point CD one 2-2. In addition, the halogen element 610 further includes a switching element i; SE-1, SE-3' wherein the switching elements SE_1, SE-2, SE3 are respectively connected to the color dot CDJ", CD-2-3, CD"" . Furthermore, the open items SE-1, SE-2, SE-3 also constitute a column, and are opposite to the first 28 200846750 of the 昼素〇. The switching element SE_1 is an electrode of the city-to-color color point c ί, (3) 丄 2, CD 丄 3, wherein the color of the color dot is by the color dot CD 1 2, CD 丨 - the electric component, and the color dot CDr2^t The electrode is connected to the switching element. ^ by color point (4)", f.* CO 2 + CD ' ' D*f# SE-2 ^ turn off the electrode of ςρ, 3 + — — - D-2-1, and open the odd--3 turtle Coupling to /rf of color dot CD__3j, CD 3 2, Γη^. In the foregoing figures, the green switching element and the color dot electrode are determined; and each of the figures represents the characteristics of the present invention which are easily introduced. The technique is based on the concept of the present invention. [0069] In Fig. 6(a), the example of the golden tone is connected. In this negative particle polarity GL = negative quality f polarity pattern element SE-2 and color quality point CD 2 Bud = color on! (ie is the switch polarity, and the one-to-one - 2-2, CD - 2 - 3 ) has a positive ^ SE-J' SE-3 CD"") with a negative map - 丄 ^ CD" J, CD - 3 - 2, the amount (that is, the switching element SE 2 and the color f ^ wood, the second color Pieces SEJ, SE 3 and color f = c;;, two color components (ie, switch element CD-3^. Cd'3 2' CD 3 3)?, L1 '^1-2 ' ^1-3 ' per The pixel will repeat in the image off -= in the actual operation order 'particle polarity pattern. Set the polarity pattern of the positive-beat point and the negative] for the multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display with the pixel pattern of Figure 4, 5(8), 5(8) and the pixel pattern of Figure 29 200846750 6(a)-6(b) In this case, they should be arranged in an alternating column to form an alternating particle polarity pattern. For example, the elements of the odd-numbered columns apply the tilde pattern of Figures 4, 5(a), and 5(b), and the elements of the even-numbered columns apply the tilde pattern of Figures 6(a) and 6(b). And the pixels in each column have alternating pattern of particle polarity. Figure 6(c) shows a portion of display 600, and display 600 has alternating dot polarity patterns arranged in alternating columns. Specifically, the display 600 includes pixels P(0,0), P(1,0), P(2,0), P(0,1), P(l,l), P(2,l). . For clarity, the range of each element is shaded, and this shadow is only used to explain Figure 6(c) and has no functional significance. Since the switching elements on each row have the same polarity, Fig. 6(c) requires the switching element row inversion driving mechanism, that is, the polarities of the adjacent two rows of switching elements are opposite to each other. The alizarin P(0,0), P(1,0), and P(2,0) are the alizarin patterns of Fig. 6(a)-6(b), and the alizarin P(0,1), P (l, l), P(2, l) are the tiling patterns of Figs. 4, 5(a), and 5(b). Specifically, the halogen P (〇, 〇), p (2, 0) is a negative particle polarity pattern as shown in Fig. 6 (a), and the pixel P (l, 〇) is positive as shown in Fig. 6 (b) Particle polarity pattern. Similarly, the pixels P(〇, l) and P(2, l) are negative particle polarity patterns as shown in Fig. 5(a), and the pixels P(l, l) are positive particles as shown in Fig. 5(b). Polar pattern. In this way, the display 600 of FIG. 6(c) has a first group of pixels, a second group of pixels, a third group of pixels, and a fourth group of pixels, wherein the first group of pixels is the first type of element. The prime pattern has a first dot polarity pattern, and the second group of halogens is also applied with the first halogen pattern but has a second dot polarity pattern, and the third group of halogens is applied with the second elemental pattern and has the first A particle polarity pattern, and the fourth group of pixels is also a second pixel pattern but with a second dot polarity pattern. In other words, the particle polarity pattern of Fig. 6(c) is alternately arranged in rows and columns 30 200846750. For example, in a certain frame, even-numbered rows of pixels have a positive dot polarity pattern, while odd-numbered pixels have a negative dot polarity map. The pixels in the two even rows have a negative dot polarity pattern: and the odd numbered prime has a positive dot polarity pattern. Chengxi=fine: After Fig. 6(C), the color points of different polarities are also constructed, and the two color=the color of the pixel ρ(0,0) is CD\/and/. For example, the positive polarity of the column = the second (10) θ ώ check the D, , and 〇. Specifically, the color quality of the color dot CD_3 1 Ϊ ciLTl color dot CD 2-1, 昼 prime P (U) is the inner boundary of the mineral tooth pattern, and the display of the color has a more symmetrical color; Two P(〇;imi^f(,cD__u.CD_L,CD 2 3 :;=DU,"—2, constitutes '^ Some embodiments of the invention still use the filial figure as shown in Figure 5 (4) is to use the open point Reverse drive mechanism, and Figure: (c) points: !. That is, compared to the use of switching elements row inversion drive: two =:, using switching elements point inversion drive ... up the quality of the image. The phenomenon of the surface flashing sound is mentioned in [0072] Fig. 6(d)_6(e) Green 昼 图 图 62 62 62 62 467 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 The vertices vertical alignment display has a more symmetrical color. The 'pixel element 620 has three color components, and each color; the quantity 1 == the color point, and the electrodes of the color points in the same color component are combined. Color quality 'point CD-u (that is, the first color: a color point), CD-2J (that is, the first color of the second color component 2:=), CD_3_1 (that is, the third color component) a face The color point is the first column of the pattern 620. The color dot CD-1-2, CD22, CD_3-2 constitutes the second column of the elementary pattern (4). However, the second column is offset by the first column to make The color dot CD"j is adjacent to the color quality. The dot cd 2 chromatic dot CD: 1?, CD_2", cd_3-3 constitutes the tilde pattern ^ two columns, and the second column is aligned with the first column to make the color dot cd ^ 3 Adjacent to the color dot CD and 2. In addition, the pixel 62 includes switching elements SE-1, SE_2, SE-3' which causes the switching element 兕", SE-2, and se 3 3 to be connected to the color dot CD "", CD-2", CD"-3, and == in the component device area DCA-i, DcA-2, DCA-3. Component device area / DCA_1 DCA_2, DCA-3 constitutes the elementary pattern 620 The fourth column, and the fourth column is aligned with the second column. Further, as shown in the figure, the switching element SE-1 is coupled to the color dot CD_U, cd"_2, and the CD 3 electrode, wherein the color dot CD- The electrode of u is coupled to the switching element by the electrodes of the color dots CD-1-2, CD_1_3, and the electrode of the color dot CD_1-2 is the electrode of the color dot CDj-3 The surface is connected to the 7L piece. Similarly, the switching element SE-2 is an electrode that is electrically secreted to the color dots CD_2_3, CD-2-2, CD-2-1, and the switching element SE 3 3 is electrically connected to the color. Particles CD_3_3, CD_3_2, eD_3"@ 32 200846750 _3] In Figure 6(d), the 昼 prime pattern 62〇 _ is the negative particle polarity in the negative particle polarity pattern, the second color component (ie the switch 70 E - 2 and the color point CD and j, CD-2-2, cd 3 positive polarity, and the first and third color components (that is, the switching element ^:, and the color point (3) 丄 (3)" - 2, CD1 - 3 CD"_ia) CD 3_3) has a negative polarity. In Fig. (10), the pixel pattern (10)+ is a positive ^^ in the positive dot polarity pattern, and the second color is divided (ie, the switch element SE-2 and the color dot CD 2 κ has s! negative polarity) The first and third color components (ie, switching element -1, SE_3 and color dot CDj), CD-匕2, (3)3 2, CD~3'3) have positive polarity: in actual operation: _ between boxes Repeated (10) positive #点姊图宰越 negative particle polarity pattern. Mouth wood 贞6rd, :r]f at the same time apply the Figure 5 (d), 5 (e) 昼 图 与 与 图 图 图 二The multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display book + and 2, which should be arranged in an alternating column to form an intersection graph ^ and for example, the odd-numbered pixels are applied to the graphs of Figs. 5(4) and 5(4). The pixel is applied with the pixel pattern of Figure 6 (sentence, 6 (4), and the denier of each column has an alternating pattern of particle polarity. Figure 6 shows the portion of the display, and the display 65 is the 650 dot polarity map. ^^^ The way the parent column is arranged is the same as the standard of each element (4), and this yin '6(f)' has no functional meaning. Since each line is the same Polarity, so the same thing 具有 件 以 以 以 以 以 以 以 以 以 以 以 以 以 以 以 以 6 6 6 6 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 , P (l, 0), P (2, 0) is the application of Figure 6 (d) 昼 昼 图 昼 昼 昼 昼 昼 昼 昼 昼 昼 昼 昼 昼 昼 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 是 是 是 是 是 是 是 是 是 是 是Apply the pixel patterns of Figures 5(8) and 5(e). Eight bodies and σ I prime p(G'G), p(2, G) are negative particle polarity patterns as shown in Fig. 6(6), and pixels P(1,0) ) is the positive particle polarity pattern as shown in Fig. 6(e). Similarly, the denier P(0,1), P(2,l) is the negative particle polarity pattern as shown in Fig. 5(4), and the halogen P(U) is The positive dot polarity pattern is shown in Fig. 5(4). However, in the next frame, all the pixels will switch the particle polarity pattern. Thus, the display 650 has the first group of pixels, the second group of pixels, The third group of pixels ^ and the fourth group of pixels, wherein the first group of pixels is applied to the first type of pixel pattern sub-having a first-particle polarity pattern, and the second group of pixels is also applied to the first type, But with the second f-point polarity (four), and the third group of pixels is the second morpheme pattern And having the first particle polarity pattern, and the fourth group of pixels also = applying the second pixel pattern but having the second particle polarity pattern. Changing the tongue. The pixel pattern of Fig. 6(f) is repeated Alternately arranged. For example, σ is in a certain frame, the pixels of the even rows are patterned with a positive dot polarity, and the pixels of the odd rows have a negative polarity pattern. In the next frame, the elements of the even rows are There is a negative dot polarity pattern, and odd-numbered pixels have a positive dot polarity pattern. (8) 075] When you look closely at Figure 6(f), the color dots of different polarities also form a Western checkerboard pattern. That is, for each color particle having the first polarity. Its adjacent four color dots (ignoring the component device area without polarity) = have a second polarity. For example, the color point cD_3 ^ - of the pixel ρ (〇, 〇) has a negative electrode and is surrounded by four color dots having a positive polarity. Clearly 5 brothers 'color dot CD-3J is the color point of the pixel p (l, l) 34 200846750 CD_1_3 (ignoring the element device area of the alizarin P (l, l)), the pixel P (0,0) The color dot CD_2_1 and the color point of the pixel P (1,0) are surrounded by CD_1_1 and CD_1_2. As a result, each color component is a sawtooth pattern in the interior or boundary of the pixel, so that the display of the present embodiment has a more symmetrical color distribution effect than that of Fig. 5(f). For example, the color dots CD_1_1, CD_1_2, CD_1_3 of the halogen P (〇, l) and the color dots CD_1_1, CD_1_2, CD_1_3 of the prime P (0, 0) constitute a sawtooth pattern. However, some embodiments of the present invention still follow the pixel pattern of FIG. 5(f) because FIG. 5(f) uses a switching element dot inversion driving mechanism, and FIG. 6(f) uses a switching element. A row inversion driving mechanism in which a switching element dot inversion driving mechanism has a more uniform electrical distribution than a switching element row inversion driving mechanism. That is to say, compared with a liquid crystal display using a switching element row inversion driving mechanism, a liquid crystal display using a switching element dot inversion driving mechanism has a relatively uniform electrical distribution, and can reduce image flicker and crosstalk to enhance an image. Quality. As described above, when the pixel of the liquid crystal display becomes large, the edge electric field becomes relatively small, making it necessary to further divide the pixel. Figures 7(a)-7(b) are particle polarity patterns of a tilde pattern 710 in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention. In Fig. 7(a), the color component of each of the pixel patterns 710 is divided into four color dots, and the electrodes of the color dots in the same color component are coupled to each other. In addition, the tilde pattern 710 will have a component device area corresponding to each color component. In many embodiments of the invention, the switching element is located in the component device area. In these embodiments, the component device region may be contiguous with the color dots of the corresponding color component in a diagonal, horizontal or vertical manner to reduce the wire length between the switching element and the color dot 35. In the present invention, In some embodiments, the component device m or 疋 is non-transmissive, while in other embodiments of the invention, the component device region can be colored to produce a particular color effect. Although the figures $(4), day), 5(c), 6(8), 6(8), and 6(4) do not indicate the component device area, this embodiment can still apply the same facets as the pixel patterns 51〇 and (10) in other embodiments. Configure 'and configure for each color component—a component device area. Tao 7] In the pixel pattern 7U), the color f point CD - that is, the first color point of the first ^ color component), CD force (that is, the first - second color component color point), CD-3 - 1 (that is, the first column of the third color component = the dot «the first column of the enamel pattern 710. The color dot CD 丄 2, 1-2-2, CD-3 2-3 constitute the 昼 prime pattern 71 〇 The second column. However, the first column shifts the -column to make the color dot CD-L2. The color dot CD丄3, CD-2-3 three columns, and the third column is aligned with the first column to make the color shell 2 CD_2—3 is horizontally aligned with the color dot CD丄2. That is, the color HU is horizontally aligned with the color dot 〇^2, and is vertically spaced from the color dot cd by a vertical dot spacing VDS (not shown). Color dot (3): 1-4 , CD-2", CD-3-4 constitute the fourth column of the pixel pattern, and the fourth column is aligned with the second column to make the color dot CD Η color dot CD-2-3. Component device area DCAj, Dc :;,% a-3 constitutes the fifth column of the pixel pattern 71〇' and the fifth column is the fourth column (and the

=列)對齊以使得元件裝置區域腦」鄰接於顏色質點 DJ—4。此外’開關元件SE—i、SE_2、SE =襄置區域DCA—bDC^DCA—3,而開關元㈣; 尺耦接至顏色質點CD11、CD12、CD」3、cD ^4 36 200846750 的電極,其中顏色質點CD 1 1B 4 , CD 1 2、CD 1 3、ΓΠ】 電極是错由顏色質點 ―― ―― ~ -4的電極而耦接至開關元件,而 顏色質點⑶丄2的電極是藉由顏色質點CDl3、ctl4 的電極而耦接至開關元件,且顏色質點cd ] 極· 藉由顏色質點CD丄4的電極而耦接至開關元件二- 開關兀件SE—2是耦接至顏色質點CD—2—卜⑶、 CD—2—3、CD—2—4的電極,又開關元丰 —Alignment = column so that the component device area brain is adjacent to the color dot DJ-4. In addition, the 'switching elements SE-i, SE_2, SE=set the area DCA-bDC^DCA-3, and the switch element (4); the scale is coupled to the electrodes of the color dots CD11, CD12, CD"3, cD^4 36 200846750, Among them, the color dot CD 1 1B 4 , CD 1 2, CD 1 3, ΓΠ] the electrode is connected to the switching element by the electrode of the color particle ——~-4, and the electrode of the color particle (3) 丄2 is borrowed. Coupled to the switching element by the electrodes of the color dots CDl3, ctl4, and the color dot cd] pole is coupled to the switching element by the electrode of the color dot CD丄4 - the switch element SE-2 is coupled to the color The electrodes of the CD- 2 - Bu (3), CD - 2 - 3, CD - 2 - 4, and the switch Yuanfeng -

質點⑴卜CD 3 2、J ”二SE-3是_至顏色 —一 —」CD—3」、CD—3_4的電極。 [0078]圖7(a)同時繪示屮查參闰 FI安Mr仞J- ^ 出旦素圖樣710_之負質點極性 圖案的祀例。在負質點極性圖案中,第二顏色分 關兀件 SE-2 與顏色質·點 CD—2—1、CD_2_2、CD— CD—2_4)具有正極性,而第一鱼裳一 # SF , ςρ, 弟與弟二顏色分即為開關元Particles (1) Bu CD 3 2, J "Second SE-3 is the electrode of _ to color - one -" CD-3", CD-3_4. [0078] Fig. 7(a) also shows an example of the negative polarity pattern of the 安 安 安 安 安 - - - - - 710 710 。 。 。. In the negative dot polarity pattern, the second color separation element SE-2 and the color quality dots CD-2, 1, CD_2_2, CD-CD-2_4 have positive polarity, and the first fish skirt one #SF, ςρ , brother and brother two color points is the switch element

件SE—1、SE—3與顏色質點cd—j—J、CD 丄4、⑶―3—1、CD」〜2、CD—3—3、CD 3 4)具有負極 性。圖7(b)繪示出書专同接A — — h、另貝位 例。在正質ΐ 之正#點極性圖案的範 si 2二? 第二顏色分量(即為開關元件 SE 2 與顏色貝點 CD_U、CD—2—2、cd 2 3、⑶ 具有負極性’㈣―與第三顏色分量(即為開關元件⑴、 SE—3與顏色f點CD」J、⑶丄2、CD丄3、CD丄—4、 CD—3—1、CD」—2、CD」〜3、CD—3—4)具有正極性。 質點極性亦即偶數行與奇數行的晝素是具有相反的 ⑽…㈤、、。圖 7(c&gt;會示由晝素 P(0,0)、p(l,〇)、P(2,〇)、 々二金組成的交替行圖案。為求清楚表示, 旦/、的範園是用陰影標示,而此陰影僅用於解釋圖 37 200846750 7⑹’且無任何功能上的意義 mυ、悦〇)、P(2, !)具有負,斤不’晝素m〇)、 I η目女丁供 、、°、極生圖案’而書辛Pf】〇)、 P(U)具有正質點極性圖案-言(】,〇) P(x,y)可為第一質點極性圖安士田X為可數時’畫素 素㈣可為第二質點極二宰相^當X為偶數時,晝 所有的晝素均會切換質點極而:圖0/:述,在下-個圖框時,Pieces SE-1, SE-3 and color dots cd-j-J, CD 丄4, (3)-3-1, CD"~2, CD-3-3, CD3 4) have negative polarity. Fig. 7(b) shows an example in which the book is connected to A--h and another shell. In the positive ΐ 正 正 正 正 正 正 正 正 正 正 正 正 正 正 正 正 正 正 正 正 正 正 正 正 正 正The second color component (ie, the switching element SE 2 and the color point CD_U, CD_2-2, cd 2 3, (3) has a negative polarity '(four)- and a third color component (ie, the switching element (1), SE-3 and The color f dot CD "J, (3) 丄 2, CD 丄 3, CD 丄 4, CD 3-1, CD" - 2, CD" ~ 3, CD 3-4" has positive polarity. The even and odd rows of pixels have the opposite (10)...(5), and Fig. 7 (c&gt; is shown by the primes P(0,0), p(l,〇), P(2,〇), 々 An alternate row pattern consisting of two golds. For clarity, the Fan Park is marked with a shadow, and this shadow is only used to explain Figure 37 200846750 7(6)' and has no functional significance mυ, Banyan, P (2, !) has a negative, jin does not '昼素 m〇), I η目女丁供,, °, extreme pattern 'and the book Xin Pf】 〇), P (U) has a positive dot polarity pattern - words (], 〇) P(x, y) can be the first particle polarity map when the Anshitian X is countable. 'Graphic element (4) can be the second point of the second point. When X is even, all 昼The prime will switch the particle point very much: Figure 0/: stated, in the next frame,

_〇]在本發明之某些實 動機制是用於取代開關元件行反二:凡2反轉驅 :點反轉驅動機制可使開關元件 = 二=元件行反轉驅動機制可使開關元件的= :::2 ;元件點反轉驅動機制可提供較均勾的電 一氐旦面閃爍與串音現象以提升影像的口質。 的極性構成西洋棋盤圖案,應用圖;7 :素圖案之另一種晝素圖案亦被提出 (_〇] Some of the actual mechanisms of the present invention are used to replace the switching element row two: where 2 reverse driving: the point inversion driving mechanism can make the switching element = two = element row inversion driving mechanism can make the switching element = :::2; The component dot inversion drive mechanism provides a more uniform electrical-single-face flicker and crosstalk to improve the quality of the image. The polarity constitutes the western checkerboard pattern, the application map; 7: another alizarin pattern of the prime pattern is also proposed (

樣73°之負質點極性圖 =圖案(標示為73〇+)’其+畫素圖樣);二 示’畫素圖樣730之每個顏色分 里刀d成四個顏色質點。顏色質 分量之第-個顏色質點)、心 點i、cDAj(即為第三顏色分量之第一個顏色 CD ))構成晝素圖樣730的第—列。顏色質點CDJ 2、 二川:、⑶」一2構成晝素圖樣730的第二列。不過,第 &amp;IJ偏移第一列以使得顏色質點CD_2_2鄰接於顏色質點 丄1。亦即顏色質點CD又2是水平對準顏色質點 38 200846750 CD—1 一1,並與顏色質點cdj—丨垂直間隔一個垂直質點間 距VDS。顏色質點CD丄3、CD_2—3、CD—3」構成晝素 圖樣730的第三列,且第三列是與第一列對齊以使得^色 質點CD丄3鄰接於顏色質·點CD_2_2。顏色質點⑶丄斗、 CD—2—4、CD—3一4構成畫素圖樣730的第四列,且第四列 是與第二刺齊以使得顏色質點CD—2—4 _於顏色質點 CD丄3。元件裝置區域DCA—卜DCA—2、dca—3構成晝 素圖樣730 #第五列,且第五列是對齊於第一列盘第三 3。此外’開關元件SE—卜SE—2、SE—3是分別㈣轉 衣置區域DCA—i、DCA_2、dca_3,而開關元件兕 耦接至顏色質點CDJ」、CD一 1—2、CD丄3、CD」—4 ^極,其+顏色質點CD—U的電極是藉由顏-色質點 顏^心丄^⑶—^的電極而輕接至開關元件赘而 ,、色貝點CD—1—2的電極是藉由顏色質點CDj」、cdNegative particle polarity map of 73° = pattern (labeled as 73〇+)' its + pixel pattern); second, each color of the pixel pattern 730 is divided into four color points. The first color pixel of the color quality component, the heart point i, cDAj (i.e., the first color CD of the third color component) constitutes the first column of the tilde pattern 730. The color dot CDJ 2, Erchuan:, (3)"-2 constitutes the second column of the alizarin pattern 730. However, the &amp;IJ is offset by the first column such that the color dot CD_2_2 is adjacent to the color dot 丄1. That is, the color dot CD 2 is horizontally aligned with the color dot 38 200846750 CD-1 1 and is vertically spaced from the color dot cdj-丨 by a vertical dot VDS. The color dots CD丄3, CD_2-3, and CD-3 constitute the third column of the pixel pattern 730, and the third column is aligned with the first column such that the color dot CD丄3 is adjacent to the color quality dot CD_2_2. The color dot (3) bucket, CD-2-4, CD-3-4 constitute the fourth column of the pixel pattern 730, and the fourth column is aligned with the second to make the color dot CD-2 - 4 _ to the color dot CD丄3. The component device area DCA-b DCA-2, dca-3 constitutes the pixel pattern 730 #5 column, and the fifth column is aligned with the third column 3 of the first column. In addition, the 'switching element SE-b SE-2, SE-3 are respectively (4) turn-on areas DCA-i, DCA_2, dca_3, and the switching element 兕 is coupled to the color dot CDJ", CD-1-2, CD丄3 , CD" - 4 ^ pole, the + color dot CD - U electrode is lightly connected to the switching element by the electrode of the color - color point ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ (3) - ^, and the color point CD - 1 The electrode of -2 is by color dot CDj", cd

的電極而搞接至開關元件,且顏色質點cd Η—搞: ,顏色質點CD丄4的電極而輕接至開關元件。類:二 開關7G件SE一2是耦接至顏色質點cD」1、cD ^fcD^cr 5 SE'3 ^ 開關元件—SE 1 :犯2 3:3、θ,3-4的電極。再者, [0081]圖7(d)綠示晝素圖樣73q_ 在負質點極性圖案中,第—葙多八 .....σ性圖案。 極性,而第―與第三顏色分量(即相^具正 39 200846750 與顏色質點 CD—1J、CD_1_2、0)_1_3、CD 1 4、CD 3 卜 CD_3_2、CD_3—3、CD_3_4)具有負極性。圖了⑷緣 素圖樣730+之正質點極性圖案。在正質點極性圖&quot;出g 二顏色分量(即為開關元件SE—2與顏色質點cD_2 ι、 CD_2_2 CD一2—3、CD_2_4)具有負極性,而第一盥第 色分量(即為開關元件SEj、SE—3與顏色質‘點C :、 ⑶丄2、CD」—3、CD」」、CD—3 卜 CD 3 -- CD_3_4)具有正極性。 —— ~-3 _2頂7_示顯示器75〇的局部,而顯示器7 Ρ(2,〇)'Ρ(0,1)'Ρ(1)1)' 年毛、皿旦素極性圖案。如圖7(f)所示,晝素ρ(〇,〇)、 Ρ(2,〇)是應用圖7(d)與圖7(e)之畫素圖樣,而晝素’ P(U)、P(2,1)是應用圖7⑷與圖7(b)之畫素圖樣。畫 P(0,1)、p(2,1)、p(!,〇)具有負質點極性圖案,而旦^ ,請,〇)具有正質點極性圖案。亦即,如果= 則晝素P(x,y)具有第一質點極性圖_ _ 則:辛相反地’如果X與y的和為偶數’ 則旦素(X,y)具有弟二質點極性圖案(如圖7(f)所示之正質 點極性圖案)。然而,再下一個圖框時 二 择貝不态具有第一組書辛、筮—彡金主 _ 罘一組晝素、第三組書素以及第 四組畫素’其中第一組晝素是應用第一種晝素圖 第-質點極性圖案,而第二組晝素亦是應用第=圭糊 樣但具有第二質點極性圖案,且第三組書素是庫用 晝素圖樣亚具有第-質點極性圖案,又第四叙晝素亦是應 200846750 用第二種畫素圖樣但具有第二質點極性圖宰。更 :去圖稱之多域垂直配向液晶顯示器具有第一組顺之 二素一組列向,晝素,其中第一組列向之畫素是由交 =畫ί與第二組畫素所構成,而第二組列向之畫 三組畫素與第四組畫素所構成。最後,; :;1弟一組列向與第二組列向交替排列而成。如此-&quot;便可應用開關元件點反轉驅動機制。 [〇〇曝據本發明之概念’熟悉此項技藝者當可輕易 :;、Γ!Ϊ的晝素圖樣。舉例而言,如前述之相同方式, =^色分1可分割為五個或更多的顏色質點。不過,由 ==的設計應該要相對簡單,且過多的顏色質點會降低 rrrati〇) ’所以除非在行數亦同時增加的情況 議的。、早―晝針超過六列晝素質點的設収不被建 _4]特別是在大尺寸或是高亮度的螢幕中,本發明 =些貫施例會具有四個顏色分量。在大部份的應用中, =個顏色/刀里分別是紅、綠、藍與白以用來提高顯示單 =的受度與對比。不過在其他的應用中,第四個顏色分量 ::為另外,個顏色分量其中之一。舉例而言,在許多軍 盘’化四個顏色分量分別是紅、綠、藍與綠。圖8⑷ _ b)為依據本發明另一實施例之晝素圖樣⑽(標示為 旦吳⑽)之質點極性圖案。晝素隨81()包括四個顏色 :而每個顏色分董再分割成六個顏色質點以形成兩個 鋸回行向。顏色質點CD—L卜CD—2j、CD—i_2、CD—2一2、 —_ CD-4-1、CD_3_2、CD_4_2 構成晝素圖樣 810 200846750 的第一列。顏色質點 CD__1_3、CD_2_3、CD_1_4、CD_2__4、 CD—3—3、CD-4—3、CD—3—4、CD—4_4 構成晝素圖樣 810 的第二列。不過,第二列偏移第一列以使得顏色質點 CD—1 一3鄰接於顏色質點CD_2j。顏色質點CCL1_5、 CD—2—5、CD—1—6、CD—2—6、CD—3—5、CD—4—5、CD—3—6、 CD—4一6構成畫素圖樣810的第三列,且第三列是與第一列 對齊以使得顏色質點CD_2一5鄰接於顏色質點CD一 1 一3。晝 素圖樣810亦包括元件裝置區域dcaj'dca^^dca 3、 DCA 一4,而為了對稱排列起見,每個元件裝置區域的寬度 專於兩個顏色質點的覓度加上一個水平質點間距。元 件裝置區域DCAJ、DCA_2、構成晝素g! 樣810的第四列,且第四列是對齊於第一列與第三列。此 外,開關元件SE_1、SE-2、SE_3、SE_4是分別位於 Π域 DCAj、DCA—2、DCA_3、DCA—4。開關元件 一 1疋耦接至第一顏色分量的六個顏色質點(即顏色質點 CD〜1—1〜CD_1_6)。類似地,開關元件SE—2是 一 顏色分量的六個顏色質點(即顏色質點cd 2 !— CK6),而開關元件SE_3是耦接至第三顏色分量的:I 顏色質點(即顏色質點CD j j〜cD 3 6彳,n :、们 :匕,接至第四顏色分量的六個顏色質點:;:: CD 4J〜。 〇 貝點 [〇〇85]圖8⑻繪示晝素圖樣81()_之負質點 =質點極性圖案中’第二與第四顏色分 件 SE—2、SE—4 與顏色質點 CDy、CD 2 2 Μ牛 CD 2_4 &gt; CD 2 5 &gt; CD 2 6 &gt; CD 4 1 &gt; ΓΠ I 又3、 -- ——&gt;U-4」、CD-4〜2、CD 4 飞 42 200846750 CD 4 4 ^ CD 4 c ^ 色分量(即為開HD—4—6)具有正極性,而第一與第三顏 CD ! 2、CD】广件兕-1、SE」與顏色質點⑶力、 CD—3—2、CD今、CD丄, 性。圖 8(b):- * 冬CD-3-4、CD-3-5、CD」、6)具有負極 點極性圖宰Γ第晝素,81G+之正f點極性圖案。在正質 SE 4㈣μ H弟四顏色分量(即為開關元件兕2、 ct 質2點^ CD—4—5 二 '6、CD-4」、CD-4-2、CD—4—3、CD 4 4、 為Η闕-、具有負極性’❿第一與第三顏色分量(即 幵参疋SE 1、SE 3與顏色質點CD j卜 »丄3、CD^、CD丄5、CD丄6、CD:3:1、=-=、、 CD」一3、CD」」、CD—3一5、CD—3—6)具有正極性。—— 交替=6^t^8⑷與8⑻之晝素圖樣之晝素需排列成 、圖木,亦即偶數列與奇數列的晝素是具有相反的 —質.=案亦即十為奇數時,畫素。(x,= 貝』極性圖案。相反地,t y為偶數時,畫素 質點極性圖案。圖8(翁示應用此圖案之顯示器8〇〇 ,局士具體而言’畫素Ρ(0,0)是位於第一列,而畫素㈣) =位於下歹,卜其令畫素ρ(〇,〇)具有正質點極性圖案,而 1 PC0,”具有負質點極性圖案。然而,當換到下一個圖 匡時’所有的晝素均會變換質點極性圖案。此外,圖_ 之旦素圖案疋應用開關元件點反轉驅動機制。 [0087]如圖8(c)所示,此交替列之圖案會導致非對稱的 顏色分佈。舉例而言’晝素桃丨)之顏色質點CD丨5是鄰 接於畫素P(0,0)之顏色質‘點CDj」,所以本發明之某些實 43 200846750 別於晝素圖樣810之其他畫素圖樣以使顯 不為具有更佳對稱的顏色分佈。且 文,貝 為依據本發明另一實施例之金去岡Q,圖(d)與8(e) 案。 例之晝素圖樣請的質點極性圖 [0088]晝素圖樣83〇包括四旦 — 分量再分割成六個顏色 兩、母個顏色 S: ΓΠ 1 T m 1 A办成兩個鋸齒行向。顏色質 --D-2-1、CD-1-2、CD—2_2、CD 3 1、CD 4 卜 CD丄2、CD—4_2構成畫素圖樣8 :列員色質 CD丄3、CD-2」、CD丄——4、CD 3 CD—3—4、,_4構成晝素圖樣83〇的第-二列。不過:第 一列偏移第一列以使得顏多暂驻r rn&quot;站u —2~3鄰接於顏色質點 —_。顏色貝點 CD」」、CD 2 5、CD16 cd 2 6 笛: ::一-〜6、CD-4-6構成晝素圖樣830 、一1 弟二列是與第一列對齊以使得顏色質點 CD」_5鄰接於顏色質點®又3。晝素圖樣謂亦包括元 =裝置區域 DCAJ、DCA—2、DCA_3、dca—4,而為了對 稱=列起見’每個元件裝置區域的寬度等於兩個顏色質點 的莧度加上個水平質點間距HDS。元件裝置區域 DCA—1 DCA—2 DCA—3、DCA—4構成晝素圖樣830的第 四列,且第四列是對齊於第二列。此外,開關元件心、 SE—2、SE—3、SE_4是分別位於元件裝置區域dca—j、 DCA—2、DCA—3、DCA—4。開關元件SEj是耦接至第一 顏色分量的六個顏色質點(即顏色質點cl〗」〜 CD 一 1一6)。類似地,開關元件SE_2是耦接至第二顏色分量 的六個顏色質點(即顏色質點CD_2—i〜CD又6),而開關元 200846750 件SE_3疋耦接至第三顏色分量的六個 點CD 3 1〜CD 3 Μ D _ 0貝點(即顏色質 ^ SE-4 貝巳貝點(即顏色質點CD 4 1〜rn 4 Μ [0089]圖_會示畫素圖樣㈣-之負f 在負質點極性圖案,,第二與案: SE_2、SE_4與顏色質 (P為開關以牛 CD_2 4、CD 2 5、⑶?…2 J CD-2-2、CD_2—3、 CD_4:4 . CdV5 ^ CD 1 ^ -4'1 ' CD'4'2 ' CD~4-3 ' 辛八曰* — — —Ο具有正極性,而第一盥第二声貝 色丫(即為開關元件SE」、SE_3與顏色質;艺顏 C〇h CD— 性二圖8⑷給—干查,^4、CD-3-5、CD〜3-6)具有負極 SE 4盘Γ 分置(即為開關元件兕2、 C^2_5 . CD_2_6 . . cd_4 2 ^ cd:; 3 ^ ; —4一5、CD—4—6)具有負極性,而第—盥 旦· CD Vs : rn , ' ' cd-3;2 ^ ~ ~ — —4、CD-3-5、CD—3—6)具有正極性。 ^ 8 〇rrj^^K 8(a&gt;# 8(d) 二、⑷的旦素圖樣之這些畫素需排列成交替列的圖安 可為第一種晝素圖# ’而奇數列之“可 :圖樣。圖8_應用此圖案之顯示器㈣ 是具體而言,畫素聯)是位於第—列,而晝素和) 疋位於下—列,其中晝素p_是應用圖8⑷與8⑷的畫素 45 200846750 圖樣830,而晝素P(〇,l)是應用圖8(a)與8(b)的晝素圖樣 810。此外,在同一個圖框時,所有的晝素均會具有相同的 • 質點極性圖案。圖8(f)的兩個畫素均為負質點極性圖案。 - 然而,當換到下一個圖框時,所有的晝素均會變換成正質 點極性圖案。如此一來,當y為奇數時,晝素P(x,y)可為 第一晝素圖樣。相反地,當y為偶數時,晝素P(x,y)可為 第二畫素圖樣。亦即,圖8(f)的畫素圖案是採用開關元件 行反轉驅動機制。 • [0091]儘管相較於圖8(c)之晝素圖案而言,圖8⑴之晝 素圖案具有較佳的色彩分佈,不過本發明之某些實施例仍 應用圖8(c)之畫素圖案以替換圖8(f)之晝素圖案,其中圖 8(c)之晝素圖案是採用開關元件點反轉驅動機制,而圖8(f) 之晝素圖案是採用開關元件行反轉驅動機制。這是因為相 較於開關元件行反轉驅動機制而言,開關元件點反轉驅動 機制之晝面閃爍或是串音現象的情況會比較輕微。 [0092]圖9(a)與9(b)為依據本發明另一實施例之晝素 φ 圖樣910之質點極性圖案。具體而言,晝素圖樣910包括 四個顏色分量,而每個顏色分量再分割成四個顏色質點。 顏色質點CD_1_1(即為第一顏色分量之第一個顏色質點)、 CD_2_1(即為第二顏色分量之第一個顏色質點)、 CD_3_1(即為第三顏色分量之第一個顏色質點)、 CD_4_1(即為第四顏色分量之第一個顏色質點構成晝素圖 樣 910 的第一列。顏色質點 CD—1_2、CD_2—2、CD_3_2、 CD_4_2構成晝素圖樣910的第二列。不過,第二列偏移第 一列以使得顏色質點CD_1_2鄰接於顏色質點CD_2_1。顏 46 200846750 色質點CD—丄3、CD_2_3、CD一3_3、CD_4_3構成畫素圖 樣910的第二列,且第三列是與第一列對齊以使得顏色質 點CD_2—3鄰接於顏色質點CD丄2。顏色質點CD丄*、 CD:2—4、CD」_4、CD人4構成晝素圖樣910的第四列, 且第四列是與第二列對齊以使得顏色#點CD丄4鄰接於 顏色質點CD又3。畫素圖樣91〇亦包括元件衷置區域 =1、、DCA—2、DCA—3、DCA—4,而元件裝置區域 —DCA—2 DCA—3、DCA_4構成畫素圖樣910的第 五列’ ^第五列是與第四列水平對齊。此外開關元件 DC—A I T兕―3、犯-4 *分別位於元件裝置區域 4垃 —2、DCA—3、DCA-4 ’其中開關元件SE 1 疋麵接至顏色質點CD—U、CD—L2、cd丨3、C -The electrode is connected to the switching element, and the color dot cd Η - engages: the color of the dot CD 丄 4 electrode is lightly connected to the switching element. Class: 2 Switch 7G SE- 2 is coupled to color dot cD"1, cD ^fcD^cr 5 SE'3 ^ Switching element - SE 1 : electrode of 2 3:3, θ, 3-4. Furthermore, [0081] FIG. 7(d) shows the green enamel pattern 73q_ in the negative particle polarity pattern, the first 葙 八 ...... σ 图案 pattern. Polarity, and the first and third color components (ie, phase positive 39 200846750 and color dot CD-1J, CD_1_2, 0)_1_3, CD 1 4, CD 3 CD CD_3_2, CD_3-3, CD_3_4) have negative polarity. Figure 4 shows the positive dot polarity pattern of the (3) edge pattern 730+. In the positive dot polarity map &quot; out g two color components (that is, switching element SE-2 and color dot cD_2 ι, CD_2_2 CD 2-3, CD_2_4) have a negative polarity, and the first 盥 first color component (ie is a switch) The elements SEj, SE-3 and the color quality 'point C:, (3) 丄 2, CD "-3, CD", CD-3 (CD 3 - CD_3_4) have positive polarity. —— ~-3 _2 top 7_ shows the part of the display 75〇, while the display 7 Ρ(2,〇)'Ρ(0,1)'Ρ(1)1)' year hair, the denier polarity pattern. As shown in Fig. 7(f), the elements ρ(〇,〇) and Ρ(2,〇) are the pixel patterns of Fig. 7(d) and Fig. 7(e), and the 昼素' P(U) P(2,1) is a pictogram in which Fig. 7 (4) and Fig. 7 (b) are applied. P (0,1), p(2,1), p(!,〇) have a negative dot polarity pattern, and denim, please, 〇) have a positive dot polarity pattern. That is, if = then the element P(x, y) has the first particle polarity map _ _ then: simple opposite 'if the sum of X and y is even' then the element (X, y) has the polarity of the second particle Pattern (positive particle polarity pattern as shown in Figure 7(f)). However, in the next frame, the second group of books has the first group of books, the first group of books, the first group of pixels, the third group of pixels, and the fourth group of pixels. The first type of halogen map is applied to the first-particle polarity pattern, and the second group of halogens is also applied with the second pattern of polarity, and the third group of books is the library with the alizarin pattern. The first-particle polarity pattern, and the fourth sputum is also used in 200846750 with the second pixel pattern but with the second particle polarity map. Moreover, the multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display has a first group of singular elements, and the first group of pixels is composed of the intersection of the picture and the second group of pixels. The second group of columns is composed of three groups of pixels and a fourth group of pixels. Finally, ;;; 1 brother group is arranged in an alternating direction with the second group of columns. So -&quot; can apply the switching element dot inversion drive mechanism. [〇〇 〇〇 据 据 据 ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ For example, in the same manner as described above, the =^ color score 1 can be divided into five or more color dots. However, the design by == should be relatively simple, and too many color points will decrease rrrati〇) ’ so unless the number of rows is increased at the same time. Early, 昼 pin more than six columns 昼 quality point of the collection is not built _4] Especially in the large size or high brightness screen, the present invention = some examples will have four color components. In most applications, = color/knife is red, green, blue, and white to improve the acceptance and contrast of the display list =. However, in other applications, the fourth color component :: is one of the other color components. For example, in many military discs, the four color components are red, green, blue, and green. Figure 8 (4) - b) is a particle polarity pattern of a halogen pattern (10) (labeled as Dan (10)) according to another embodiment of the present invention. The alizarin consists of four colors with 81(): and each color is divided into six color points to form two sawback directions. The color dot CD-L Bu CD-2j, CD-i_2, CD-2-2, -_CD-4-1, CD_3_2, CD_4_2 constitute the first column of the alizarin pattern 810 200846750. The color dots CD__1_3, CD_2_3, CD_1_4, CD_2__4, CD-3-3, CD-4-3, CD-3-4, CD-4_4 constitute the second column of the altar pattern 810. However, the second column is offset by the first column such that the color dot CD-1 - 3 is adjacent to the color dot CD_2j. Color dots CCL1_5, CD-2-5, CD-1-6, CD-2-6, CD-3-5, CD-4-5, CD-3-6, CD-4-6 constitute a pixel pattern 810 The third column, and the third column is aligned with the first column such that the color dot CD_2-5 is adjacent to the color dot CD-1. The pixel pattern 810 also includes component device regions dcaj'dca^^dca 3, DCA-4, and for symmetric alignment, the width of each component device region is specific to the twist of two color dots plus a horizontal dot pitch. . The component device regions DCAJ, DCA_2, constitute the fourth column of the pixel 810, and the fourth column is aligned with the first column and the third column. Further, the switching elements SE_1, SE-2, SE_3, and SE_4 are located in the fields DCAj, DCA-2, DCA_3, and DCA-4, respectively. The switching element is coupled to the six color dots of the first color component (ie, the color dots CD 〜1 -1 to CD_1_6). Similarly, the switching element SE-2 is six color dots of a color component (ie, color dots cd 2 ! - CK6), and the switching element SE_3 is coupled to the third color component: I color dot (ie, color dot CD) Jj~cD 3 6彳,n :,::匕, the six color points connected to the fourth color component:;:: CD 4J~. Mussel point [〇〇85] Figure 8 (8) shows the alizarin pattern 81 ( Negative particle = _ in the particle polarity pattern 'second and fourth color component SE-2, SE-4 and color dot CDy, CD 2 2 yak CD 2_4 &gt; CD 2 5 &gt; CD 2 6 &gt; CD 4 1 &gt; ΓΠ I 3, -- ——&gt;U-4", CD-4~2, CD 4 fly 42 200846750 CD 4 4 ^ CD 4 c ^ Color component (ie open HD-4) 6) has positive polarity, and the first and third face CD! 2, CD] wide piece 兕-1, SE" and color point (3) force, CD-3-2, CD today, CD丄, sex. Figure 8 ( b): - * Winter CD-3-4, CD-3-5, CD", 6) has a negative polarity point diagram of the Γ Γ Γ ,, 81G+ positive f point polarity pattern. In the normal SE 4 (four) μ H brother four color components (that is, switching element 兕 2, ct quality 2 points ^ CD-4-5 II '6, CD-4", CD-4-2, CD-4-3, CD 4 4, Η阙-, with negative polarity '❿ first and third color components (ie 幵 疋 SE 1 , SE 3 and color dot CD j 卜 » 丄 3, CD ^, CD 丄 5, CD 丄 6 , CD: 3:1, =-=, CD"-3, CD", CD-3-5, CD-3-6) have positive polarity. - Alternate = 6^t^8(4) and 8(8) The elements of the prime pattern need to be arranged into a figure, that is, the elements of the even and odd columns have the opposite - quality. = the case is that the ten is odd, the pixel (x, = shell) polarity pattern. Conversely, when ty is an even number, the quality of the dot pattern is drawn. Figure 8 (When the display of this pattern is applied to 8 〇〇, the clerk specifically says 'Picture Ρ (0,0) is located in the first column, while painting Prime (4)) = Located in the lower jaw, the pheromone ρ (〇, 〇) has a positive dot polarity pattern, while 1 PC0, "has a negative dot polarity pattern. However, when switching to the next image, 'all 昼The prime will change the polarity pattern of the dot. In addition, the image is applied to the switch. [0087] As shown in Fig. 8(c), the pattern of the alternate columns causes an asymmetrical color distribution. For example, the color dot CD丨5 of '昼素桃丨' is adjacent to The color quality of the pixel P(0,0) is 'point CDj', so some of the real 43 200846750 of the present invention is different from the other pixel patterns of the alizarin pattern 810 so as to show a color distribution with better symmetry. The text is in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention, the gold go to the Q, the figures (d) and 8 (e). The particle pattern of the sample of the prime note [0088] 昼 prime pattern 83 〇 includes four denier - The component is subdivided into six colors and two mother colors S: ΓΠ 1 T m 1 A is made into two sawtooth directions. Color quality - D-2-1, CD-1-2, CD-2_2, CD 3 1. CD 4 Bu CD丄2, CD-4_2 constitutes the pixel pattern 8: the color of the members CD丄3, CD-2”, CD丄——4, CD 3 CD—3—4, and _4 constitute the element The first column of the pattern 83〇. However, the first column is offset from the first column so that the Yandu station r rn&quot; station u - 2~3 is adjacent to the color dot - _. Color shell point CD"", CD 2 5, CD16 cd 2 6 flute: :: one ~ ~ 6, CD-4-6 constitute The alizarin pattern 830, the first two columns are aligned with the first column so that the color dot CD"_5 is adjacent to the color dot® and 3. The alizarin pattern also includes the element = device area DCAJ, DCA-2, DCA_3, dca -4, and for symmetry = column see 'the width of each component device area is equal to the twist of two color points plus a horizontal dot spacing HDS. The component device area DCA-1 DCA-2 DCA-3, DCA-4 constitutes the fourth column of the pixel pattern 830, and the fourth column is aligned with the second column. Further, the switching element cores, SE-2, SE-3, and SE_4 are located in the device device regions dca-j, DCA-2, DCA-3, and DCA-4, respectively. The switching element SEj is a six color dot (i.e., color dot cl) to CD-1 to 6 coupled to the first color component. Similarly, the switching element SE_2 is coupled to the six color dots of the second color component (ie, the color dots CD_2-i~CD and 6), and the switching element 200846750 SE_3疋 is coupled to the six points of the third color component. CD 3 1~CD 3 Μ D _ 0 shell point (ie color quality ^ SE-4 shellfish point (ie color point CD 4 1~rn 4 Μ [0089] picture _ will show the picture pattern (four) - the negative f In the negative dot polarity pattern, the second case: SE_2, SE_4 and color quality (P is the switch to cattle CD_2 4, CD 2 5, (3)?... 2 J CD-2-2, CD_2-3, CD_4:4. CdV5 ^ CD 1 ^ -4'1 ' CD'4'2 ' CD~4-3 ' 辛八曰* — — —Ο has positive polarity, and the first second 贝 贝 丫 (ie is the switching element SE ", SE_3 and color quality; art face C〇h CD - sex 2 Figure 8 (4) to - dry check, ^ 4, CD-3-5, CD ~ 3-6) with negative SE 4 disk Γ split (that is, switch Component 兕2, C^2_5. CD_2_6 . . cd_4 2 ^ cd:; 3 ^ ; —4-5, CD-4-6) has a negative polarity, and the first 盥 · CD CDs : rn , ' ' cd- 3; 2 ^ ~ ~ — — 4, CD-3-5, CD—3—6) have positive polarity. ^ 8 〇rrj^^K 8(a>gt 8#d(d) These figures need to be arranged in alternating columns. The figure can be the first type of elementary map #' and the odd number of columns can be: pattern: Figure 8_ Display using this pattern (four) is specifically, picture combination) Is located in the first column, and the alizarin and 疋 are located in the lower-column, where the pixel p_ is the pixel 45 applying the graphs of Figures 8(4) and 8(4) 200846750, and the alizarin P(〇, l) is the application of Figure 8 ( a) and the alizarin pattern 810 of 8(b). In addition, all the elements in the same frame will have the same • dot polarity pattern. The two pixels in Figure 8(f) are negative particles. Polar pattern - However, when changing to the next frame, all the elements will be transformed into a positive dot polarity pattern. Thus, when y is odd, the pixel P(x, y) can be the first one. Conversely, when y is an even number, the pixel P(x, y) may be a second pixel pattern. That is, the pixel pattern of Fig. 8(f) is a row inversion driving mechanism using a switching element. • [0091] Although the pixel pattern of FIG. 8(1) has a better color distribution than the pixel pattern of FIG. 8(c), some embodiments of the present invention still apply the drawing of FIG. 8(c). The prime pattern replaces the halogen pattern of FIG. 8(f), wherein the pixel pattern of FIG. 8(c) is a dot inversion driving mechanism of the switching element, and the pixel pattern of FIG. 8(f) is reversed by the switching element. The drive mechanism. This is because the side flashing or crosstalk of the switching element dot inversion driving mechanism is relatively slight compared to the switching element row inversion driving mechanism. 9(a) and 9(b) are particle dot polarity patterns of a halogen φ pattern 910 according to another embodiment of the present invention. Specifically, the pixel pattern 910 includes four color components, and each color component is subdivided into four color dots. The color dot CD_1_1 (that is, the first color dot of the first color component), CD_2_1 (that is, the first color dot of the second color component), CD_3_1 (that is, the first color dot of the third color component), CD_4_1 (that is, the first color dot of the fourth color component constitutes the first column of the tilde pattern 910. The color dots CD-1_2, CD_2-2, CD_3_2, CD_4_2 constitute the second column of the tilde pattern 910. However, the first The second column is offset by the first column such that the color dot CD_1_2 is adjacent to the color dot CD_2_1. The color cell CD_丄3, CD_2_3, CD-3_3, CD_4_3 constitutes the second column of the pixel pattern 910, and the third column is Align with the first column such that the color dot CD_2-3 is adjacent to the color dot CD丄2. The color dot CD丄*, CD: 2-4, CD”_4, and CD person 4 constitute the fourth column of the pixel pattern 910, and The fourth column is aligned with the second column such that the color #point CD丄4 is adjacent to the color dot CD and 3. The pixel pattern 91〇 also includes the component center area=1, DCA-2, DCA-3, DCA— 4, and the component device area - DCA - 2 DCA - 3, DCA_4 constitutes the pixel pattern 910 Column '^The fifth column is horizontally aligned with the fourth column. In addition, the switching elements DC_AIT兕-3, the crime-4* are located in the component device area 4, 2, DCA-3, DCA-4 'where the switching element SE 1 疋 face to color point CD-U, CD-L2, cd丨3, C -

^電極,而開關元件SE—2是耦接至顏色f點CD 輕接至顏色質點CD—3j、cd_3_2、CD 3 3、C牛-3 = 電極,又開關元件SE—4是輕接至顏色f —-之 CD_4_2、CD_4—3、CD又4之電極。貝點⑶—4—丨、 在二〇!?圖9⑻繪不畫素圖樣_·之負質點極性圖宰。 在負質點極性圖案中,第二與第四 SE—2、SE—4與顏色質點CD ( P為開關疋件 CD_2_4 . CD_4_! . CD^4 2 , 〇D 4 3 CV! ' ' 性,而第-與第三顏色分量(即為開關元件SEf具 顏色質點 CD_U、CD1 2、⑶ i 3 —1、SE-3 與 CD^3^2 &gt; CD^3^3 &gt; CD^3^4)X# ^ 〇 ^ 圖樣910+之正質點極性圖案 =9⑽冒示晝素 牡貝點極性圖案中,第二 200846750 與第四顏色》$(即為開關元件SE—2、SE—4與顏色質點 CD—2一卜 CD一2 2、CD—2」、CD—2一4、CD—4—卜 CD人2、 CD—4—3、CD—4〜4)具有負極性,而第一與第三顏色分量(即 為開關元件SEJ、SE—3與顏色質點⑶丄】、CDj—2、 CDJ—3、CD—1 4、cd 3—i、CD 3 2、CD 3 3、CD 3 4) 具有正極性。 —— —— ——; ^ _94]以應用目9⑷與目_之晝素圖樣之顯示器而^electrode, and the switching element SE-2 is coupled to the color f point CD to the color dot CD-3j, cd_3_2, CD 3 3, C cattle-3 = electrode, and the switching element SE-4 is lightly connected to the color f —- CD_4_2, CD_4-3, CD and 4 electrodes. Bay Point (3) - 4 - 丨, in the second 〇!? Figure 9 (8) painted without the prime pattern _ · negative particle polarity map. In the negative dot polarity pattern, the second and fourth SE-2, SE-4 and the color dot CD (P is the switch element CD_2_4 . CD_4_! . CD^4 2 , 〇D 4 3 CV! ' ', and The first and third color components (ie, the switching element SEf has a color point CD_U, CD1 2, (3) i 3 -1, SE-3 and CD^3^2 &gt; CD^3^3 &gt; CD^3^4 )X# ^ 〇^ Pattern 910+ positive dot polarity pattern = 9 (10) in the polaroid mussel point polarity pattern, the second 200846750 and the fourth color "$ (that is, the switching elements SE-2, SE-4 and color points) CD-2, CD-2-2, CD-2", CD-2, 4, CD-4, CD, 2, CD-4, CD-4~4) have negative polarity, and the first The third color component (ie, switching elements SEJ, SE-3 and color dot (3) 丄), CDj-2, CDJ-3, CD-1, cd 3-i, CD 3 2, CD 3 3, CD 3 4 ) has a positive polarity. —— —— ——; ^ _94] to the display of the target 9 (4) and the target

°在们”、、員示圖框時,所有晝素會具有相同的質點極性 Ξ Γ使付顯示器中的所有顏色質點構成西洋棋盤圖 ς。如刚所述,連續的顯示圖框會不斷於兩種質點極性圖 木之間切換。舉例而言,圖9(雜示顯示器糊的局部, 2示器900之晝素ρ_、ρ(〇1)、ρ(ι 〇)、ρ(ι ι)均具有 本貝點極性圖案。然*,當換到下—個圖框時,所有的畫 曰、1冒交換成正質點極性圖案。此外,圖9(e)之晝素圖案 疋採用開關元件行反轉驅動機制。 [_5]在本發明之某些實施财,採用不同質點極性 =素可具有較均勻的電性分佈,本發明之這些實施 =採用有別於圖9⑷與9(b)之晝素隱91〇之其他晝素 :圖9(d)-9(e)為依據本發明另一實施例之晝素圖樣93〇 =點極性圖案。具體而言,晝素圖樣·包括四個顏色 =里’而母個顏色分量再分割四個顏色質點。顏色質點 (即為第一顏色分量之第一個顏色質點)、 rn'—1(即為第二顏色分量之第一個顏色質點)、 CD〜4—1(即為第三顏色分量之第一個顏色質點)、 ~〜1(即為第四顏色分量之第一個顏色質點)構成晝素圖 48 200846750°When you are in the frame, all the pixels will have the same particle polarity Ξ Γ Make all the color points in the display constitute the checkerboard chart. As just mentioned, the continuous display frame will continue to Switch between the two particle polarity maps. For example, Figure 9 (part of the display monitor paste, 2 indicators 900 of the pixel ρ_, ρ (〇1), ρ (ι 〇), ρ (ι ι) All have a pattern of the polarity of the Bebe point. However, when switching to the next frame, all the frames and 1 are exchanged into a positive polarity pattern. In addition, the pixel pattern of Figure 9(e) is switched. Inversion drive mechanism. [_5] In some implementations of the invention, different particle polarities = primes may have a more uniform electrical distribution, and these implementations of the invention are different from those of Figures 9(4) and 9(b). Other elements of the 昼素隐91〇: Fig. 9(d)-9(e) are the morphe pattern 93〇=point polarity pattern according to another embodiment of the present invention. Specifically, the enamel pattern includes four Color = inside 'and the parent color component is then divided into four color points. The color point (that is, the first color point of the first color component) Rn'-1 (that is, the first color dot of the second color component), CD~4-1 (that is, the first color dot of the third color component), ~~1 (that is, the fourth color component) The first color particle) constitutes a sinusoidal figure 48 200846750

樣 930 的第一列。顏色質點 CD_1_2、CD—2—2、CD—3__2、 CD_4一2構成晝素圖樣91 〇的第二列。不過,第二列偏移第 一列以使得顏色質點CD—2—2鄰接於顏色質點CD—丨」。顏 色質點⑶:1-3、CD-2-3、CD—3—3、CD—4—3構成畫素圖 樣930的第三列,且第三列是與第一列對齊以使得顏色質 點CD丄3鄰接於顏色質點CD_2—2。顏色質,點CD丄4、 CD:2—4、CD—3一4、CD-4-4構成晝素圖樣930的第四列, 且第四列是與第二列對齊以使得顏色質點CD又4鄰接於 顏色質點CD丄3。畫素圖樣930 #包括元件裝置區域 DCA—1 ' DCA—2、DCA—3、DCA_4,而元件裝置區域 Μ—1、DCA—2、DCA-3、DCA-4構成晝素圖樣930的第 五列,且第五列是水平對齊於第一列與第三列。此 、SE~2、SE-3、SE-4是分別位於元件裝置: :減。7Α~2、DCA」、DCA—4,其中開關元件SE 1 疋麵接至顏色質點CD丄!、cd—12 cd】S C - 之電極’而開關it件SE—2是輕接至顏色f點CD 2'厂 fD_2—2、CD—2」、CD又4之電極,且開關 ε - _顏色質點CD」」、cd」_2、CD」」、CD 3-3 = 電極’又開關元件SE 4是耦接$声苜洛折 --之 叫、CD:4_= [所〇_圖9(树示畫素圖樣㈣·之負質點極。 在負貝點極性圖案令,第二與第 木 與顏色質點二顏色二即為開關元件 CD_2_4 CD_4 , « CD_4_2 - CD_4_3 , CV4 乐,、弟—顏色分即為開關元件sej、SE3與 49 200846750 顏色質點 CD—1 —1、CD l 2、CD—L3、CD—L4、cm、 CD_3—2、CD」-3、CD-3-4)具有負極性。® 9(e)緣示畫素 圖,930+之正質點極性圖案。在正質點極性圖案中,第^ 舁第四顏色分里(即為開關元件SE 2、SE 4盥 CD_2_! ^ CD_2_2 . c〇_2__3 ^ CD_2;4 . CD^!:^ 4_^The first column of the sample 930. The color dot CD_1_2, CD-2-2, CD-3__2, CD_4-2 constitute the second column of the enamel pattern 91 〇. However, the second column is offset by the first column such that the color dot CD-2-2 is adjacent to the color dot CD-丨. Color dots (3): 1-3, CD-2-3, CD-3-3, CD-4-3 constitute the third column of the pixel pattern 930, and the third column is aligned with the first column to make the color dot CD丄3 is adjacent to the color dot CD_2-2. Color quality, dot CD丄4, CD: 2-4, CD-3-4, CD-4-4 constitute the fourth column of the alizarin pattern 930, and the fourth column is aligned with the second column to make the color dot CD Another 4 is adjacent to the color dot CD丄3. The pixel pattern 930 # includes the component device area DCA-1' DCA-2, DCA-3, DCA_4, and the component device region Μ-1, DCA-2, DCA-3, DCA-4 constitutes the fifth of the tilapi pattern 930. Columns, and the fifth column is horizontally aligned to the first column and the third column. This, SE~2, SE-3, and SE-4 are located in the component device: :min. 7Α~2, DCA”, DCA—4, in which the switching element SE 1 is connected to the color dot CD丄! , cd—12 cd】SC-electrode' and switch it SE-2 is lightly connected to the color f point CD 2' factory fD_2-2, CD-2", CD and 4 electrodes, and the switch ε - _ color Particle CD"", cd"_2, CD"", CD 3-3 = electrode 'and switching element SE 4 is coupled with $ 苜 苜 - CD, CD: 4_= [〇 〇 _ Figure 9 (tree The pixel pattern (4)·The negative mass point. In the negative shell point polarity pattern, the second and the second wood and the color point two color two is the switching element CD_2_4 CD_4, « CD_4_2 - CD_4_3 , CV4 music, brother - color points That is, the switching elements sej, SE3 and 49 200846750 color dot CD-1, 1, CD l 2, CD-L3, CD-L4, cm, CD_3-2, CD"-3, CD-3-4) have negative polarity . ® 9(e) is the picture of the pixel, the positive dot polarity pattern of 930+. In the positive dot polarity pattern, the fourth color is divided into the fourth color (ie, the switching element SE 2, SE 4盥 CD_2_! ^ CD_2_2 . c〇_2__3 ^ CD_2; 4 . CD^!:^ 4_^

=D—4—3、CD—4_4)具有負極性,而第—與第三顏色分量(即 為開關元件SE_1、SE—3與顏色質點CD】卜⑶i 2、 CD—L3、CD丄4、CD—3」、CD丄2、cd _3 3、⑶- 具有正極性。 — --) [0097]同0夺應用圖9⑻與9(b)的畫素圖樣⑽(即第— 畫素圖樣)以及圖9(d)與9⑷的畫素圖樣93〇(即第二畫素圖 樣)之這些晝素需排列成交替列的圖案,其中在同—列中的 晝素均具有㈣的質點極性圖案,而在相鄰兩列上的主素 是具有相異的質點極性圖案。圖9晴示應用此圖宰^ 不器950之局部。具體而言,晝素ρ(〇,ι)、ρ(1,υ是位於第 一列上,並應用圖9(a)與9(b)的晝素圖樣910,且均為参曾 點極性圖案。然*,如前所述,在連續的圖框下,晝素 P(〇,l)、P(l,l)是於負質點極性圖案與正f點極性圖宰ς間 不斷切換。類似地,晝素Ρ(0,0)、ρ(1,〇)是位於第二列上, 亚應用圖9(d)與9(e)的晝素圖樣91〇,且具有與書素 ρ(〇,υ、ρ(ι,ι)相反的質點極性圖案。相較於圖’、9⑷之=素 =言,圖9(f)之畫素圖案具有較均句的電性分佈旦以 減乂畫面閃爍與串音現象而提升光學品質,其中圖 畫素圖案是採用開闕元件行反轉驅動機制,而圖9⑴之晝 素圖案是採用開關元件點反轉驅動機制。 一 50 200846750 [0098]圖〗G(aH ο⑻為依據本發明另一實施μ m 四個顏色分量之晝素圖樣1010之質點極性圖宰。且體而 言,任-顏色分量可再分割成四個顏色質點。附帶;;提的 是,每一列上的顏色質點以及元件裝置區域均水平對齊, 而使得畫素圖# 1010之形狀為矩形。元件裝置“域 DCA 1、DCA 2、DPA 2、πγ·λ /ί μ 丄 a 一-MA-3、DCA—4構成晝素圖樣1〇1〇的 弟一列,且開關元件SEJ、SE_2、SE」、SE 於元件裝置區域DCA上DCA_2、DCa」、⑽4 : 質點cd-LK即為第-顏色分量之第-個顏色㈣)、 ⑶丄U即為第二顏色分量之第一個顏色色;:、 ⑶丄K即為第三顏色分量之第—個顏色;二)、 色分量之第一個顏色質點)構成晝素圖 樣1010的弟一列。顏色質點CD_4_2、CD_1 2、CD 2 9 疋㈣於顏色質點CD」」。顏色質點CD i 3、CD 2—3' CD—3—3、CD人3構成晝素圖樣麵—顏色併' 的第五歹丨—一 ―2」、CD-3—4構成晝素圖樣1010 弟列’且顏色質點CD—4_4是鄰接於顏色質茸占 SE 2 a Μ垃—— ~ ~3、CD-1-4之電極,而開關元件 CD 2 Γ ί 質‘點 CD-2J、CD~2-2、CD—2—3、 之黾極,且開關元件Se 3是叙接至 CD」」、CD 3 2、CD -疋耦接至顏色質點=D—4—3, CD—4_4) have negative polarity, and the first and third color components (ie, switching elements SE_1, SE-3 and color dot CD) (3)i 2, CD-L3, CD丄4, CD—3”, CD丄2, cd _3 3, (3)- have positive polarity. — --) [0097] The same pixel pattern (10) (ie, the first pixel pattern) of Figure 9(8) and 9(b) is applied. And the pixels of the pixel patterns 93〇 (ie, the second pixel pattern) of FIGS. 9(d) and 9(4) need to be arranged in an alternate column pattern, wherein the pixels in the same column have the (4) particle polarity pattern. The main elements on the adjacent two columns have different patterns of particle polarity. Figure 9 shows the application of this figure to the part of the 950. Specifically, the elements ρ(〇, ι), ρ(1, υ are located in the first column, and the morpheous pattern 910 of FIGS. 9(a) and 9(b) is applied, and both are point-polar Pattern. However, as mentioned above, in the continuous frame, the pixels P(〇, l) and P(l, l) are continuously switched between the negative particle polarity pattern and the positive f-point polarity map. Similarly, 昼素Ρ(0,0), ρ(1,〇) are located in the second column, and the 昼素 pattern 91〇 of FIGS. 9(d) and 9(e) is applied, and has a book ρ (〇, υ, ρ (ι, ι) opposite particle polarity pattern. Compared to the graphs, 9 (4) = prime = words, the pixel pattern of Figure 9 (f) has a more uniform sentence of electrical distribution to reduce乂The picture flickers and crosstalk phenomenon to improve the optical quality, wherein the picture element pattern adopts the reversing driving mechanism of the opening element, and the pixel pattern of Fig. 9(1) adopts the switching element point inversion driving mechanism. A 50 200846750 [0098] Figure G (aH ο(8) is the particle polarity map of the eutectic pattern 1010 of the four color components according to another embodiment of the present invention. And, the body-color component can be subdivided into four color dots. ; mention that each column The color dot and the component device area are horizontally aligned, and the shape of the pixel map #1010 is a rectangle. The component device "domain DCA 1, DCA 2, DPA 2, πγ·λ /ί μ 丄a--MA-3, DCA-4 constitutes a column of the 昼素 pattern 1〇1〇, and the switching elements SEJ, SE_2, SE”, SE are on the component device area DCA DCA_2, DCa”, (10)4: the dot cd-LK is the first color component The first color (four)), (3) 丄U is the first color color of the second color component;:, (3) 丄K is the first color of the third color component; b), the first color of the color component The mass point) constitutes a column of the sacred pattern 1010. Color dots CD_4_2, CD_1 2, CD 2 9 疋 (4) in the color dot CD"". The color point CD i 3, CD 2-3' CD-3-3, CD person 3 constitutes the enamel pattern surface - the color and the 'fifth 歹丨 -1 - 2", CD-3 - 4 constitute the enamel pattern 1010弟列' and the color dot CD_4_4 is adjacent to the color of the scent of the SE 2 a —— —— - ~ ~ 3, CD-1-4 electrode, and the switching element CD 2 ί 质 quality 'point CD-2J, CD ~2-2, CD_2-3, the drain, and the switching element Se 3 is connected to the CD"", the CD 3 2, the CD-疋 is coupled to the color dot

SE 4是鈕垃s' a ~ ~3、CD—3—4之電極,又開關元件 —疋耗接至顏色質點CD—4—1、CD—4_2、CD 51 200846750 CD_4_4之電極。 安圖10(轉示畫素圖樣1議-之負質點極性圖 在負貝點極性圖案中,第二與第四顏色分量(即 70件SE_2、SE—4與顏色質點CD力、CD 2 : CD-2-4; ' C〇-4-2 ' ^ ^ I·生’而弟一與弟二顏色分量(即為開關元件se eSE 4 is the electrode of button s' a ~ ~3, CD 3-4, and the switching element is connected to the electrode of color dot CD-4, CD-4_2, CD 51 200846750 CD_4_4. Antu 10 (representing the pixel pattern 1 - the negative particle polarity map in the negative shell point polarity pattern, the second and fourth color components (ie 70 SE_2, SE-4 and color dot CD force, CD 2 : CD-2-4; 'C〇-4-2 ' ^ ^ I·生' and brother and brother two color components (that is, the switching element se e

顏色質點 CDJ—1、®丄2、CD—L3、CD—匕4—、CD :D圖3樣2 二CD」~4)具有負極性。圖i〇(b)i會示書 錢樣umn之正質點極性圖案。在正質點 : 第量(:為開關元件… CD 4~3:CD 4V^trD'2~4'CD'4^ 為開關元件SEJ、SE_3與顏色質點叫^色^即 -—-—'—^ ci:, ,,1010 - _性®案’而使得顯示器中的所有顏^點 極性圖案之間切換。圖框將會不斷於兩種質點 [001叫圖1〇(cH〇⑹為依據本發明另一實 =顏色分1之晝素圖樣1G3G之f點 ^ 圖樣咖,畫素圖樣腦同樣具有水^案 矩形的形狀。元件褒置區域DCA i為 DCA—4構成畫素圖樣1〇3〇的第一列,且開關元件 52 200846750 SE_2、SE—3、SE—4是分別位於元件裝置區域dca」、 DCA:2、DCA_3、DCA〜4。顏色質點CDjj(即為第:顏 色分置之第—個顏色質點)、CD—2J(即為第二顏色分量 第:個顏色質點)、〇)」」(即為第三顏色分量之第一個顏 色質點)、CD_4_1(即為第四顏色分量之第 _ 構成畫素圖樣刪的第二列。顏色質點CDj_2、CDr2、) CD—4_2、CD—3—2構成晝素圖樣刪的第三列,且顏色 點CD—2—2是鄰接於顏色質點CD丄1。顏色質點CDJ」、、 CD_3_3 CD—4—3構成畫素圖樣1〇3〇的第四列, 且顏色質點CD丄3是鄰接於顏色質點 &quot;r&quot;CD-2-1-^-co_4_4.CD3\-J;\* ΓΠ , , ㈣貝點CD-2-4是鄰接於顏色質點 SE—2—Μ垃——Ά1—3、CD—L4之電極,而開關元件 -疋耦接至顏色質點CD_2_1、CDjj、CD 2 3、 CD一2一4之電極,且開關开生— —— 53 1 H 一 — — CD—3」之電極,又開關元件 SE—4疋耦接至顏色質點、cD 4 2、 CD—4—4 之電極。 一 — 一 J、 = 102]圖_緣示晝素圖樣刪_之負質點極性 負質點極性圖案中,第二與第四顏色分量(即為開關 兀件SE—2、SE—4與顏色質點CD c :D:2-七⑶士1,1-2,-4—3、CD」—4)具有2正3極 相^乐與弟二顏色分量(即為開關元件SE1、SE3鱼 顏色質點 CD—U'CD—L2、CD」—3,—Η,。 200846750 _ —、CD—3—3 ' CD—3—4)具有負極性。圖1〇(d)繪示畫 ^圖樣之正質點極性圖案。在正質點極性圖案中, 第一與第四顏色分量(即為開關元件§Ε_2、SEj與顏色質 』CD—2 1、CD—2—2、CD 2—3、CD—2—4、CD—4 J、CD 4 2、 =D—4—3、CD一 4 一 4)具有負極性,而第一與第三顏色分量(即 為開關元件SEJ、SE—3與顏色質點⑶丄!、cd丄2、 CD」」、CD—14、CD 3 J、CD—3 2、CD—3—3、⑶」—4) 具有正極性。Color dot CDJ-1, ®丄2, CD-L3, CD-匕4—, CD:DFig. 3 2 2 CD”~4) have negative polarity. Figure i〇(b)i will show the positive dot polarity pattern of the money sample umn. In the positive mass point: the first quantity (: is the switching element... CD 4~3: CD 4V^trD'2~4'CD'4^ is the switching element SEJ, SE_3 and the color point is called ^ color ^ ie----'- ^ ci:, ,,1010 - _Sex® case's switch between all the polarity patterns in the display. The frame will continue to be at two mass points [001] Figure 1〇(cH〇(6) is based on this Invented another real = color 1 color element 1G3G f point ^ pattern coffee, the pixel pattern brain also has the shape of a water rectangle. The component placement area DCA i is DCA-4 constitutes a pixel pattern 1〇3 The first column of 〇, and the switching elements 52 200846750 SE_2, SE-3, SE-4 are located in the component device area dca", DCA: 2, DCA_3, DCA ~ 4 respectively. The color dot CDjj (ie, the first: color separation The first - color point), CD-2J (that is, the second color component: color point), 〇)"" (that is, the first color point of the third color component), CD_4_1 (that is, the fourth The color component _ constitutes the second column of the pixel pattern deletion. The color dot CDj_2, CDr2, CD-4_2, CD-3-2 constitute the third column of the enamel pattern, and the color point CD-2-2 is Connected to the color dot CD丄1. The color dot CDJ”, CD_3_3 CD—4—3 constitutes the fourth column of the pixel pattern 1〇3〇, and the color dot CD丄3 is adjacent to the color dot&quot;r&quot;CD- 2-1-^-co_4_4.CD3\-J;\* ΓΠ , , (4) Bay point CD-2-4 is adjacent to the color particle SE-2 - Μ Ά - Ά 1-3, CD-L4 electrode, and The switching element - 疋 is coupled to the electrodes of the color dots CD_2_1, CDjj, CD 2 3, CD 2-4, and the switch is opened - —— 53 1 H —— CD-3, and the switching element SE 4疋 is coupled to the color particle, cD 4 2, CD—4—4 electrode. One—one J, = 102】Fig. _ 昼 昼 昼 删 _ 之 之 之 之 之 之 之 之 负 负 负 负 负The fourth color component (ie, the switch element SE-2, SE-4 and the color dot CD c: D: 2-seven (3) ± 1, 1-2, -4 - 3, CD" - 4) has 2 positive 3 The polar phase ^ music and brother two color components (that is, the switching elements SE1, SE3 fish color dot CD-U'CD-L2, CD" -3, -Η, 200846750 _ -, CD-3-3 'CD-3 - 4) has a negative polarity. Figure 1 (d) shows the positive dot polarity pattern of the painted pattern. In the positive dot polarity pattern, the first and fourth color components (ie, the switching element §Ε_2, SEj and color quality) CD-2, CD-2-2, CD2-3, CD2-4, CD- 4 J, CD 4 2, =D-4-3, CD-4 4) have negative polarity, and the first and third color components (ie, switching elements SEJ, SE-3 and color dots (3) 丄!, cd丄2, CD"", CD-14, CD 3 J, CD-3 2, CD-3-3, (3)"-4) have positive polarity.

一 σσ [〇〇103]以應用圖1〇(C)與圖10(d)之畫素圖樣1030之顯 不器而言,在—個顯示圖框時,所有晝素會具有相同的質 *、’,而使付m巾的所有顏色質點構成西洋棋 ^回木如岫所述,連績的顯示圖框將會不斷於兩種質點 極性圖案之間切換。 [00104]圖11⑻-u⑻為依據本發明另一實施例之具有 =顏色分量之晝素圖樣之質點極性圖案。具體而言,晝 : 顏色分量可再分割成四個顏色質點,且 :二色分量均搭配一個元件裝置區域。元件裝置區域 箆DCA—2、DCA—3、DCA—4構成晝素圖樣1110的 質T心;1、DCA-2、DCA」、叫。顏色 CD 2 U卽;:為第一顏色分量之第—個顏色質點)、 CD—3—ί弟二顏色分量之第—個顏色質點)、 CD 4 l(gp A ^ ± 個顏色質點)、 樣=顏色分量之第一個顏色質點臟晝素圖 列’且第二列是水平對齊於第-列。顏色質 54 200846750 CD 4 ―― —— …^一Ή丹现莖I圖樣UK) 的弟二列,且顏色質點CD一4」是鄰接於顏色質點 CD—1」。顏色質點⑶丄^⑶^⑶^⑶、^ 構成晝素圖樣in〇的第四列,且顏色質點CD—i :垃 於顏色質點CD—4-1。最後,顏色質點CD_4_3、CD 3 3、 CD一4—4、CD丄4構成畫素圖樣丄】1〇的第五列,且顏色質 二?D:V4是鄰接於顏色質點CD」-3。此外’開關元件 SE一1疋耦接至顏色質點CD—^、cn2、cD ! 3、 =亡:,電極’而開關元件SE_2是耦接至顏色質點 SE —3 ϋ2-2、CD—2—3、CD—2—4之電極,且開關元件 SE—3疋耦接至顏色質點cd」」、cD」」、cD 3 3 ^之電極’又開關元件SE_4是搞接至顏色質點 ⑶人 i、CD 4—2、cd_4 3、CD 4 4 之電極。 ·、占 [00105]圖ll(a)緣不畫素圖樣111〇(標示為I〗A σσ [〇〇103], in the case of applying the pixel of Fig. 1 (C) and the pixel pattern 1030 of Fig. 10 (d), all pixels will have the same quality when displaying a frame * , ', and make all the color points of the m towel constitute the chess piece ^ back to the wood as described, the continuous display frame will continue to switch between the two particle polarity patterns. 11(8)-u(8) are particle dot polar patterns of a pixel pattern having a color component according to another embodiment of the present invention. Specifically, the color component can be subdivided into four color dots, and the two color components are combined with one component device region. The component device area 箆DCA-2, DCA-3, and DCA-4 constitute the mass T center of the tilapia pattern 1110; 1, DCA-2, DCA", and called. Color CD 2 U卽;: the first color component of the first color component), the first color particle of the CD-3 color component, CD 4 l (gp A ^ ± color dot), The first color of the color component is the visceral map column 'and the second column is horizontally aligned to the first column. Color quality 54 200846750 CD 4 —— —— ... ^ 一 Ή 现 茎 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I The color dot (3) 丄 ^ (3) ^ (3) ^ (3), ^ constitutes the fourth column of the enamel pattern in ,, and the color dot CD-i : is the color dot CD-4-1. Finally, the color dots CD_4_3, CD 3 3, CD-4-4, CD丄4 constitute the fifth column of the pixel pattern, and the color quality is two D: V4 is adjacent to the color dot CD"-3. In addition, the 'switching element SE-1' is coupled to the color dot CD-^, cn2, cD! 3, = dead: the electrode ' and the switching element SE_2 is coupled to the color dot SE -3 ϋ 2-2, CD-2 - 3, CD - 2 - 4 electrode, and the switching element SE - 3 疋 is coupled to the color dot cd "", cD"", cD 3 3 ^ electrode 'and the switching element SE_4 is connected to the color point (3) people i , CD 4-2, cd_4 3, CD 4 4 electrodes. ·, [00105] Figure ll (a) is not a prime pattern 111 〇 (marked as I)

,點極性圖案。在負質點極性圖案中,第二與第乂 里(即為開關元件SE—2、SE一4與顏色質點cD 2】刀 CD又2、CD 2 3、CD 2 4、CD 4」、cd、4」、: CD—4—4)具有正極性’而第—與第三顏色分量 門-、 件 SE_1、SE_3 與顏色質點 CD—!、CD 1 2 ^ f 7L CIU—4、CD—3」、CD_3_2、CD—3—3、CD] 4)具有1 倉= 性。圖11(b)繪示晝素圖樣1110(標示為111〇+)之正質點 性圖案。在正質點極性圖案中,第二與第四顏、即么 開關元件SE_2、SE—4與顏色質點CD 2丨、 (尸為 CD 2_3 . CO_2_4 ^ . CD_〇 . CD:4 ; ^ 〇〇 f ; 〆、有負極性,而第一與第三顏色分量(即為開關元件犯j、) 55 200846750 SE一3 與顏色質點 cd—1__1、CDj—2、CDJ—3、CD_1_4、 CD」—1、CD」2、CD 3 3、CD—3—4)具有正極性。 [00106]以應用圖n(a)與圖11(b)之畫素圖樣111〇之顯 不杰而言,在一個顯示圖框時,所有晝素會具有相同的質 點極性圖案,而使得顯示器中的所有顏色質點構成西洋棋 盤圖案。如前所述,連續的顯示圖框將會不斷於兩種質點 極性圖案之間切換。, dot polarity pattern. In the negative dot polarity pattern, the second and third dimensions (ie, switching element SE-2, SE-4 and color dot cD 2) knife CD 2, CD 2 3, CD 2 4, CD 4", cd, 4",: CD-4-4) has positive polarity 'the first and third color component gates -, SE_1, SE_3 and color dot CD-!, CD 1 2 ^ f 7L CIU-4, CD-3" , CD_3_2, CD-3-3, CD] 4) has 1 bin = sex. Figure 11 (b) shows a positive dot pattern of the alizarin pattern 1110 (labeled 111〇+). In the positive dot polarity pattern, the second and fourth faces, ie, the switching elements SE_2, SE-4 and the color dot CD 2丨, (the body is CD 2_3 . CO_2_4 ^ . CD_〇. CD: 4 ; ^ 〇〇 f ; 〆, has a negative polarity, and the first and third color components (that is, the switching element commits j,) 55 200846750 SE-3 and color dot cd-1__1, CDj-2, CDJ-3, CD_1_4, CD" - 1. CD"2, CD33, CD3-4" have positive polarity. [00106] In applying the graph n(a) and the pixel pattern 111 of FIG. 11(b), in the case of displaying a frame, all the pixels will have the same dot polarity pattern, so that the display All the color dots in the middle constitute the checkerboard pattern. As mentioned earlier, the continuous display frame will continue to switch between the two particle polarity patterns.

[00107]圖I2(a)_12(b)為依據本發明另一實施例之具有 :個顏色分量之晝素圖# 121〇之質點極性圖案。具體而 口旦素圖樣1210之任一顏色分量可再分割成三個顏色質 點。顏色質點CD—1—1(即為第—顏色分量之第—個顏色質 j ) CD—2 J(即為第二顏色分量之第一個顏色質點)、 D—3 一 1(即為第三顏色分量之第一個顏色質點)、 Γη?:,第四顏色分量之第一個顏色質點)構成晝素圖 樣 的罘一列。顏色質點CD J j、CD—2 j、CD 3 2、 二=以使传顏色f點CD丄2鄰接於顏色質點⑶又1。 ® m ^ CD^~1' CD^3^3 ^ CD—3 i點CD 2、3弟鄭1列’且第三列是與第一列對齊以使得顏色 貝.、、、占一2一3郇接於顏色質點CD—1—2。晝素圖揭1?1n女 包括形成一歹彳之元件fρΘ ° 亦 4,且此列是Γ二ί t CA-1、DCA-2、、 開關元件SE1 下:並與第三列對齊。此外, 區域職、DCA ? SE-4是分別位於元件裝置 〆 — A〜2、DCA」、DCA 4,复中門奶-扯 SEJ是耦接至顏色質 -,、中開關το件 貝』⑶丄1、CD—1—2、CD1」之電 56 200846750 極’而開關元件SE 2冬知&amp; CD—2—2、CD__2 3之:搞,疋輕接至顏色質點CD—2j、 質點CD—3—1、〇)—3 1、CD且開關元件SE-3是_至顏色 是柄接至顏色質點CD—4—1:d=D, [〇〇108]圖12(a)洽干蚩 —— —4—3之電極。 安.&amp; ^ 1 )、、、日不晝素圖樣1210-之負質點朽阽θ 案。在負質點極性圖案中,笛 ~ 貝貝…、占極性圖 元件SE 2、SE 4盎心# —弟四顏色分量(即為開關 CD—4—心4-2=色4^^ ^ ^ *(^p ^ 1 sVl ; SE tΓί , ~ CD丄2、CD ! 3、CD f SE」與顏色貝點⑶丄卜 性。圖1雜;金音丄2、CD-3-3)具有負極 曹既μ 晝圖樣121G+之正f點極性圖案。在正 貝點極性圖荦中,筮- 社止 犯2、SE Λ 四顏色分量(即為開關元件 — 4舁顏色質點CD力、 2、 4 1 &gt; ΓΠ λ ο -- ^ — — —4—3)具有負極性,而第一鱼第三声昏 3量(即為開關元件SE—i、SE_3與顏色質點cd丄 性 ^ —2、CD—I3、111、CD-3-2、CD-3-3)具有正極 复全[00109]應用目12⑷與12(_ t素圖樣121〇之顯示器 二'&quot;素應以交替列的方式排列成為交替的質點極性圖案, 查'即當偶數列的晝素具有第—f點極性圖案時,奇數列的 曰”貝i /、有弟一貝點極性圖案。然而,如前所述,連續的 =二圖框將會不斷於兩種質點極性圖案之間切換。圖12(c) :不顯示器1200之局部,其中畫素P(0,1)、P(u)是位於 蓍 列上,並為負極性態樣(negative polarity type)(亦即為 負質點極性圖案),而晝素]?(〇,〇)、;?(1,〇)便位於第二列上, 57 200846750 並為正極性態樣(亦即為正質點極性圖案)。如此一來,當 y為^數時,晝素P(x,y)便具有第一極性態樣,而當y為奇 數%,晝素P(x,y)便具有第二極性態樣。此外,圖12(幻之 晝素圖案是採用開關元件點反轉驅動機制。 [00110]然而’圖12(c)之顯示器在相鄰兩列的邊界上會 出現不對稱的顏色分佈,所以本發明之某些實施例會進一 步同日守應用另一種晝素圖樣以及圖12(a)與12(b)之晝素圖 樣。,12(d)-12(e)為依據本發明另一實施例之具有四個顏 色分量之畫素圖樣123〇之質點極性圖案。具體而言,畫素 f樣123G之任—顏色分量可再分割成三個顏色質點。顏色 貝”、、占CD—1一1(即為第一顏色分量之第一個顏色質點)、 CD—2一 1(即為第二顏色分量之第一個顏色質點)、 CD—3一 1(即為第三顏色分量之第一個顏色質點)、 CD—4一1(即為第四顏色分量之第一個顏色質點)構成晝素圖 樣1230的第一列。顏色質點CD—1—2、CD—2—2、CD」2、 fD〜4一2構成畫素圖樣123〇的第二列。不過,第二列偏移 第歹J以使得顏色質點CD—2—2鄰接於顏色質點CD—1—1。 顏色質點CD」」、CD-2」、CD一3一3、CD一4」構成畫素 ,樣1230的第二列’ ^第三列是與第—列對齊以使得顏色 質點CD一 1一3鄰接於顏色質點CD一2一2。晝素圖樣ι23〇亦 包括形成一列之元件裝置區域DCAJ、DCA_2、DCA_3、 DCA一4二而這些元件裝置區域構成晝素圖樣123〇的第四 列,且第四列是與第二列對齊。此外,開關元件SE_1、 SE〜2 ' SE〜3、SE一4是分別位於元件裝置區域、 D(:A—2 ' DCA-3、DCA一4 ’其中開關元件SEJ是麵接至 58 200846750 顏色質點CD丄1、CD_L2、CD—L3之電極, SE—2是耦接至顏色質點CD—2」、CD—2—2、2 ;凡 極’且開關元件SE_3是耦接至顏-色質點⑶%,電 C二—3c—^ ^ 貝點CD—4 J、CD 4—2、CD—4—3之電極。 肩邑 =1,12(d)繪示畫素圖# 123〇_之 ⑶—4— ^ — — ―4—3)具有正極性,而第一盥筮-令 ^ « ;2(e^ ' CD~3-2 ' ,, 質點朽二、、曰不旦素圖樣η,之正質點極性圖案。在正 貝點極性圖案中,第二盥 口本在正 SE2、SE4 ^色刀!(即為開關元件 C…^色質點CD-2」、CD-”,2 3、 Μ ~ — CD-4—3)具有負極性,而第一盥第—-鲔 色分置(即為開關元件SE1、SE3盘心/ ,、弟二顏 CD 1 2、rn !。—與顏色質點CD—u、 性。-~ ~、CD」-1、CD-3-2、CD—3—3)具有正極 _12]對於同時應用圖 121〇(即第一金 1 J l2(b)之晝素圖樣 第二書素圖)圖12(d)、12(e)之晝素圖樣⑵〇(即 排列成為=的畫素而言’其應以交替列的方式 相同的質點極性圖案。w 疋具有 而顯示器、咖便是應用前_。、^ G,局部, 的範園是用吟与神- 口莱為求h楚,母個晝素 示不,而此陰影僅用於解釋圖】 59 200846750 任何功能上的意義。具體而言,畫素ρ(0,1)、POJ)是位於 第一列上,並應用圖12(a)、12(b&gt;之畫素圖樣1210,且均 為負質點極性圖案。然而,如前所述而在連續的圖框中, 每個晝素的質點極性圖案會不斷於正質點極性圖案與負質 點極性圖案之間切換。畫素Ρ(〇,〇)、Ρ(15〇)是位於第二列上, 並應用圖12(d)、12(e)之晝素圖樣1230,且亦為負質點極 f生圖案。圖12(f)之畫素圖案是採用開關元件行反轉驅動機 制。[00107] Figures 12(a)-12(b) are particle polarity patterns having a color component of a primed image #121〇 in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention. Specifically, any color component of the morphological pattern 1210 can be subdivided into three color gamuts. Color dot CD—1—1 (ie, the first color component of the first color component) CD—2 J (ie, the first color dot of the second color component), D—3—1 (ie, The first color particle of the three color component), Γη?:, the first color particle of the fourth color component) constitutes a column of the tilde pattern. The color dot CD J j, CD-2 j, CD 3 2, 2 = so that the color f dot CD 丄 2 is adjacent to the color dot (3) and 1 again. ® m ^ CD^~1' CD^3^3 ^ CD—3 i point CD 2, 3 brother Zheng 1 column 'and the third column is aligned with the first column to make the color shell.,,, occupy a 2 3 郇 connected to the color point CD 1-2. The 昼素图 reveals that the 1?1n female includes a component fρΘ ° also 4, and this column is Γ ί ί CA-1, DCA-2, and the switching element SE1: and is aligned with the third column. In addition, the regional office, DCA? SE-4 are located in the component device 〆 - A ~ 2, DCA", DCA 4, Fuzhongmen milk - pull SEJ is coupled to the color quality -,, the middle switch τ ο ” (3)丄1, CD-1-2, CD1" electric 56 200846750 Extreme 'and switching element SE 2 冬知 & CD-2-2, CD__2 3: engage, 疋 lightly connect to color point CD-2j, dot CD —3—1,〇)—3 1. CD and the switching element SE-3 is _ to the color is the handle connected to the color dot CD—4—1:d=D, [〇〇108] Figure 12(a)蚩————4—3 electrode. Ann. &amp; ^ 1),,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, In the negative dot polarity pattern, flute ~ babe..., occupies the polarity map element SE 2, SE 4 angxin # - brother four color components (that is, switch CD-4 - heart 4-2 = color 4 ^ ^ ^ ^ * (^p ^ 1 sVl ; SE tΓί , ~ CD丄2, CD ! 3, CD f SE" and color shell point (3) 丄 。. Figure 1 杂; 金音丄 2, CD-3-3) has a negative Cao The pattern of the positive f-point polarity of the μ 昼 pattern 121G+. In the polar map of the positive point, 筮- 社2, SE Λ four color components (that is, switching elements - 4 舁 color dot CD force, 2, 4 1 &gt; ΓΠ λ ο -- ^ — — — 4—3) has a negative polarity, and the first fish is third faint 3 (ie, the switching elements SE—i, SE_3 and the color dot cd丄^^2, CD - I3, 111, CD-3-2, CD-3-3) with positive electrode complex [00109] Application 12 (4) and 12 (_ t pattern 121 〇 display two '&quot; should be arranged in an alternating column It becomes an alternating particle polarity pattern, and it is found that when the elements of the even-numbered columns have the first-f-point polarity pattern, the odd-numbered columns have the polarity pattern of the 曰 贝 / 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 = two frames will continue to be in two particle polarity maps Switching between. Figure 12 (c): not part of the display 1200, where the pixels P (0, 1), P (u) are located on the array and are negative polarity type (ie, It is a negative dot polarity pattern), while 昼素]?(〇,〇),;?(1,〇) is located in the second column, 57 200846750 and is a positive polarity (that is, a positive dot polarity pattern). Thus, when y is a number, the halogen P(x, y) has a first polarity state, and when y is an odd number, the halogen P(x, y) has a second polarity state. In addition, Figure 12 (the magical pixel pattern is a switching element dot inversion driving mechanism. [00110] However, the display of Figure 12(c) will have an asymmetrical color distribution on the boundary of two adjacent columns, so this Some embodiments of the invention will further apply another morphological pattern and the morphological pattern of Figures 12(a) and 12(b) in the same day. 12(d)-12(e) is another embodiment in accordance with the present invention. The pixel polarity pattern of the pixel pattern of the four color components is 123. Specifically, the pixel component of the pixel-like 123G can be subdivided into three color dots. The color shell", the CD 1 - 1 (that is, the first color point of the first color component), CD - 2 - 1 (that is, the first color point of the second color component), CD - 3 - 1 (that is, the third color component) The first color dot), CD-4-1 (i.e., the first color dot of the fourth color component) constitutes the first column of the tilde pattern 1230. The color dot CD-1-2, CD-2-2, CD"2, and fD~4-2 constitute the second column of the pixel pattern 123〇. However, the second column is offset by the second J such that the color dot CD-2-2 is adjacent to the color dot CD-1. The color dot CD", CD-2", CD-3-3, CD-4" constitutes a pixel, the second column of the sample 1230' ^The third column is aligned with the first column to make the color dot CD-1 3 adjacent to the color dot CD 1-2. The pixel pattern ι23〇 also includes a column of component device regions DCAJ, DCA_2, DCA_3, DCA-4, and these component device regions constitute a fourth column of the pixel pattern 123A, and the fourth column is aligned with the second column. In addition, the switching elements SE_1, SE~2 'SE~3, SE-4 are respectively located in the component device region, D(:A-2' DCA-3, DCA-4' where the switching element SEJ is surface-connected to 58 200846750 color The electrodes of the dots CD丄1, CD_L2, and CD-L3, SE-2 are coupled to the color dot CD-2”, CD-2-2, 2; the pole electrode' and the switching element SE_3 are coupled to the color-color point (3)%, electric C 2 - 3c - ^ ^ shell point CD - 4 J, CD 4 - 2, CD - 4 - 3 electrode. Shoulder = 1, 12 (d) painted pictogram # 123〇_ (3)—4—^————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————— The positive dot polarity pattern. In the positive dot pattern, the second port is in the positive SE2, SE4 ^ color knife! (ie, the switching element C...^color point CD-2), CD-", 2 3 , Μ ~ — CD-4—3) has a negative polarity, and the first 盥 first—the 鲔 color is set (ie, the switching elements SE1, SE3 hub/, and the second 颜 CD CD 1 2, rn !. — and Color dot CD-u, sex.-~~, CD"-1, CD-3-2, CD-3-3) have positive _12] for simultaneous application 121〇 (ie the first gold 1 J l2 (b) 昼 图 第二 第二 第二 ) 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 ' ' It should be the same pattern of particle polarity in alternate rows. w 疋 has the display, the coffee is the application before _., ^ G, partial, the Fan Garden is used for 吟 and the god - mouth Lai for the h Chu, the mother昼素 indicates no, and this shadow is only used to explain the figure] 59 200846750 Any functional meaning. Specifically, the pixels ρ (0, 1), POJ) are located in the first column, and apply Figure 12 (a ), 12 (b&gt; pixel pattern 1210, and both are negative particle polarity patterns. However, as described above, in a continuous frame, the particle polarity pattern of each element will continue to be in the positive dot polarity pattern and Switching between the negative dot polarity patterns. The pixels 〇(〇,〇) and Ρ(15〇) are located in the second column, and the tilvin pattern 1230 of Figures 12(d) and 12(e) is applied, and The negative pixel pattern is the negative pattern. The pixel pattern of Fig. 12(f) is a row inversion driving mechanism using a switching element.

[00113]儘管相較於圖12(c)之畫素圖案而言,圖12(f) 之晝素圖案具有較佳的色彩分佈,不過本發明之某些實施 例仍應用圖12(c)之晝素圖案以替換圖12(f)之畫素圖案, 其中圖12(c)之畫素圖案是採用開關元件點反轉驅動機 制,而圖12(f)之晝素圖案是採用開關元件行反轉驅動機 制。這是因為相較於開關元件行反轉驅動機制而言,開關 元件點反轉驅動機制可減少晝面閃爍或是串音現象以提升 光學品質。 [00114]本發明之許多實施例可製作為7英忖(inch)寬 螢幕WVGA 800x480解析度規格之彩色顯示器,而此顯厂、 器是採用開關元件點反轉驅動機制。此寬螢幕顯示器〜Λ、 桁度在水平方向的解析度為800個晝素,且在垂直°°之解 480個畫素。此外,此彩色晝素的尺寸是高19〇.化=向為 ΐ9〇·5μιη。每個晝素可利用彩色濾光材料而分成三個彦且見 量(即紅、綠與藍色)。如此一來,寬視頻圖像陣列=色分 方向的解析度為2400(800x3)個顏色分量,且在垂直方水平 48θ個顏色分量。每個顏色分量的理論尺寸是寬向為 、·5认m且 200846750 高190·5μηι,不過,有部份區域是要用於設置為元件裝置 區域。此外,顯示器共有480列’且每一列向上共有2400 個開關元件。元件裝置區域是由開關元件(薄膜電晶體)與 儲存電容所組成,且元件裝置區域的理論尺寸是寬63· 5μιη 且高38·0μηι。然而,考量垂直與水平質點間距的因素後, 元件裝置區域的實際尺寸是寬55·5μηι且高35.0#m。 [00115]在顯示面板的製作過程中,可使用默克公司 (Merck)所生產的垂直配向液晶,如型號MLC-6884之具有 負介電異向I生(negative dielectric anisotropy)特十生之垂直配 向液晶。日本日產化學工業株式會社(Nissan Chemical[00113] Although the pixel pattern of FIG. 12(f) has a better color distribution than the pixel pattern of FIG. 12(c), some embodiments of the present invention still apply FIG. 12(c). The pixel pattern is replaced by the pixel pattern of FIG. 12(f), wherein the pixel pattern of FIG. 12(c) is a dot inversion driving mechanism of the switching element, and the pixel pattern of FIG. 12(f) is a switching element. Line inversion drive mechanism. This is because the switching element dot inversion driving mechanism can reduce the flickering of the facet or the crosstalk phenomenon to improve the optical quality compared to the row inversion driving mechanism of the switching element. [00114] Many embodiments of the present invention can be fabricated as a 7 inch inch wide screen WVGA 800x480 resolution color display, and the display device uses a switching element dot inversion drive mechanism. This wide-screen display ~ Λ, 桁 degree resolution in the horizontal direction is 800 pixels, and in the vertical ° ° solution 480 pixels. In addition, the size of the color vegetal is 19 高. = = 向 9 〇 5 μιη. Each element can be divided into three sections (i.e., red, green, and blue) using color filter materials. As a result, the wide video image array = resolution of the color separation direction is 2400 (800 x 3) color components, and the color components are 48 θ horizontally. The theoretical size of each color component is the width direction, ·5 recognition m and 200846750 height 190·5μηι, however, some areas are to be used as the component device area. In addition, the display has a total of 480 columns' and each column has a total of 2400 switching elements. The component device area is composed of a switching element (thin film transistor) and a storage capacitor, and the theoretical size of the device device region is 63. 5 μm wide and 38. 0 μm high. However, considering the factors of the vertical and horizontal dot spacing, the actual size of the component device area is 55. 5 μm wide and 35.0 # m high. [00115] In the production process of the display panel, the vertical alignment liquid crystal produced by Merck can be used, such as the vertical dielectric anisotropy of the model MLC-6884. Oriented to the liquid crystal. Nissan Chemical Co., Ltd. (Nissan Chemical)

Industrial Limited)生產型號 SE-5300 之聚亞醯胺(p〇iyimide, PI)可用於達成無預傾角的垂直液晶配向效果,且無需要進 行摩擦配向(rubbing)的步驟。其他型號之垂直配向聚亞醯 月女亦可達到垂直液晶配向的效果’諸如日產之垂直配向聚 亞胺 SE-1211、SE-7511L、RN-1566、RN-1681 以及日本 合成橡膠株式會社(Japan Synthetic Rubber Corporation, JSR)之垂直配向聚亞醯胺AL1H659、AL60101、 JALS688-RU、JALS-2096-R14。其他由默克公司所生產的 垂直配向液晶的型號尚包括MLC_6〇〇8、MLC-6609、 MLC-6610、MLC-6882、MLC-6883、MLC-6885、 MLC-6886。相較於其他採用突起物或是銦錫氧化物溝槽幾 何形狀之多域垂直配向液晶顯示器而言,本發明之面板的 製作過程是無需進行摩擦配向的步驟,且上下基板在對組 時亦無需高精準的對位。此外,在不同顏色質點與元件裝 置區域之間的連接導線(可為銦錫氧化物材質)的寬度為 200846750 3μπι,而上下偏振片是貼附於面板上,且一般的液晶層間 距(cell gap)約略介於 2·Όμπι〜3·5μηι。 * [00116]在本發明之一個特定實施例中,顯示器是應用 • 圖7(a)-7(b)以及圖7(d)-7(e)之晝素圖樣、質點極性圖案與 晝素排列方式,其中每個顏色分量示分割成四個顏色質 點。如此一來,每個顏色質點的理論尺寸是寬63·5μηι且高 38·1μπι。然而,考量垂直與水平質點間距的因素後,元件 裝置區域的實際尺寸是寬55·5μπι且高35·1μπι。 # [00117]在本發明之另一個特定實施例中,顯示器是應 用圖5(d)-5(f)之晝素圖樣、質點極性圖案與晝素排列方 式’其中每個顏色分量示分割成四個顏色質點。如此一來, 母個顏色夤點的理論尺寸是寬63·5μηι且高47·8μηι。然而, 考量垂直與水平質點間距的因素後,元件裝置區域的實際 尺寸疋1 55·5μπι且高44·8μιη。在5伏特的外加電壓下, 依據本發明概念之顯示器可達到高於7⑽對比度之顯示效 果。再者,此顯示器具有非常廣的視角(對比度大於5之範 ⑩ 圍),且此視角尚需依據貼附於面板上的偏振片而定。本發 明眾多的實施例主要是使用四種類型的偏振片:一般線性 偏振片(不含多域垂直配向廣視角光學補償膜),多域垂直 配向廣視角偏振片(貼附多域垂直配向廣視角光學補償 膜)’ 一般圓偏振爿(不含多域垂直配向廣視角光學補償膜) 以及多域垂直配向廣視角圓偏振片(貼附多域垂直配向廣 視角光學補償膜)。多域垂直配向廣視角光學補償膜(〇ptical compensation film)具有負雙折射之單軸(uniaxial)以及雙軸 (biaxial)薄膜,造成總共約_1〇〇nm〜_3〇〇nm的延遲值 62 200846750 (retardation)。具體而言,以使用一般線性 域垂直配向廣視角光學補償膜之顯示ϋ而言,、其水平^多 直方向區域的視角是大於±85。,而兩個:垂 片搭配多域垂直配向廣視角光學補償膜之_^偏, 角均™。。另外,相較於線;振; 5 囫偏振片可增加兩倍的光穿透率Industrial Limited) Production model SE-5300's poly(p-iyimide, PI) can be used to achieve vertical liquid crystal alignment without pretilt angle, and there is no need for rubbing alignment. Other models of vertical alignment Polyaluminum women can also achieve the effect of vertical liquid crystal alignment [such as Nissan's vertical alignment polyimide SP-1211, SE-7511L, RN-1566, RN-1681 and Japan Synthetic Rubber Co., Ltd. (Japan Synthetic Rubber Corporation, JSR) vertical alignment polyamines AL1H659, AL60101, JALS688-RU, JALS-2096-R14. Other models of vertical alignment liquid crystals produced by Merck include MLC_6〇〇8, MLC-6609, MLC-6610, MLC-6882, MLC-6883, MLC-6885, and MLC-6886. Compared with other multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal displays using protrusions or indium tin oxide trench geometries, the fabrication process of the panel of the present invention does not require the step of rubbing alignment, and the upper and lower substrates are also in the group. No need for high precision alignment. In addition, the width of the connecting wire (which may be indium tin oxide material) between the different color dots and the device device region is 200846750 3μπι, and the upper and lower polarizing plates are attached to the panel, and the general liquid crystal layer spacing (cell gap) ) is approximately between 2·Όμπι~3·5μηι. * [00116] In a particular embodiment of the invention, the display is an application: Figure 7 (a) - 7 (b) and Figure 7 (d) - 7 (e) of the pixel pattern, particle polarity pattern and halogen Arrangement in which each color component is divided into four color dots. As a result, the theoretical size of each color particle is 63.0 μm wide and 38. 1 μm high. However, considering the factors of the vertical and horizontal dot spacing, the actual size of the component device area is 55. 5 μm wide and 35. 1 μm high. # [00117] In another specific embodiment of the present invention, the display is applied to the pixel pattern of Figure 5(d)-5(f), the dot polarity pattern and the pixel arrangement pattern, wherein each color component is divided into Four color dots. As a result, the theoretical size of the mother color point is 63.5 μm and the height is 47·8 μm. However, considering the factors of the vertical and horizontal dot spacing, the actual size of the component device region is 551 55·5 μm and is 44. 8 μm high. At an applied voltage of 5 volts, the display according to the inventive concept can achieve a display effect higher than 7 (10) contrast. Furthermore, the display has a very wide viewing angle (contrast ratio is greater than 5), and this viewing angle depends on the polarizing plate attached to the panel. The numerous embodiments of the present invention mainly use four types of polarizing plates: general linear polarizing plates (excluding multi-domain vertical alignment wide viewing angle optical compensation film), multi-domain vertical alignment wide viewing angle polarizing plates (attached to multi-domain vertical alignment) Viewing angle optical compensation film) 'General circularly polarized 爿 (excluding multi-domain vertical alignment wide viewing angle optical compensation film) and multi-domain vertical alignment wide viewing angle circular polarizing plate (attached multi-domain vertical alignment wide viewing angle optical compensation film). Multi-domain vertical alignment wide viewing angle optical compensation film (unipolar) and biaxial film with negative birefringence, resulting in a total retardation value of about _1 〇〇 nm to _3 〇〇 nm 62 200846750 (retardation). Specifically, in the case of the display ϋ using the general linear domain vertical alignment wide viewing angle optical compensation film, the viewing angle of the horizontally-multiple straight direction region is larger than ±85. And two: the vertical piece with the multi-domain vertical alignment wide viewing angle optical compensation film _^ partial, angle average TM. . In addition, compared to the line; vibration; 5 囫 polarizer can increase the light transmittance twice

tranSm1SS1〇n)。亦即,使用多域垂直配向圓 可同時提升光穿透率盘視角。 乃 &lt;,、、、員不益 [00118]儘官開關元件點反轉驅動機制可降低書 爍與串音現象’可是相較於開關元件列反轉驅動機制或開 關兀件行反轉驅動機制而言,採關關元件點反轉驅動機 制之顯示11會消耗衫的切換功率(switching pGwer),並且 =較高的驅動積體電路(Integrated Circuit,1C)成本與製&amp; 稷雜度。所以,為減少前述之缺點,本發明亦有提出可採 用開關70件彳T反轉驅動機制之晝素圖案(如前所述)以及採 用開關70件列反轉驅動機制之晝素圖案(將會於後說明)。 相較於開關元件行反轉驅動機制而言,採關關元件點反 轉驅動機制之顯示H可於較低電壓下驅動以消耗較少的切 換電源’並具有較低的驅動積體電路成本,不過會有較大 的畫面閃爍與串音現象。 [00119]圖13(a)為依據本發明另一實施例之一種擴展 (啊ad)畫素圖樣⑶〇。擴展畫素不同於前述之晝素便在於 擴展畫素之顏色質,Ιέ是向外擴展,以使得這些擴展畫素可 以彼此交錯(inierleaVe)。具體而言,® 13⑻之擴展畫素圖 63 200846750 樣1310具有三個顏色分量,而每 顏色質點。顏色質·點C!(即為ς ^刀置又,為四個 顏色質點,亦可稱為第一序一声顏色分量之第一個 二顏色分量之第-個顏色質點,亦)--(P為弟 點)、CD_3—1(即為第三顏色分為#序—顏色質 稱為第-序三顏色質點)構成書〗個顏色質點,亦可 點彼此至少間隔一個顏色質點的寬度,以: =素的=質點可以穿插至其令。顏色質點CD &quot;、 床Λ、:(亦可分別稱為第二序-顏色質點:第二 第:ί二二弟二序三顏色質點)構成晝素圖樣1310的 弟一列。如同弟一列之顏色質點,顏色質點cd&quot;、 H2-2、CD-3-2彼此至少亦間隔-個顏色質點的寬度。 3者,擴展晝素圖樣⑽之第二列偏移第 質點CD—2一2鄰接於顏色質點^&quot;^之^白^ 隙。擴展畫素圖樣删之第三㈣元縣置輯列向^ f是由元件裝置區域DCAj、DCA_2、DCA 3所構 求對稱排列,每個元件裝置區域的寬度等於兩個顏色質= 的寬度加上水平質點間距。不過本發明之某些實施例是應 用晝素圖樣1210的變形’而其元件|置區域之寬度便與顏 色質點的寬度相同(稍後會再詳述)。開關元件se」、se 2、' SE_3是分別位於元件裝置區域dcaj、Dca_2、3 顏色質點CD丄3、CD—2_3、CD_3—3亦可分別稱為第^序 二顏色質點、第三序二顏色質點、第三序三顏色質點)構成 旦素圖樣1310的第四列,而且彼此至少亦間隔一個顏色質 點的寬度。第四列是與第一列對齊以使得顏色質點cd i 3 64 200846750 是水平對齊於顏色質,點CD—U。顏色質.點CD—y、 又4 CD—3—4(亦可分別稱為第四序一顏色質點、第四 紅顏色質點、第四序三顏色質點)構成晝素圖樣⑶〇的 弟五列,而且彼此至少亦間隔_個顏色質點的寬声。第五 f = f列對齊以使得顏色質點CD丄4是鄰;於顏色 :占CDJ—3、CD_2_3之間的空隙。此外,開關元件兕】 疋耦接至顏色質點CD—丨—卜⑶―〗2、CD ! 3 cd 1 4(亡 =頁色質點亦可稱為序—顏色質點)之電極,而開—關元件 SE—2疋耦接至顏色質點cd_2j、n2、⑶」3、 CD又4(14些顏色質點亦可稱為序二顏色質點)之電極,且 開關元件SE一3是耦接至顏色質點CD」」、cD 3 2、 3 CD一3一4(這些顏色質點亦可稱為序三顏 之電極。 曰[00120]換句話說’擴展畫素圖樣131〇之第一顏色分 里具有四個顏色質點,其中顏色質點CD—】」、⑶】2構 j第一右左鋸齒圖案,而顏色質點CEL1 一3、cd厂斗―構成 右左鋸齒圖案’且第一右左鋸齒圖案、第二右左鋸齒 :木又可無為序-鑛齒圖案。此處之右左鑛齒圖案意為第 二個顏色質點(即顏色質,點CD—U、CD—i 4)是位在第一個 顏色質點(即顏色質,點CD—U、CDj—3)的左下方。第一右 左,ω圖案疋與第二右左鑛齒圖案水平對齊,但被元件裝 ,區域DCA_1垂直分離。類似地,擴展晝素圖樣⑶〇之 第二^色分量與第三顏色分量亦分別具有四個顏色質點, 其中k四個顏色質點構成兩個水平對齊之右左鑛齒圖案, 且這兩個右左鑛齒圖案是被元件裝置區域垂直分離,又這 65 200846750 些右左鋸齒圖案又可分別對應稱為序二鋸齒圖案以及序三 鋸齒圖案。在晝素圖樣1310中,這些顏色分量是垂直對 齊,並水平偏移至少一個顏色質點的寬度。 [00121] 晝素圖樣1310的這些顏色質點是分佈於西洋 棋盤圖案的同一顏色中。此種排列的主要優點便在於擴展 晝素圖樣1310的全部顏色質點的極性均為相同。圖13(a) 即為擴展畫素圖樣1310之正質點極性圖案,在正質點極性 圖案中,所有的顏色質點與開關元件均具有正極性。相反 地,在負質點極性圖案中,所有的顏色質點與開關元件均 具有負極性。將這些擴展晝素圖樣彼此交錯,即可使顯示 器之顏色質點的極性構成一個完整的西洋棋盤圖案,而此 將會於後詳述。 [00122] 應用圖13(a)之擴展晝素圖樣的顯示器可將這 畫素排列成不同的格式。舉例而言,本發明之某些實施例 是將擴展晝素以列向進行交錯,而部份實施例是將擴展晝 素以行向進行交錯,且其他實施例將擴展畫素同時以行向 以及列向進行交錯。圖13(b)繪示顯示器1320的局部,且 顯示器1320是將擴展晝素以列向進行交錯。具體而言,圖 13(b)之三個晝素P(0,0)、P(0,1)、P(0,2)是位於同行中,但 卻位於不同列中。為求清楚表示,不同畫素之顏色質點是 用不同陰影表示。在列向交錯中,每列之晝素會與相鄰兩 列之畫素部份重疊(除了顯示器的最上方與最下方的那一 列)。具體而言,某一列晝素之顏色質點會將相鄰列畫素之 顏色質點之間的空隙填滿。舉例而言,顯示器第一列之畫 素ρ(0,1)便與顯示器第零列之晝素p(0,0)重疊。詳細而言, 66 200846750 I素Γ4=)之1 色質點CD—1J是將畫素糊之顏色質點 -一、το件裝置區域DCAj之間的空隙填滿,而書 卿)之顏色質點CD力是將畫素之顏色質= CD_2—4與凡件裝置區域DCA—2之間的空隙填滿(此空隙亦 為晝素P(〇,1)之顏色質點CD丄3、CD_2_3之間的空隙),、 且畫素P(0,0)之顏色質點CD_3—】是將晝素之顏色質 點CD—3—4肖讀裝置區域DCA—3之間的空隙填滿⑽空 隙亦為畫素P((U)之顏色質點CD—2」、CD_3_3之間的空 隙)。此外,晝素P(〇,〇)之顏色質點CD义2是將晝素P(0 之顏色質點CD丄4、CD—2—4之間的空隙填滿,而書素 P_之顏色質點CD_3—2是將畫素_)之顏色質點 CD—2—4、CD一3_4之間的空隙填滿。畫素吵山之其他間 隙將會被畫素P(G,2)之顏色f點所填滿。詳細而言,晝素 P(0,2)之顏色質點 cd_2_3、CD_3_3、CD 2 4、CD 3 4 是 分別將晝素P(〇,l)之顏色質點CD—匕j、CD—2—】、顏色質 點CD—2」、CD—3一1、顏色質點CD丄2、CD—2一2、顏色 質點CD—2—2、CD_3_2之間的空隙填滿。再者,畫素p(〇,2) 之顏色f點H3是將畫素P((U)之顏色質點CD丄2、 CD一1一1鄰接的空隙填滿。類似地,晝素p(〇,丨)之顏色質點 是填滿於晝素P(〇,〇)、p(〇,2)中。 、[00123]目13(b)之實施例是以列向交替質點極性的方 ^而使整個顯示器的質點極性構成西洋棋盤圖案。具體而 言,偶數列的晝素是具有第—極性,而奇數列的晝素是具 有第二極性。如前所述,在連續的圖框下,這些晝素會切 換其質點極性。舉例而言,圖13(b)之第零列與第二列(即 67 200846750 偶數列)之晝素具有負質點極性,而第一列(即奇數列)之晝 素具有正質點極性。然而,當換到下一個圖框時,偶數列 的晝素是具有正質點極性,而奇數列的畫素是具有負質點 極性。由於同一列上的開關元件是具有相同的極性,所以 面13〇&gt;)之晝素7圖^是1 采用&quot;開ιί元 1牛列反轉驅ϋ幾 任一列上開關元件的極性是與相鄰列上開關元件的極性相 反。在圖13(b)中,畫素P(0,0)之開關元件具有負極性,而 晝素P(0,1)之開關元件具有正極性,且晝素P(0,2)之開關元 件具有負極性。 [00124] 如圖13(b)所示,在顯示器的邊緣處,擴展晝素 的部份間隙是沒有被填滿。有幾種不同的方法可用來解決 邊緣處間隙未填滿的情形。舉例而言,本發明之某些實施 例在顯示器的邊緣處僅設置半個晝素,亦即在此實施例 中,晝素P(0,0)便沒有配置顏色質點CD_1_3、CD_1_4、 CD—2—3、CD—2—4、CD_3—3、CD_3_4。在本發明之其他實 施例中,顯示器的邊緣處是被遮住的,而使得顯示器的可 視邊緣處將沒有這些間隙。在本發明另外的實施例中,顯 示器的邊緣處是被黑矩陣(black matrix)所遮住,且根本不 使用邊緣處的晝素。 [00125] 圖13(c)更進一步闡示列向交錯的意義,而圖 13(c)繪示顯示器1320的八個晝素,且此八個晝素是分佈在 四個列向以及兩個行向上。類似圖13(b)之前述說明,晝素 P(0,0)是與晝素P(0,1)交錯,而晝素P(〇,l)是與晝素P(〇,2) 交錯,且晝素P(0,2)是與晝素P(0,3)交錯。類似地,晝素 ρ(1,0)是與晝素p(l,l)交錯,而晝素P(U)是與畫素TP(1,2) 68 200846750 交錯,且晝素P(U)是與晝素P(1,3)交錯 =圖案’圖離晝素圖案亦採用開關元㈣反= ——[00126]圖n(d)繪示顯示器1340的尽初 漁—i—器 :晝素圖樣1310的變形’具體而言,圖13(d)之; 中的元件裝置區域的寬度與顏色質點的宽=旦素 向進行交錯。圖u⑷之三個晝素P_ =了 位Γ列中,但卻位於不同行中。附帶一提的是, 不為Ρ(-1,0)之填滿晝素的局部是與晝素 ^ 似,而填滿晝素是用來填滿榮幕邊緣處畫素的空= 的話’這些空隙便不會被填滿。在行向交錯中,每 jtranSm1SS1〇n). That is, the multi-domain vertical alignment circle can simultaneously increase the viewing angle of the light transmittance disk. It is &lt;,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, In terms of mechanism, the display 11 of the point-inversion driving mechanism of the off-point component consumes the switching power of the shirt (switching pGwer), and = the higher the integrated circuit (1C) cost and system &amp; . Therefore, in order to reduce the aforementioned shortcomings, the present invention also proposes a halogen pattern (as described above) which can adopt a switch 70 彳T inversion driving mechanism and a halogen pattern using a switch 70-column inversion driving mechanism (will Will be explained later). Compared with the row element inversion driving mechanism of the switching element, the display H of the point-inversion driving mechanism of the switching element can be driven at a lower voltage to consume less switching power supply' and has a lower driving integrated circuit cost. However, there will be a large picture flicker and crosstalk. Figure 13 (a) shows an extended (adad) pixel pattern (3) in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention. The extended pixels are different from the aforementioned ones in that they extend the color quality of the pixels, and the scale is expanded so that the extended pixels can be interlaced with each other (inierleaVe). Specifically, the extended pixel map of ® 13(8) 63 200846750 Sample 1310 has three color components, and each color dot. Color quality, point C! (that is, ς ^ knife set, for four color points, can also be called the first color component of the first two color components of the first color component, also) -- ( P is the younger point), CD_3 - 1 (that is, the third color is divided into #序--the color is called the first-order three-color dot), which constitutes a book color color point, and may also be spaced apart from each other by at least one color dot width. To: = prime = mass point can be interspersed to its order. The color dot CD &quot;, bed Λ,: (also known as the second order - color point: second: ί二二弟二序三色质点) constitutes a column of the 昼素 pattern 1310. Like the color point of the column, the color dots cd&quot;, H2-2, and CD-3-2 are at least spaced from each other by the width of one color dot. In the third case, the second column of the expanded tilde pattern (10) is offset by the first dot CD-2-2 adjacent to the color dot ^&quot;^^^^. The expanded pixel pattern is deleted. The third (four) yuan county set column direction ^ f is symmetrically arranged by the component device regions DCAj, DCA_2, DCA 3, and the width of each component device region is equal to the width of two color qualities = Upper horizontal particle spacing. However, some embodiments of the present invention apply the deformation of the alizarin pattern 1210 and the width of the component|position area is the same as the width of the color point (more details will be described later). The switching elements se", se 2, and SE_3 are located in the component device regions dcaj, Dca_2, and 3, respectively. The color dots CD丄3, CD-2_3, and CD_3-3 may also be referred to as the second color dot and the third sequence, respectively. The color dot, the third-order three-color dot) constitutes the fourth column of the denier pattern 1310, and is at least spaced apart from each other by the width of one color dot. The fourth column is aligned with the first column such that the color dot cd i 3 64 200846750 is horizontally aligned to the color quality, point CD_U. Color quality. Point CD-y, and 4 CD-3-4 (also known as fourth order one color point, fourth red color point, fourth order three color point) respectively constitute the elementary pattern (3) Columns, and at least the width of each other is also _ a color dot. The fifth f = f column is aligned such that the color dot CD 丄 4 is adjacent; in color: the gap between CDJ-3 and CD_2_3. In addition, the switching element 兕 疋 is coupled to the color dot CD-丨-Bu (3) ― 2, CD ! 3 cd 1 4 (death = page color point can also be called the order - color point) electrode, and on-off The element SE-2 is coupled to the electrodes of the color dots cd_2j, n2, (3)"3, CD and 4 (14 color dots may also be referred to as sequential color dots), and the switching elements SE-3 are coupled to the color dots. CD"", cD 3 2, 3 CD - 3 - 4 (These color points can also be called the electrodes of the order of the three faces. 曰 [00120] In other words, the 'extended pixel pattern 131 〇 the first color has four Color dot, where color dot CD—]”, (3)] 2 structure j first right left zigzag pattern, and color dot CEL1-3, cd factory bucket “constituting right left zigzag pattern” and first right left zigzag pattern, second right left sawtooth : Wood can be indefinitely - mineral tooth pattern. Here the right left mineral tooth pattern means that the second color particle (ie color quality, point CD-U, CD-i 4) is in the first color particle (ie The color quality, the lower left of the CD-U, CDj-3. The first right and left, the ω pattern 水平 is horizontally aligned with the second right-left ore pattern, but The component is mounted, and the area DCA_1 is vertically separated. Similarly, the second color component and the third color component of the extended pixel pattern (3) have four color dots, respectively, wherein k four color dots constitute two horizontally aligned right-left mines. The tooth pattern, and the two right-left orthodontic patterns are vertically separated by the component device region, and the 65 200846750 right-left zigzag patterns may be respectively referred to as a sequenced zigzag pattern and a sequential three-sawtooth pattern. In the alizarin pattern 1310, These color components are vertically aligned and horizontally offset by the width of at least one color dot. [00121] These color dots of the tilde pattern 1310 are distributed in the same color of the checkerboard pattern. The main advantage of this arrangement is that it expands 昼The polarity of all the color dots of the prime pattern 1310 is the same. Fig. 13(a) is the positive dot polarity pattern of the expanded pixel pattern 1310, and in the positive dot polarity pattern, all the color dots and the switching elements have positive polarity. Conversely, in the negative dot polarity pattern, all color dots and switching elements have a negative polarity. The patterns of the color dots of the display form a complete checkerboard pattern, which will be described in detail later. [00122] The display of the expanded element pattern of FIG. 13(a) can be used for this picture. The elements are arranged in different formats. For example, some embodiments of the present invention interleave the extended pixels in a column direction, and some embodiments interleave the extended pixels in a row direction, and other embodiments will The extended pixels are simultaneously interleaved in the row direction and the column direction. Figure 13 (b) shows a part of the display 1320, and the display 1320 is to interleave the extended pixels in a column direction. Specifically, Figure 13 (b) three The individual primes P(0,0), P(0,1), P(0,2) are located in the same class but in different columns. For clarity, the color points of different pixels are represented by different shades. In column-wise interleaving, the pixels of each column overlap with the pixels of the adjacent two columns (except for the top and bottom columns of the display). Specifically, the color point of a column of pixels fills the gap between the color points of adjacent column pixels. For example, the pixel ρ(0,1) in the first column of the display overlaps with the pixel p(0,0) in the zeroth column of the display. In detail, 66 200846750 I Γ 4 =) 1 chromatic dot CD-1J is to fill the gap between the color point of the photographic paste - one, the τ ο device area DCAj, and the color of the book The gap between the color quality of the pixel = CD_2-4 and the device area DCA-2 is filled (this gap is also the gap between the color points CD丄3 and CD_2_3 of the pixel P (〇, 1) ), and the pixel P_0,0 color dot CD_3—is filled with the gap between the color point CD-3—4 reading device area DCA—3, and the gap is also pixel P ((U) color dot CD-2", gap between CD_3_3). In addition, the color point CD 2 of the alizarin P (〇, 〇) is filled with the void between the color point CD丄4 and CD-2-4 of the alizarin P, and the color point of the pixel P_ CD_3-2 fills the gap between the color dots CD-2-4 and CD-3_4 of the pixel_). The other gaps in the picture of the noisy mountain will be filled by the color f of the pixel P (G, 2). In detail, the color points cd_2_3, CD_3_3, CD 2 4, and CD 3 4 of the alizarin P (0, 2) are the color points CD-匕j, CD-2 of the alizarin P (〇, l), respectively. The gap between the color dot CD-2, the CD-3, the color dot CD丄2, the CD-2-2, the color dot CD-2-2, and the CD_3_2 is filled. Furthermore, the color f point H3 of the pixel p(〇, 2) is filled with a space adjacent to the pixel P ((U), the color dot CD 丄 2, and the CD 1-1. Similarly, the pixel p (颜色, 丨) The color point is filled in the alizarin P (〇, 〇), p (〇, 2). [00123] The embodiment of item 13 (b) is the direction of the alternating particle polarity in the column ^ The polarity of the particle of the entire display constitutes a checkerboard pattern. Specifically, the even-numbered columns have the first polarity, and the odd-numbered columns have the second polarity. As mentioned above, under the continuous frame These elements switch their particle polarity. For example, the pixels in the zeroth column and the second column (ie, 67 200846750 even columns) in Figure 13(b) have a negative particle polarity, while the first column (the odd column) The element has a positive particle polarity. However, when switching to the next frame, the even columns of the pixels have positive dot polarity, while the odd columns of pixels have negative particle polarity. Due to the switching elements on the same column Is the same polarity, so the surface of the 13〇> 昼 7 7 图 是 是 是 是 是 是 是 是 是 是 是 是 是 是 是 是 是 是 是 是 采用 采用 采用 采用 采用 采用 采用 采用 开 开The polarity is opposite to the polarity of the switching elements on adjacent columns. In Fig. 13(b), the switching element of the pixel P(0,0) has a negative polarity, and the switching element of the halogen P(0,1) has a positive polarity, and the switching of the halogen P(0,2) The component has a negative polarity. [00124] As shown in FIG. 13(b), at the edge of the display, a part of the gap of the expanded pixel is not filled. There are several different ways to resolve situations where the gap at the edge is not filled. For example, some embodiments of the present invention provide only half a pixel at the edge of the display, that is, in this embodiment, the pixel P(0, 0) is not configured with color dots CD_1_3, CD_1_4, CD- 2-3, CD-2-4, CD_3-3, CD_3_4. In other embodiments of the invention, the edges of the display are obscured such that there will be no such gaps at the visible edges of the display. In a further embodiment of the invention, the edge of the display is obscured by a black matrix and the pixels at the edges are not used at all. [00125] FIG. 13(c) further illustrates the meaning of columnwise interleaving, and FIG. 13(c) shows eight elements of the display 1320, and the eight elements are distributed in four columns and two Line up. Similar to the foregoing description of Fig. 13(b), the alizarin P(0,0) is interlaced with the alizarin P(0,1), and the alizarin P(〇,l) is interdigitated with the alizarin P(〇,2). And the halogen P(0,2) is interlaced with the halogen P(0,3). Similarly, alizarin ρ(1,0) is interlaced with alizarin p(l,l), while alizarin P(U) is interlaced with pixel TP(1,2) 68 200846750, and alizarin P(U) ) is interlaced with alizarin P (1,3) = pattern 'Figures away from the alizarin pattern also uses switching elements (four) reverse = - [00126] Figure n (d) shows the beginning of the display 1340 - i - device: The deformation of the alizarin pattern 1310 is, in particular, the width of the element device region in Fig. 13(d); and the width of the color dot = staggered. The three elements in Figure u(4) are P_ = in the order column, but in different rows. Incidentally, the part that is not filled with 昼(-1,0) is similar to 昼素^, and the filled 昼素 is used to fill the space of the pixel at the edge of the glory. These gaps will not be filled. In the interlacing, every j

” f目鄰兩行,畫素部份重疊(除了顯示器的最右方; 取工的那一行疋利用填滿畫素填滿)。具體而言,某一 畫素之顏色質點會將相鄰行畫素之顏色質點之間的I 言,顯,一行之畫素養與顯示器第 7仃旦9素p(0,0)重豐。詳細而言,畫素P(0,0)之顏色質點 CD—3—1是將畫素p(] 〇)之顏色質點CD 2—卜j之 的空隙填滿,而晝素1W))之顏色質點CD一3—2是將晝素 P(M)之顏色質點CD—2—2、CD—l2之間的空隙填滿,且 畫素P(0,0)之顏色質點CD—3一3是將畫素ρ(ί,〇)之顏色質點 2一3、CDJ—3之間的空隙填滿,又畫素ρ(〇,〇)之顏色 貝點CD-3-4是將畫素Ρ(Ι,〇)之顏色質點CD—2—4、CDj〜4 ,間的空隙填滿。此外,畫素P(〇,〇)之顏色質點CD_2j 疋將晝素PQ,0)之顏色質點CD—2—1、CD—1一1鄰接的空隙 69 200846750 填滿,而晝素P(0,0)之顏色質點CD—2—3是將晝素p(1,0) 之顏色質點CD—1 一4與元件裝置區域DCA一1之間的空隙填 滿。晝素P(1,0)的其他空隙是由晝素P(2,〇)的顏色質點所填 ——滿—羊細而,畫素P(2,0)之顏色質點CD一U是將晝素 之]頁色—質―點—CD:2j:C—D:3—J—之『的空 素P(2,0)之顏色質點CD一 1一2是將晝素P(l,0)之顏色質點 CD—2—2 CD—3—2之間的空隙填滿,且晝素p(2,Q)之顏色 質點CD—1—3是將晝素P(1,0)之顏色質點CD_2_J3、CD 3 3 之間的空隙填滿,晝素p(2,〇)之顏色質點CD一丨一4是將晝素 P(l,〇)之顏色質點CD一2—4、cd—3—4之間的空—隙填滿:此 外,晝素P(2,0)之顏色質點CD一2一4是將畫素p(1,〇)之顏色 質點CD—3一3、CD—3—4之間的空隙填滿。類似地,畫素p( i,〇) 之顏色質點亦是填滿於畫素p(〇,〇)、p(2,〇)中。 [〇〇m]圖l3(d)之實施例是以行向交替質點極性的方 f而使整個顯示器的質點極性構成西洋棋盤圖案。具體而 言丄偶數行的晝素是具有第一極性,而奇數行的晝素是且 有第二極性。如前所述,在連續的圖框下,這些畫素會ς =質點極性。舉例而言,目剛之第零行與第二行曰(即 本丈仃)之畫素具有負質點極性,而第一行柳奇數行)之晝 素具有正質點極性。鈇而,者換丨 , 旦 =素疋具有正質點極性,而奇數行的晝素是具有負質點 埴滿1ΠΓ]有幾種不_方法可絲解決邊緣處間隙未 么=7例而言,本發明之某些實施例是以使用殖 的方式而填滿圖13⑷之顯示器邊緣處之空隙。在其 200846750 他實施例中,不完整的畫素可用於顯示器的邊緣處。舉例 而言,晝素P(0,0)便沒有配置顏色質點CD_1_1、CD_1_2、 CD_1—3、CD—1—4與元件裝置區域DCA—1。在本發明之其 他實施例中,顯示器的邊緣處是被遮住的,而使得顯示器 ϋϋ緣4將沒有這些間^家。 [00129] 圖13(e)更進一步闡示行向交錯的意義,而圖 13(e)繪示顯示器1340的八個畫素,且此八個畫素是分佈在 四個行向以及兩個列向上。類似圖13(d)之前述說明,晝素 ρ(0,0)是與晝素ρ(1,0)交錯,而晝素ρ(1,0)是與晝素ρ(2,0) 交錯,且晝素Ρ(2,0)是與晝素Ρ(3,0)交錯。類似地,畫素 ρ(0,1)是與畫素P(u)交錯,而晝素P(u)是與畫素ρ(2,1) 交錯,且晝素P(2,l)是與晝素P(3,l)交錯。 [00130] 圖13(f)繪示顯示器1370的局部,且顯示器 1370是將擴展晝素以水平畫素配對(pair)進行交錯。類似圖 13(d),圖13(f)之擴展畫素是晝素圖樣1310的變形,且其 元件裝置區域的寬度與顏色質點的寬度相同。圖13(f)之四 個晝素P(0,0)、P(l,〇)、P(2,0)、P(3,0)是位於同一列中,但 卻位於不同行中。在水平畫素配對交錯中,兩個水平相鄰 的晝素是彼此交錯,以使得任一晝素對應之顏色質點可填 滿另一晝素之空隙。如圖13(f)所示,晝素P(0,0)、P(1,0) 構成一組水平晝素配對。晝素對應的顏色質點(如晝素p(0,0) 的顏色質點CD_1_1)是水平鄰接於另一畫素對應的顏色質 點(如晝素P(l,〇)的顏色質點CD_1_1,且畫素P(0,0)的顏色 質點CD_1_1是位於晝素P(1,0)的顏色質點CD_1_1的左 邊)。類似地,畫素?(2,0)、?(3,0)構成另一組水平晝素配對。 71 200846750 [00131]為使質點極性構成西洋棋盤圖案,在晝素配對 中的兩個晝素要分別具有不同的極性。具體而言,每組晝 素配對之第一個畫素具有第一極性,而每組晝素配對之第 一個晝素具有第二極性。如前所述,在連續的圖框下,這 些晝素會ϋ其—質點極十生:如—圖—η—⑴所示-圣-素配對 ,第一個晝素(即晝素?(〇,〇)、|&gt;(2,〇))具有負質點極性,而 每組晝素配對之第二個晝素(即畫素P(1,〇)、p(3,〇))具有正 ^點極性。然而,當換到下一個圖框時,每組畫素配對之 第個晝素即具有正質點極性,而每组晝素配對之第二個 晝素便具有正質點極性。 、[〇〇/32]如前所述,不同形式之擴展畫素圖樣可組合成 為個頒不晝面。圖14(a)繪示另一種擴展晝素圖樣141〇, 而畫素圖樣M10可單獨運用或是搭配圖u⑷之擴展晝素 圖樣。圖M(a)之擴展晝素圖樣W0具有三個顏色分量, 二母個顏色分量又分割為四個顏色質點。顏色質點 ι(即為第一顏色分量之第一個顏色質點)、 cdV2即為第二顏色分量之第一個顏色質點)、 樣第三顏色分量之第—個顏色質點)構成晝素圖 色質點的^列。不過這些顏色質點彼此至少間隔一個顏 :貝,見度’以使其他晝素的顏色 中。顏色質點CD12、 牙個芏,、 141〇 λα ^ — — CD一2一2、CD—3一2 構成晝素圖樣 列。如同第-列之顏色質點,顏色質點 的寬度。再者2展皮此至少亦間隔一個顏色質點 使得顏色質Ϊ = 樣141G之第二列偏移第一列以 貝&quot;、、占CD—1—2鄰接於顏色質點cDjj、cD 2工 72 200846750 =的空隙。擴展畫素圖樣!之第三列為元件裝置區域 ,。,並且是由兀件裝置區域〇CA_l、DCA_2、DCA 3 所構成,其中每個元件裝置區域的寬度等個 點 -的寬度加上水平質點間距。開關元件SE !、SE 2 SE 3 是f別位於元件裝置區域—DCA:f: Dc A:T: Dca: 3-件裝置區域列向的左側邊是對齊於第 質點 CD 1 3、CD 2 3、h装上、&gt; * —— 一 一3 CD—3一3構成畫素圖樣141〇的第 四列,而且彼此至少亦間隔—個顏色質點的寬度。第三列 是與第-關齊以使得顏色質點是CD—丨」水平對齊於顏 色質點CD」J。顏色質點CD丄4、CD—2_4、CD—3—4構 j晝素圖樣1310的第四列’而且彼此至少亦間隔一個顏色 質點的寬度。第四列是與第二晴齊以使得顏色質點是 CD—1—4水平對齊於顏色質點CD—〗」。此外,開關元件 SE」是耦接至顏色質點CD—l—1、CDj—2、CD—丨―3、 CD—1 一4之電極,而開關元件犯_2是搞接至顏色質點 CD—2—1、CD-2-2、CD—2—3、CD—2—4 之電極,且開關元件 SE—3是耦接至顏色質點cd__3、CD_3 2、CD 3 3、 CD__3—4 之電極。 —— [⑽133]換句話說,擴展畫素圖樣141〇之第一顏色分 置具有四個顏色質點,其中顏色質點CD」」、CD一〗一2構 成第一左右鑛齒圖案,而顏色質點CDj_3、CD 一〗一4構成 第二左右鋸齒圖案,且此處之左右鋸齒圖案意為第二個顏 色i點(即顏色質點CD一 1 一2、CD一 1 一4)是位在第一個顏色質 點(即顏色質點CD一1一1、CD—1 一3)的右下方。第一左右鋸齒 圖案是與第二左右鋸齒圖案水平對齊,但被元件裝置區域 73 200846750 DCA_1垂直分離。類似地,擴展畫素圖樣1410之第二顏 色分量與第三顏色分量亦分別具有四個顏色質點,其中這 四個顏色質點構成兩個水平對齊之左右鋸齒圖案,且這兩 個左右鋸齒圖案是被元件裝置區域垂直分離。在畫素圖樣 1310中,這些顏色分量是垂直對背,並水平偏移至少一個 顏色質點的寬度。 [00134] 畫素圖樣1410的這些顏色質點是分佈於西洋 棋盤圖案的同一顏色中。此種排列的主要優點便在於擴展 晝素圖樣1410的全部顏色質點的極性均為相同。圖14(a) 即為擴展晝素圖樣1410之正質點極性圖案,在正質點極性 圖案中,所有的顏色質點與開關元件均具有正極性。相反 地,在負質點極性圖案中,所有的顏色質點與開關元件均 具有負極性。 [00135] 圖14(b)繪示顯示器1400的局部,且顯示器 1400是將兩個不同形式的擴展晝素以列向進行交錯。具體 而言,圖14(b)之三個晝素?(0,0)、?(0,1)、卩(0,2)是位於同 一行中,但卻位於不同列中。畫素P(0,0)、P(0,2)是應用圖 13(a)之晝素圖樣1310,而晝素P(0,1)是應用圖14(a)之畫素 圖樣1410。以圖14(b)之顯示器而言,位於奇數列上的畫 素是應用圖13(a)之晝素圖樣1310,而位於偶數列上的晝素 是應用圖14(a)之畫素圖樣1410。以畫素圖樣1310、1410 之列向交錯中,每列之晝素會與相鄰兩列之晝素部份重疊 (除了顯示器的最上方與最下方的那一列)。具體而言,某 一列晝素之顏色質點會將相鄰列晝素之顏色質點之間的空 隙填滿。舉例而言,顯示器第一列之晝素P(0,1)便與顯示 74 200846750 器第零列之晝素p(0,0)重疊。詳細而言,晝素P(〇,〇)之顏色 質點CD—U是將畫素P(0,1)之顏色質點CD_L3、CD_2 3 之間的空隙填滿,而晝素P(0,0)之顏色質點CD〜2一1是將晝 素P((U)之顏色質點CD—2_3、CD一3一3之間的空隙填滿, 且晝素^(0,0)之顏色—質點ΐ—D_—3=1—冬畫—— 素P(〇j—)之—顏—色γ 點CD—3—3、CD—3—4鄰接的空隙填滿。此外,畫素P(〇,〇) 之J員色質點CD一 1—2是將晝素P(〇,l)之顏色質點CDJ 3、 CD -丨-4鄰撵的空隙填滿,而畫素P(〇,〇)之顏色質點CD 2 2 是將畫素P(0,1)之顏色質點CD一 1—4、CD一2一4之間的空隙 填滿’且畫素P(〇,〇)之顏色質點CD一3J2是將畫素ppj) 之顏色質點CD一2一4、CD—3一4之間的空隙填滿。晝素以^) 之其他間隙將會被畫素P(〇,2)之顏色質點所填滿。詳細而 言’晝素 P(0,2)之顏色質點 CD—1—3、CD__2_3、CD_2&lt;4、 CD—3—4是分別將晝素!&gt;(〇,!)之顏色質點cDj j、 CD一2一1、顏色質點CD_2—i、CD—3—!、顏色質點CD—匕2、 CD—2—2、顏色質點CD_2__2、CD—3—2之間的空隙填滿。再 者’畫素P(0,2)之顏色質點CD一3一3是將畫素ρ(〇,ι)之顏色 貝點CD—3—1、CD一3一2鄰接的空隙填滿,而畫素p(〇,2)之 顏色質點CD一 1 一4是將晝素P(〇,l)之顏色質點cD_lj、 CD一 1—2鄰接的空隙填滿。類似地,晝素之顏色質點 是填滿於晝素Ρ(〇,〇)、ρ(0,2)中。 [00136]圖14(b)之實施例是以列向交替質點極性的方 式而使整個顯示器的質點極性構成西洋棋盤圖案。具體而 θ,偶數列的晝素是具有第一極性,而奇數列的晝素是耳 有第二極性。如前所述,在連續的圖框下,這些晝素會切 75 200846750 換其質點極性。舉例而言,圖14(b)之第零列與第二列(即 偶數列)之畫素具有負質點極性,而第—列(即奇數列)之晝 素^有正質點極性。然而,當換到下-_框時,偶數列 ::、。』與w述相-同的概念ϋ-此7員技ϋ臺—可,用—— '、月曰所教導的方式,或是其他畫素圖樣的各種交錯機 制所組成的晝素圖案。 ]圖15為依據本發明另一實施例之一種擴展晝 素圖樣。圖15之擴展畫素圖樣151G具有三個顏色分量’ =每個顏色分量又分割為六個顏色質點。顏色質點 —1(即為第一顏色分量之第一個顏色質點)、 八―2_1(即為严二顏色分量之第一個顏色質點卜 样ϋ(即為第三顏色分量之第—個顏色質點)構成晝素圖 一列。不過這些顏色質點彼此至少間隔-個顏 貝點的覓度,以使其他晝素的顏色質點可以穿插至1 、弟一列。如同第一列之顏色質點,顏色質點 Γ:1;2、CD—2-2、CD-3-2彼此至少亦間隔-個顏色質點 、=又。再者’擴展晝素圖樣i之第二列偏移第一列以 使侍顏色質點CD—2—2鄰接於顏色質點CDJJ、CD 2 i :間的空隙。顏色質點CDJ、CD_2」、CV—3—3構成晝 沾15:Λ的第三列’而且彼此至少亦間隔-個顏色質點 、見又。第二列是與第—列對齊以使得顏色質點⑶―&quot; 是鄰接於顏色質點CD」』、CD—2_2之_空隙。顏色質 點CD丄4、CD—2_4、CD—3—4構成晝素圖樣i 5! 〇的第四 76 200846750 列,而且彼此至少亦間隔一個顏色質點的寬度。第四列是 與第二列對齊以使得顏色質點CD又4是鄰接於顏色^ CD—1—3、CD—2—3之間的空隙。顏色質點CEu—5、CD 2 5、 CD—3二5—構成畫素圖樣1510的第五列’而且彼此至少亦間 隔-個顏色質點的寬度。第五列是-與第一:列對-齊以使得-顏-色貝點CD—1—5是鄰接於顏色質點CD一1 4、CD 2 4之門 的空隙。顏色質點CD丄6、CD_2—6、⑶人6構成畫素圖 樣1510的第六列,而且彼此至少亦間隔一個顏色質點的寬 度。第六列是與第四列對齊以使得顏色質點CD—2_6是鄰 接於顏色質點CD_1_5、CD_2—5之間的空隙。晝素圖—樣151〇 更包括元件裝置區域DCA_1、DCA—2、DCA一3,而元件裝 置區域DCAJ、DCA_2、DCA_3構成之元件裝置區域列向 即為晝素圖樣1510的第七列,其中每個元件裝置區域的寬 度等於兩個顏色質點的寬度加上水平質點間距。元件裝置 區域列向(即第七列)是水平對齊於第二列、第四列以^第 六列。此外’開關元件SEj、SE—2、se_3是分別位於 件裝置區域DCAJ、DCA_2、DCA 一3。開關元件SE—!是 耦接至顏色質點CDj j、CD12、cd_13、CD丨―4、 CD—1—5、CD—1—6之電極,而開關元件SE—2是耦接至顏色 質點 CD—2—1、CD—2 2、CD—2_3、CD—2—4、CD—2—5、cd—2_6 之電極,且開關元件SE_3是耦接至顏色質點cd_3_1、 CD—3—2、CD—3—3、CD 3 4、CD 3 5、CD—3—6 之電極。 曰[00138]換句話說,擴展晝素圖樣151〇之第一顏色分 量之六個顏色質點CD—1 —l、CDj—2、CD_1」、CI) 1 4、 -5 〜1〜6構成右左右左右左鑛齒圖案,而此處之 77 200846750 右左右左右左雜齒圖案意為第二個顏色質點(即顏色質點 CD一 1一2)是位在第一個顏色質點(即顏色質點cd—丨一丨)的左” f eye two lines, the pixels overlap partially (except for the far right side of the display; the line of work is filled with filled pixels). Specifically, the color of a pixel will be adjacent The color between the color points of the line of pixels, the display, the line of painting literacy and the display of the 7th 9 9 9 p (0,0) heavy. In detail, the pixel P (0,0) color point CD—3-1 is filled with the void of the color dot CD 2—b of the pixel p(] 〇), and the color dot CD-3 of the halogen 1W)) is the halogen P(M) The color dot CD-2-2, the gap between CD-1 is filled, and the color point of the pixel P(0,0) CD-3-3 is the color point 2 of the pixel ρ(ί,〇) A 3, the gap between the CDJ-3 is filled, and the color of the prime ρ (〇, 〇) is the point of the CD-3-4 is the color of the pixel Ι (Ι, 〇) CD 2-4, CDj~4, the gap between the gaps is filled. In addition, the color point of the pixel P (〇, 〇) CD_2j 疋 will be the pixel PQ, 0) the color dot CD 2-1, CD-1 1-1 adjacent gap 69 200846750 fills up, and the color point CD-2-3 of the alizarin P(0,0) is the color point CD-1 of the alizarin p(1,0) The gap between the device area DCA-1 is filled. The other voids of the alizarin P (1,0) are filled by the color point of the alizarin P (2,〇) - full - sheep thin, pixel P ( 2,0) The color dot CD-U is the color point CD of the color P (2,0) of the page color - quality - point - CD: 2j: C - D: 3 - J - One to one is to fill the gap between the color point CD-2-2 CD-3-2 of the alizarin P(l,0), and the color point CD-1 of the alizarin p(2,Q) 3 is to fill the gap between the color points CD_2_J3 and CD 3 3 of the alizarin P (1, 0), and the color point CD of the alizarin p (2, 〇) is a 昼P (l, 〇) The color space between the CDs 2-4, cd-3-4 is filled: In addition, the color of the pixel P(2,0) CD 2-4 is the pixel p(1) , 〇) The color dot CD-3-3, CD-3-4 fills the gap. Similarly, the pixel p (i, 〇) color particle is also filled with pixels p (〇, 〇 In the case of p(2, 〇). [〇〇m] The embodiment of Fig. 13 (d) is such that the polarity of the dot of the entire display constitutes a checkerboard pattern in the direction of alternating polarity of the dot. Specifically, even The quality of the line is There is a first polarity, and the odd-numbered rows have a second polarity. As mentioned above, under a continuous frame, these pixels will be ς = particle polarity. For example, the zeroth line and the first The pixels of the second line (ie, the scorpion) have a negative polarity, while the first line of the squad has a positive polarity. In the case of a sputum, the sputum has a positive polarity. The odd-numbered rows of morphemes have a negative mass of 1 ΠΓ] There are several ways to solve the gap at the edge. For example, some embodiments of the present invention fill the map with the use of colonization. 13(4) The gap at the edge of the display. In his embodiment of 200846750, incomplete pixels can be used at the edges of the display. For example, the pixel P(0,0) is not configured with color dots CD_1_1, CD_1_2, CD_1-3, CD-1-4, and component device area DCA-1. In other embodiments of the invention, the edges of the display are obscured such that the display flange 4 will not have these compartments. [00129] FIG. 13(e) further illustrates the meaning of the interlaced direction, and FIG. 13(e) shows the eight pixels of the display 1340, and the eight pixels are distributed in four directions and two Column up. Similar to the foregoing description of Fig. 13(d), the pixel ρ(0,0) is interlaced with the 昼ρ(1,0), and the ρρ(1,0) is interlaced with the ρρ(2,0). And 昼素Ρ(2,0) is interlaced with 昼素Ρ(3,0). Similarly, the pixel ρ(0,1) is interlaced with the pixel P(u), and the pixel P(u) is interlaced with the pixel ρ(2,1), and the pixel P(2,l) is Interlaced with alizarin P (3, l). [00130] FIG. 13(f) illustrates a portion of display 1370, and display 1370 interleaves the expanded pixels in a horizontal pixel pair. Similar to Fig. 13(d), the expanded pixel of Fig. 13(f) is a variant of the alizarin pattern 1310, and the width of the element device region is the same as the width of the color dot. The four elements P(0,0), P(l,〇), P(2,0), and P(3,0) of Fig. 13(f) are in the same column but in different rows. In the horizontal pixel pairing interlace, two horizontally adjacent pixels are interlaced so that the color point corresponding to any element can fill the gap of the other element. As shown in Fig. 13(f), the alizarins P(0,0) and P(1,0) constitute a set of horizontal elementary pairings. The color point corresponding to the pixel (such as the color point CD_1_1 of the pixel p(0,0)) is horizontally adjacent to the color point of the other pixel (such as the color point CD_1_1 of the pixel P (l, 〇), and the drawing The color dot CD_1_1 of the prime P(0,0) is located to the left of the color dot CD_1_1 of the pixel P(1,0). Similarly, pixels? (2,0),? (3,0) constitutes another set of horizontal elementary pairings. 71 200846750 [00131] In order to make the particle polarity constitute a checkerboard pattern, the two elements in the pixel pairing have different polarities. Specifically, the first pixel of each set of element pairs has a first polarity, and the first element of each set of elementary pairs has a second polarity. As mentioned above, under the continuous frame, these elements will be —---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 〇,〇),|&gt;(2,〇)) has a negative particle polarity, and the second element (ie, P (1, 〇), p (3, 〇)) of each group of 昼 配对 has Positive ^ point polarity. However, when switching to the next frame, the first element of each set of pixel pairs has a positive particle polarity, and the second element of each set of elementary elements has a positive dot polarity. [〇〇/32] As mentioned above, different forms of extended pixel patterns can be combined into one. Fig. 14(a) shows another extended tilapia pattern 141〇, and the pixel pattern M10 can be used alone or in combination with the extended morphological pattern of Fig. u(4). The extended element pattern W0 of the graph M(a) has three color components, and the two mother color components are further divided into four color dots. The color dot ι (that is, the first color dot of the first color component), cdV2 is the first color dot of the second color component, and the first color particle of the third color component constitutes the enamel color The column of the mass point. However, these color dots are at least one color apart from each other: see the degree 'in order to make the other colors in the color. The color dot CD12, the tooth 芏, 141〇 λα ^ — — CD 1-2, CD-3 2-3 constitute a morpheme pattern column. Like the color point of the first column, the width of the color dot. In addition, 2 skins are at least separated by a color point so that the color quality is Ϊ = the second column of the sample 141G is offset by the first column, and the CD-1 is adjacent to the color point cDjj, cD 2 72 200846750 = gap. Expand the pixel pattern! The third column is the component device area. And is composed of the device area 〇CA_1, DCA_2, DCA 3, wherein the width of each element device area is equal to the width of the point - plus the horizontal dot pitch. The switching elements SE !, SE 2 SE 3 are located in the component device area - DCA:f: Dc A:T: Dca: The left side of the 3-piece device area is aligned with the first dot CD 1 3, CD 2 3 , h loaded, &gt; * - 1 - 3 CD - 3 - 3 constitutes the fourth column of the pixel pattern 141, and at least spaced from each other - the width of a color dot. The third column is aligned with the first-level so that the color dot is CD-丨 horizontally aligned with the color dot CD"J. The color dots CD丄4, CD-2_4, CD-3-4 constitute the fourth column ' of the ten-dimensional pattern 1310' and are at least spaced apart from each other by the width of one color dot. The fourth column is aligned with the second to make the color dot CD-1-4 horizontally aligned with the color dot CD-〗. In addition, the switching element SE" is coupled to the electrodes of the color dot CD-1, CDj-2, CD-丨-3, CD-1-4, and the switching component commits _2 to the color dot CD- 2-1, CD-2-2, CD-2-3, CD-2-4 electrodes, and switching element SE-3 is coupled to the electrodes of color dots cd__3, CD_3 2, CD 3 3, CD__3-4 . —— [(10)133] In other words, the first color division of the extended pixel pattern 141〇 has four color points, wherein the color dot CD””, CD-1”2 constitutes the first left and right mineral tooth pattern, and the color dot CDj_3, CD 〗 1-4 constitute a second left and right sawtooth pattern, and the left and right sawtooth patterns here mean that the second color i point (ie, color dot CD 1-1, CD 1-4) is in the first place The lower right side of the color point (ie, the color dot CD 1-1, CD-1 1-3). The first left and right sawtooth patterns are horizontally aligned with the second left and right sawtooth patterns, but are vertically separated by the component device region 73 200846750 DCA_1. Similarly, the second color component and the third color component of the extended pixel pattern 1410 also have four color dots respectively, wherein the four color dots constitute two horizontally aligned left and right zigzag patterns, and the two left and right sawtooth patterns are It is vertically separated by the component device area. In the pixel design 1310, these color components are vertically opposite and horizontally offset by the width of at least one color dot. [00134] These color dots of the pixel pattern 1410 are distributed in the same color of the western checkerboard pattern. The main advantage of this arrangement is that the polarities of all color points of the extended alizarin pattern 1410 are the same. Fig. 14(a) shows the positive dot polarity pattern of the expanded halogen pattern 1410. In the positive dot polarity pattern, all the color dots and the switching elements have positive polarity. Conversely, in the negative dot polarity pattern, all of the color dots and the switching elements have a negative polarity. [00135] FIG. 14(b) illustrates a portion of display 1400, and display 1400 is a staggered arrangement of two different forms of expanded pixels. Specifically, the three elements of Figure 14(b)? (0,0),? (0,1), 卩(0,2) are in the same row, but in different columns. The pixels P(0,0) and P(0,2) are the tilde pattern 1310 to which Fig. 13(a) is applied, and the morpheme P(0,1) is the tilogram pattern 1410 to which Fig. 14(a) is applied. In the display of Fig. 14(b), the pixel on the odd column is the pixel pattern 1310 of Fig. 13(a), and the pixel on the even column is the pixel pattern of Fig. 14(a). 1410. In the interlacing of the pixel patterns 1310, 1410, the pixels of each column overlap with the pixels of the adjacent two columns (except for the top and bottom columns of the display). Specifically, the color point of a column of pixels fills the gap between the color points of adjacent columns of pixels. For example, the pixel P(0,1) in the first column of the display overlaps with the pixel p(0,0) in the zeroth column of the display 74 200846750. In detail, the color point CD-U of the pixel P (〇, 〇) fills the gap between the color dots CD_L3 and CD_2 3 of the pixel P (0, 1), and the pixel P (0, 0) The color dot CD~2-1 is filled with the gap between the color point CD-2_3 and the CD-3-3 of the alizarin P ((U)), and the color of the element ^(0,0) ΐ—D_—3=1—Winter painting—the gap between the primed P(〇j—)—the color—the color γ point CD—3—3, and the CD—3—4 is filled. In addition, the pixel P (〇 , 〇) J member color point CD 1-2 is filled with the voids of the color point CDJ 3, CD - 丨-4 neighbors of the 昼 P (〇, l), and the pixel P (〇, 〇) The color dot CD 2 2 fills the gap between the color dots CD 1-4 of the pixel P (0, 1) and the CD 2-4, and the color dot CD of the pixel P (〇, 〇) A 3J2 fills the gap between the color points CD 2-4 and CD-3 of the pixel ppj). The other gaps in the pixel will be filled by the color points of the pixels P(〇, 2). In detail, the color points of the prime P (0, 2) CD-1 - 3, CD__2_3, CD_2 &lt; 4, CD - 3 - 4 are the different elements! &gt;(〇,!) color dot cDj j, CD 2-1, color dot CD_2-i, CD-3-!, color dot CD-匕2, CD-2-2, color dot CD_2__2, CD- The gap between 3 and 2 is filled. Furthermore, the color dot CD 3-1 of the pixel P (0, 2) fills the gap adjacent to the color of the pixel ρ (〇, ι), CD-3, 1, CD-3. The color point CD 1-4 of the pixel p (〇, 2) fills the gap adjacent to the color point cD_lj and CD 1-2 of the pixel P (〇, l). Similarly, the color point of alizarin is filled in 昼素Ρ(〇,〇), ρ(0,2). [00136] The embodiment of Figure 14(b) is such that the polarity of the dot of the entire display constitutes a checkerboard pattern in a manner that alternates the polarity of the dots. Specifically, θ, the even-numbered columns have the first polarity, and the odd-numbered columns have the second polarity. As mentioned earlier, under the continuous frame, these elements will cut 75 200846750 for their particle polarity. For example, the pixels of the zeroth column and the second column (i.e., even columns) of Fig. 14(b) have a negative particle polarity, and the first column (i.e., the odd column) has a positive dot polarity. However, when switching to the lower -_ box, the even column ::,. The concept of "the same as the w--the seven-member technical platform--can be used, - the method taught by the Moon, or the various staggered mechanisms of other pixel patterns. Figure 15 is a diagram showing an extended bismuth pattern according to another embodiment of the present invention. The expanded pixel pattern 151G of Fig. 15 has three color components ' = each color component is further divided into six color dots. Color particle - 1 (that is, the first color point of the first color component), eight - 2_1 (that is, the first color point of the second color component) (that is, the first color of the third color component) The particle point constitutes a column of the elementary map. However, these color points are at least spaced apart from each other by a point of curvature so that the color points of other elements can be interspersed to one column and one column. Like the color point of the first column, the color point Γ:1; 2, CD-2-2, CD-3-2 are at least spaced from each other - a color dot, = again. Further, the second column of the expanded tiling pattern i is offset from the first column to make the color The dot CD—2—2 is adjacent to the gap between the color dots CDJJ and CD 2 i : the color dots CDJ, CD_2”, and CV—3—3 constitute the third column of the 1515:Λ and are at least spaced apart from each other. The color of the color, see again. The second column is aligned with the first column so that the color dot (3) - " is adjacent to the color dot CD", CD - 2_2 _ gap. Color dot CD 丄 4, CD - 2_4, CD -3 - 4 constitutes the fourth element of the alizarin pattern i 5! 2008 2008 76, 467, and at least one color point apart from each other The fourth column is aligned with the second column such that the color dot CD 4 is adjacent to the gap between the color ^ CD-1 - 3 and CD - 2 - 3. Color dot CEu-5, CD 2 5, CD - 3 2 5 - constitutes the fifth column of the pixel pattern 1510 'and at least spaced apart from each other - the width of a color dot. The fifth column is - and the first: column pair - Qi to make - color - color point CD - 1 to 5 are spaces adjacent to the gates of the color dots CD-14, CD2 4. The color dots CD丄6, CD_2-6, and (3) the person 6 constitute the sixth column of the pixel pattern 1510, and are at least one spaced apart from each other. The width of the color dot. The sixth column is aligned with the fourth column such that the color dot CD-2_6 is adjacent to the gap between the color dots CD_1_5, CD_2-5. The pixel map 151〇 further includes the component device region DCA_1, DCA-2, DCA-3, and the component device regions formed by the component device regions DCAJ, DCA_2, and DCA_3 are listed as the seventh column of the pixel pattern 1510, wherein the width of each component device region is equal to the width of two color dots. Plus horizontal particle spacing. The component device area is aligned (ie the seventh column) is horizontally aligned The column and the fourth column are in the sixth column. Further, the 'switching elements SEj, SE-2, and se_3 are respectively located in the device region DCAJ, DCA_2, DCA-3. The switching device SE_! is coupled to the color dot CDj j, The electrodes of CD12, cd_13, CD丨-4, CD-1-5, CD-1-6, and the switching element SE-2 are coupled to the color dot CD-2, CD-2, CD-2_3, The electrodes of CD—2-4, CD—2—5, and cd—2_6, and the switching element SE_3 is coupled to the color dot cd_3_1, CD—3—2, CD—3—3, CD 3 4, CD 3 5 , Electrode of CD-3-6.曰[00138] In other words, the six color points CD-1-1, CDj-2, CD_1", CI) 1 4, -5 〜1~6 of the first color component of the expanded 昼 pattern 151〇 constitute the right Left and right left and right tooth pattern, and here 77 200846750 right left and right left tooth pattern means that the second color point (ie color point CD 1-2) is in the first color point (ie color point cd - 丨一丨) left

下方,接著第三個顏色質點(即顏色質點CDjj)是位在第 二個顏色質點的右下方,之後第四個顏色質點(即顏色質點 一 1_4)疋位在第二個顏色質點的左下方,再來第五個顏 色質點(即顏色質點CD一 1—5)是位在第四個顏色質點的右下 方,最後第六個顏色質點(即顏色質點CDj—6)是位在第五 個顏色質點的左下方。類似地,擴展晝素圖樣151〇之第二 顏色分量與第三顏色分量亦分別具有六個顏色質點以構成 右左右左右左鋸齒圖案。在畫素圖樣151〇中,這些顏色分 量是垂直對齊,並水平偏移至少一個顏色質點的寬度。^ 個顏色分量分別具有元件裝置區域DCA j、Dca 2、 DCA一3,而元件裝置區域是位於顏色分量的下方,並與顏 色分量水平對齊。此外’對應顏色分量之開關元件是位於 元件裝置區域,且耦接至此顏色分量之顏色質點之電極。 [00139]類似擴展晝素圖樣131〇之顏色質點,畫素圖 樣1510的這些顏色質點是分佈於西洋棋盤圖案的=二顏 色中。此種排列的主要優點便在於擴展晝素圖樣151〇的全 部顏色質點的極性均為相同。圖15即為擴展晝素圖樣⑸〇 之正質點極性圖案,在正f點極性圖案中,所有的顏色質 點與開關元件均具有正極性。相反地,在貞f點極性圖案 中,所有的顏色質點與開關元件均具有負極性。類似前述, 將這些擴展畫素圖樣彼此交錯,即可使顯示器之顏色質點 的極性構成一個完整的西洋棋盤圖案。 _4_ 為依據本發明另—實施例之擴展畫素圖 78 200846750 樣。圖16之擴展畫素圖樣1610具有三個顏色分量,而每 個顏色分量又分割為六個顏色質點。顏色質點CD丨〗(即 為第一顏色分量之第一個顏色質點)、CD—2J(即為第二顏 色分量之第一個顏色質點)、CD 一3一1(即為第三顏色分量之 第一個顏色質點)構成晝素圖樣1610的第一列。不過這些 顏色質點彼此至少間隔一個顏色質點的寬度,以使其他晝 素的顏色質點可以穿插至其中。顏色質點CD丨2、 CD—2—2、CD—3 一2構成畫素圖樣1610的第二列。如同第一 列之顏色質點旧色質點⑶丄厂^力^彼此 至=亦間隔-麵色質關紐。再者,·4素圖樣刪 之第二列偏移第一列以使得顏色質點CD—ij鄰接於顏色 質點CD_1J、CD—之間的空隙。顏色質點cd—^、 CD—2—3、CD_3—3構成畫素圖樣161〇的第三列而且彼此 ^少亦間隔-個顏色質點的寬度。⑼,第三列同時偏移 弟-列與第二列以使得顏色質點CD丄3是鄰接於顏色質 點^1-2、CD—2—2之間的空隙。顏色質‘點CH4、、 2 4、CD_3_4構成晝素圖樣ΐ6ι〇的第四列,而且彼此 至&gt;、亦_-個顏色質闕寬度。第四暇與第二列對赢 二使得顏色質•點CD又4是鄰接於顏色質點⑶/ CD_2—3之間的空隙。顏色質點cD 1 5、cD 2 5、^^ 構成畫素圖樣關的第五列,而且彼此至少亦間個; 色質點的寬度。第五列是與第一 们顏 m Λ p 歹對Α以使得顏色質點 CD_2—5是鄰接於顏色質點❿ 貝/ CD_1_6^CD 2 6. CD 3 &quot;:〇 % 3—6構成畫素圖樣1610 列’而且彼此至少亦間隔—個顏色質點的寬度。然 79 200846750 而,第六列同時偏移其他列以使得顏色質點CD—2—6是 接於顏色質點CD丄5、CD—2—5之間的㈣。畫素_ 16 = 更包括元件裝置區域DCAJ、DCA—2、DCA 3,而元件壯 •置區域DCA」、DCA_2、DCA_3構成之元件裝置區域歹^ 即為晝素圖樣1610的第七列,其中每個元件裝置區域的寬 度等於兩個顏色質點的寬度加上水平質點間距。元件裝置 區域列向(即第七列)是水平對齊於第六列。此外,開關元 件SE—1、SE—2、SE—3是分別位於元件裝置區域DCA^、 • DCA—2、DCA—3。開關元件SE—丨是耦接至顏色質點 CD丄 1、CD丄2、CD—1—3、CD—1—4、CD丄5、CDj:6 之電極,而開關元件SE一2是耦接至顏色質點CD 2 j CD—2—2、CD—2—3、CD—2—4、CD—2—5、〇&gt;又6 之電極: 且開關元件SE—3是耦接至顏色質點CD」」、CD 3 2、 CD—3—3、CD一3 4、CD—3—5、CD—3—6 之電極。 — [00141 ]換句活說’擴展畫素圖樣161 〇之第一顏色分 量之六個顏色質點CD—1J、CD 1—2、CD_1 3、CD 1 4、 • CDJ-5、CDJ-6構成左右右左左左鋸齒圖案,而此處之 左右右左左左鋸齒圖案意為第二個顏色質點(即顏色質點 CD 一 1一2)是位在第一個顏色質點(即顏色質點cDjj)的右 下方,接著第三個顏色質點(即顏色質點CDj 一 3)是位在第 二個顏色質點的右下方,之後第四個顏色質點(即顏色質點 CD一 1 一4)疋位在弟二個顏色質點的左下方,再來第五個声員 色質點(即顏色質點CD一 1 一5)是位在第四個顏色質點的左下 方,最後第六個顏色質點(即顏色質點CDJ〜6)是位在第五 個顏色質點的左下方。類似地,擴展畫素圖樣之第二 200846750 顏色分量與第三顏色分量亦分別具有六個顏 左右右左左左鋸齒圖案。在畫素圖樣161〇 二.,、、以構成 量是垂直對齊’並水平偏移至少—個顏 ;顏色分 個顏色分量分別具有元件装置區域〜dca ”1、'見度。每 DCA_3 ’而元件襞置區域是位於顏色分量的〜下太DCA〜2、 色分量水平對齊。此外,對應顏色分量 ’亚與顏Below, then the third color dot (ie, the color dot CDjj) is located at the bottom right of the second color dot, after which the fourth color dot (ie, the color dot is 1_4) is clamped to the lower left of the second color dot. , the fifth color point (ie, the color dot CD 1-5) is located at the bottom right of the fourth color dot, and the last sixth color dot (ie, the color dot CDj-6) is in the fifth The lower left of the color dot. Similarly, the second color component and the third color component of the extended tilde pattern 151 have six color dots, respectively, to form right, left, right, left, and left zigzag patterns. In the pixel pattern 151, these color components are vertically aligned and horizontally offset by the width of at least one color dot. The ^ color components have component device regions DCA j, Dca 2, DCA-3, respectively, and the component device region is located below the color component and is horizontally aligned with the color component. Further, the switching element corresponding to the color component is an electrode located in the component device region and coupled to the color dot of the color component. [00139] Similar to the color point of the expanded tilde pattern 131, these color points of the pixel pattern 1510 are distributed in the = two colors of the checkerboard pattern. The main advantage of this arrangement is that the polarities of all the color dots of the expanded 151 〇 pattern are the same. Fig. 15 is a diagram showing the positive dot polarity pattern of the expanded halogen pattern (5), in which all the color dots and the switching elements have positive polarity in the positive f-point polarity pattern. Conversely, in the 贞f dot polarity pattern, all of the color dots and the switching elements have a negative polarity. Similar to the foregoing, by interlacing these extended pixel patterns, the polarity of the color dots of the display constitutes a complete checkerboard pattern. _4_ is an extended pixel map 78 200846750 according to another embodiment of the present invention. The expanded pixel pattern 1610 of Figure 16 has three color components, and each color component is further divided into six color dots. Color dot CD丨 (ie the first color dot of the first color component), CD-2J (ie the first color dot of the second color component), CD 3-1 (ie the third color component) The first color dot) constitutes the first column of the altar pattern 1610. However, these color dots are at least spaced apart from each other by the width of one color dot so that the color dots of other elements can be inserted therein. The color dot CD丨2, CD-2-2, CD-3-2 constitute the second column of the pixel pattern 1610. Like the color of the first column of the old color point (3) 丄 factory ^ force ^ each other to = also interval - face color quality. Furthermore, the second pattern is deleted and the second column is offset from the first column such that the color dot CD_ij is adjacent to the gap between the color dots CD_1J, CD-. The color dots cd—^, CD—2-3, and CD_3—3 constitute the third column of the pixel pattern 161〇 and are spaced apart from each other by a width of one color dot. (9), the third column simultaneously shifts the brother-column and the second column such that the color dot CD丄3 is adjacent to the gap between the color dots ^1-2 and CD-2-2. The color quality ‘points CH4, 2, 4, and CD_3_4 constitute the fourth column of the enamel pattern ΐ6ι〇, and each other to &gt;, also _- color 阙 width. The fourth and second columns win against two. The color quality • dot CD and 4 are adjacent to the gap between the color dots (3) / CD_2-3. The color dot cD 1 5, cD 2 5, ^^ constitutes the fifth column of the pixel pattern off, and at least one of each other; the width of the chroma point. The fifth column is opposite to the first one, m Λ p 歹, so that the color dot CD_2-5 is adjacent to the color dot ❿ 贝 / CD_1_6^CD 2 6. CD 3 &quot;: 〇% 3-6 constitutes a pixel pattern 1610 columns 'and at least spaced from each other—the width of a color dot. However, in the case of 79 200846750, the sixth column offsets the other columns at the same time so that the color dot CD-2-6 is connected to (4) between the color dots CD丄5 and CD-2-5. The pixel _ 16 = further includes the component device regions DCAJ, DCA-2, DCA 3, and the component device region of the component DCA, DCA_2, and DCA_3 is the seventh column of the pixel pattern 1610, wherein The width of each component device area is equal to the width of the two color dots plus the horizontal dot spacing. The component unit area column (ie, the seventh column) is horizontally aligned to the sixth column. Further, the switching elements SE-1, SE-2, and SE-3 are located in the component device regions DCA^, DCA-2, and DCA-3, respectively. The switching element SE_丨 is coupled to the electrodes of the color dots CD丄1, CD丄2, CD1-3, CD-1-4, CD丄5, CDj:6, and the switching elements SE-2 are coupled To the color point CD 2 j CD—2—2, CD—2-3, CD—2—4, CD—2—5, 〇> and 6 electrodes: and the switching element SE-3 is coupled to the color dot Electrodes of CD", CD 3 2, CD-3-3, CD-3, CD-3-5, CD-3-6. — [00141] In other words, the phrase “Expanded Pixel Pattern 161” is the first color component of the six color points CD-1J, CD 1-2, CD_1 3, CD 1 4, • CDJ-5, CDJ-6. Left and right, right, left, and left, zigzag patterns, and the left, right, left, and left, zigzag patterns here mean that the second color point (ie, color point CD 1-2) is at the right of the first color point (ie, color point cDjj) Below, then the third color dot (ie, the color dot CDj-3) is located at the bottom right of the second color dot, after which the fourth color dot (ie, the color dot CD-1 to 4) is placed in the second At the lower left of the color dot, the fifth voice color point (ie, the color dot CD 1-5) is located at the lower left of the fourth color dot, and the last sixth color dot (ie, the color dot CDJ~6) ) is located at the bottom left of the fifth color dot. Similarly, the second 200846750 color component and the third color component of the extended pixel pattern also have six color left and right left and left zigzag patterns, respectively. In the pixel pattern 161〇二,,,, the composition is vertically aligned 'and horizontally offset at least—the color; the color color component has the component device area ~dca ”1, 'visibility. Each DCA_3' The component placement area is located under the color component ~ too DCA ~ 2, the color component is horizontally aligned. In addition, the corresponding color component 'Asia and Beauty

元件裝置區域’且輕接至此顏色分量之件是位於 _42]類似擴展晝素圖樣131〇之顏色;^之電極。 樣161G的這些顏色f點是分佈於呵㈣=’晝素圖 ,中。,排列社要優‘較在於擴職;;樣—顏 部顏色質點的極性均為相同。圖16即為擴展金去 的全 之正質點極性圖案,在正質點極性圖宰中圖樣1610 點與開關it件均具有正極性。相反地,在^的顏色質 中’所有的顏色質點與關元件均具有負極性。,=圖案 將這些擴展晝素圖樣彼此交錯,即可使顯示 的極性構成一個完整的西洋棋盤圖案。 〜貝點 [00143]圖17(a)-17(d)為依據本發明其他實施例之不同 態樣之擴展畫素圖樣。在圖17(a)-17(d)之實施例中,每個 顏色分量均會具有鋸齒圖案,而此細部結構將會於後詳 述。第一顏色分量之鑛齒圖案是與第二顏色分量之鑛齒圖 案垂直對齊,而第三顏色分量之鋸齒圖案同時垂直偏移第 一與第二顏色分量之鑛齒圖案。 [00144]圖17(a)之擴展晝素圖樣171〇具有三個顏色为 量,而每個顏色分量又分割為三個顏色質點。顏色質點, CD—1 一 1(即為第一顏色分量之第一個顏色質點)、 81 200846750 (即4第二顏色分量之第—個顏色質點)構成畫素圖 f所的第一列。不過這些顏色質點彼此至少間隔-個顏 色貝點的寬度,以使其他畫素的顏色質點可以穿插至其 中。顏色質點CD丄2、CD丄2構成晝素圖樣171〇的第二 列。如同第一列之顏色質點,顏色質點CD—1—2、CD一2—2 itfrf t間隔一個顏色質點的寬度。再者,擴展畫素圖 ’ 之第二列偏移第一列以使得顏色質點CD 1 2鄰接 於顏色質點CD丄1、CD力之間的空隙。顏色質點 3、CD又3構成晝素圖樣mG的第三列,而且彼此 =亦間隔—個顏色質點的寬度。第三列偏移第二列以使 仔夕員色質點CD-2-3是鄰接於顏色質,點CD丄2、CD 2 2 ^間的空隙。晝素圖樣1710之第四列為元件裝置區域列 ^亚且是^元件裝置區域DCAJ、DCA—2、dca 3所構 成孑細而&quot;’疋件裝置區域DCA—1是與顏色質點CDJ 3 並位於顏色f點CDJ-3的下方^i ^或DCA—2丨與顏色質點⑶丄3水平對齊,並位於顏色 貝點CD又3的下方,且元件裳置區域DCA 3是位於元件 H^DCA—1的左方。亦即由左至右,元件裝置區域列 向刀別為元件裝置區域DCA_3、元件裝置區域dcA卜 隙以及το件裝置區域DCA_2。顏色質點cd」j構成 圖樣17U)的第五列’並位於元件裝置區域d~ca 3的下旦素 顏色質點CD」—2構成晝素圖樣! 7! G的第六列:並位 色=⑶力的右下方。顏色質點⑶」」構成晝素圖樣、 7 〇的弟七列’並位於顏色質點CD—3—2的左下方。 開關…EJ、SE—2、se_3是分別位於 82 200846750 DCA l、DCA 2 質點CDJ jDCA—3。開關元件SE_i是耦接至顏色 是耗接至顏色皙那、⑶-1-3之電極,而開關元件SE_2 CD—3—3之電極。疋耦接至顏色質點CD—3-丨、CD—3_2、 旦$ [-二換句話說,擴展晝素圖樣1710之第一顏色分 里之二個顏色質點CD—i KD&quot;· 工= 鋸齒圖案(此亦為皮 —— —一構成左右左 案意為第二個顏色序質:=二’而此處之左右左《圖 顏色質點(即顏色質;^==丄2)是位在第一個 點(即顏色質點Cn ——)的右下方,而第三個顏色質 ^,7.' -1-3)是位在第二個顏色質點的左下方。 颁似地,擴展晝素圖樣-The component device area 'and the component that is lightly connected to this color component is an electrode located at _42] similar to the color of the extended enamel pattern 131〇; These color f points of the sample 161G are distributed in the (4) = '昼素图, in the middle. , the arrangement of the community should be better than the expansion of the job;; the color of the color-like color of the sample is the same. Figure 16 shows the full positive dot polarity pattern of the extended gold. In the positive dot polarity pattern, the pattern 1610 and the switch member have positive polarity. Conversely, in the color quality of ^, all of the color dots and the off elements have a negative polarity. , = pattern Interlace these extended element patterns into each other to make the displayed polarity form a complete checkerboard pattern. ~ Bay Point [00143] Figures 17(a)-17(d) are expanded pixel patterns of different aspects in accordance with other embodiments of the present invention. In the embodiment of Figs. 17(a)-17(d), each color component will have a sawtooth pattern, and the detail structure will be described later. The miner tooth pattern of the first color component is vertically aligned with the mined tooth pattern of the second color component, and the zigzag pattern of the third color component is simultaneously vertically offset by the miner tooth pattern of the first and second color components. [00144] The expanded pixel pattern 171 of Fig. 17(a) has three colors as quantities, and each color component is further divided into three color dots. The color dot, CD-1 1 (that is, the first color dot of the first color component), 81 200846750 (ie, the 4th color particle of the second color component) constitutes the first column of the pixel map f. However, these color dots are at least spaced apart from each other by the width of a color dot so that the color pixels of other pixels can be inserted into it. The color dot CD 丄 2 and CD 丄 2 constitute the second column of the 171-inch enamel pattern. Like the color point of the first column, the color dot CD-1-2, CD-2-2 itfrf t is the width of a color dot. Furthermore, the second column of the expanded pixel map' is offset from the first column such that the color dot CD 1 2 is adjacent to the gap between the color dot CD丄1 and the CD force. Color dot 3, CD and 3 constitute the third column of the altar pattern mG, and each other = also spaced - the width of a color dot. The third column is offset from the second column so that the color point CD-2-3 is adjacent to the color, the gap between the dots CD 丄 2 and CD 2 2 ^. The fourth column of the elementary pattern 1710 is the component device area column and is the component device area DCAJ, DCA-2, dca 3 which is composed of thin and &quot;' element device area DCA-1 is the color point CDJ 3 And located below the color f point CDJ-3 ^i ^ or DCA-2丨 horizontally aligned with the color dot (3) 丄 3, and located below the color point CD and 3, and the component skirting area DCA 3 is located in the component H^ The left side of DCA-1. That is, from left to right, the component device region is arranged in the component device region DCA_3, the component device region dcA pad, and the τ device device region DCA_2. The color dot cd"j constitutes the fifth column of the pattern 17U) and is located in the element device area d~ca 3. The color dot CD"-2 constitutes a tilapia pattern! The sixth column of 7! G: the position color = (3) the lower right of the force. The color dot (3)"" constitutes a tilapia pattern, and the 7th column of the 7th ’" is located at the lower left of the color dot CD-3-2. The switches...EJ, SE-2, and se_3 are located at 82 200846750 DCA l, DCA 2 dot CDJ jDCA-3. The switching element SE_i is coupled to an electrode whose color is connected to the color 皙, (3)-1-3, and the electrode of the switching element SE_2 CD-3-3.疋Coupling to the color dot CD—3-丨, CD—3_2, 旦$ [- In other words, the two color points of the first color of the expanded enamel pattern 1710 are CD-i KD&quot;· work = sawtooth Pattern (this is also the skin - one constitutes the left and right left case means the second color sequence: = two 'and here left and right left "the picture color point (ie color quality; ^ == 丄 2) is in the The first point (ie, the color dot Cn -) is at the lower right, and the third color quality ^, 7.' -1-3) is at the lower left of the second color dot. Appropriately, expand the enamel pattern -

WiU之弟一顏色分$之三個顏色質 D〜2〜2、CD-2-3亦構成左右左鋸齒圖案(亦 亦為序二鑛齒圖案),且擴展畫素圖樣1710之第:顏色 分量之三個顏色質點⑶―3—卜⑷―2、CD」_^構成^ 右左鑛齒圖案(亦此亦為序三鑛齒圖案)。此外,第一顏色 分量是垂直對齊於第二顏色分量’並水平偏移第二顏色分 量至少二個顏色質點的寬度。不過,第三顏色分量是垂直 偏移第-與第二顏色分量至少顏色分量高度,並位於第一 與第二顏色分量的下方,而元件裝置區域列向便位於第三 顏^分量以及第-與第二顏色分量之間。再者,第三顏色 分罝是水平向左偏移第一顏色分量至少一個顏色質點的寬 度。此外,元件裝置區域DCA_3是水平對齊於第三顏色分 量之第一顏色質點,並位於此顏色質點上方,而元件裝置 區域DCA_1是水平對齊於第一顏色分量之第三顏色質 83 200846750 點,並位於此顏色質點下方,且元件裝置區域DCA_2是水 平對背於第二顏色分量之第三顏色質點,並位於此顏色質 點下方,其中元件裝置區域DCA」、DCA一2、DCA—1是 包含於元件裝置區域列向。此外,開關元件SEj、SE_2、 SE一3是分別位於元件裝置區域dCAj、dca_2、DCA 3, 並刀別輕接第一、第二、第三顏色分量之顏色質點之電極。 [00146]類似擴展晝素圖樣mo之顏色質點,晝素圖 樣1710的這些顏色質點是分佈於西洋棋盤圖案的同一顏 色中(忽略元件裝置區域)。此種排列的主要優點便在於擴 展畫素圖樣1710的全部顏色質點的極性均為相同。圖17(幻 即為擴展晝素圖樣ΠΙΟ之正質點極性圖案,在正質點極性 圖案中,所有的顏色質點與開關元件均具有正極性。相反 地在負貝點極性圖案中,所有的顏色質點與開關元件均 有負極丨生。將這些擴展晝素圖樣彼此交錯,即可使顯示 器之顏色質點的極性構成—個完整的西洋棋盤圖案,而此 將會於後詳述。 旦_47]圖17⑻之擴展晝素圖樣㈣具有三個顏色分 里’而τ個顏色分量又分割為三個顏色質點。顏色質點 CD 一2 一 II即第一顏色分量之第一個顏色質點)、 樣nio二^二顏色分量之第一個顏色f點)構成晝素圖 色質點的^ ^列:不過這些顏色質點彼此至少間隔一個顏 巾痄$ π見又,以使其他晝素的顏色質點可以穿插至1 中。顏色質點CD 1 2、rn 9 〇接士金主门 列。如同_ π — ~ D-2-2構成旦素圖樣1720的第二 列之顏色質點,顏色質點CD丨2、CD 2 2 彼此至少亦間隔一個 一 一2 W頷邑貝點的見度。再者,擴展畫素圖 84 200846750 樣Π20之第二列偏移第—列以使得顏色質點⑶! =質二CD—1—1,-2-1之間的空隙。顏色質點 CD_1—3、CD_2—3構成畫素圖樣172〇的第三列,而且彼此 個顏色質點的寬度。第三列偏移第二列以使 付顏色貝點CD一2一3是鄰接於顏色質點CDj 2、2 2 =間的空隙。畫素圖樣1720之第四列為元件裝置區域列 =,亚且是由元件裝置區域DCA少dca—2、⑽3所構 =砰細而言,元件裝置區域是與顏色質點⑶】3 =對齊,並位於顏色質點CD」」的下方,而元件裝置 ί : =A-2是與顏色質點CD-2-3水平對齊,並位於顏色 二署「七又3的下方’且元件裝置區域DCA」是位於元件 =八。“或D C A—2的右方。亦即由左至右,元件裝置區域列 “刀別為το件裝置區域DCA」、間隙、元件裝置區域 =A_2以及元件裝置區域dca_3。顏色質,點%3」構成 旦素圖樣172G的第五列,並位於元件裝置區域dca」的 下方,且與元件裝置區域DCA—3水平對齊。— ^人2構成晝素圖樣172〇的第六列,並位於顏色質點 3—1的右下方。顏色f點CD—3—3構成畫素圖樣· 的第七列,並位於顏色質點CD_3_2的左下方。 曰[00148]換句話說,擴展畫素圖樣1720之第一顏色分 里之三個顏色質點CD_L1、CD丄2、cd—匕3構成左右左 f齒圖案’而擴展畫素圖樣1720之第二顏色分量之三個顏 ^質點CD又1、CD_2—2、CD—2」亦構成左右左鑛齒圖 =且擴展畫素圖樣1720之第三顏色分量之三個顏色質點 J、CD〜3〜2、CD一 3—3亦構成左右左鋸齒圖案。此外, 85 200846750 第顏色刀畺疋垂直對背於第二顏色分量,並水平偏移第 一顏色刀里至少二個顏色質點的寬度。不過,第三顏色分 量是2直偏移第一與第二顏色分量,並位於第一與第二顏 色刀=的下方,而元件裝置區域列向便位於第三顏色分量 以及第-與第二顏色分量之間。再者,第三顏色分量是水 平向右偏移第一顏色分量至少一個顏色質點的寬度。此 外,兀件+裝置區域DCAj是水平對齊於第一顏色分量之第 二顏色質點,並位於此顏色質點下方,而元件裝置區域 DCA—2是水平對齊於第二顏色分量之第三顏色質點,並位 =此顏色質點下方,且元件裝置區域DCA—3是水平對齊於 弟二顏色分量之第一顏色質點,並位於此顏色質點上方, 其中元件裝置區域DCAJ、DCA—2、dca」是包含於元 件裝置區域列向。另外’開關元件SE—i、SE—2、se 3是 分別位於Tt件裝置區域DCAj、DCA—2、DCA」,並分= 麵接第-、第二、第三顏色分量之顏色質點之電極。 [00149]類似擴展晝素圖樣131〇之顏色質點,晝素圖 樣1720的這些顏色質點是分佈於西洋棋盤圖案的同;;顏 色中。此種排列的主要優點便在於擴展晝素圖樣172〇的^ 部顏色質點的極性均為相同。圖17(b)即為擴展晝素圖樣 Π20之負質點極性圖案,在負f點極性圖案中,所有的 色質點與開關元件均具有負極性。相反地,在正質點極性 圖案中,所有_色質點與開關元件均具有正極性。將這 些擴展晝素圖樣彼此交錯,即可使顯示器之顏色質點的極 性構成一個完整的西洋棋盤圖案,而此將會於後詳述。 [〇〇15〇]圖17(C)之擴展畫素圖樣1730具有三個顏色分 86 200846750 量,而每個顏色分量又分割為三個顏色質點。顏色質點 CD一3一1構成畫素圖樣1730的第一列,而顏色質點〔η 3 2The color of the WiU brother is divided into three colors D ~ 2 ~ 2, CD-2-3 also constitutes the left and right left sawtooth pattern (also known as the order of the second tooth pattern), and the expanded pixel pattern 1710: color The three color points of the component (3) - 3 - Bu (4) - 2, CD" _ ^ constitute ^ right left ore pattern (also known as the sequence of the three teeth). Further, the first color component is a width vertically aligned with the second color component 'and horizontally offset by the second color component by at least two color dots. However, the third color component is a vertical offset of the first and second color components of at least the color component height, and is located below the first and second color components, and the component device region column is located at the third color component and the first - Between the second color component and the second color component. Further, the third color bifurcation is to horizontally shift the width of the at least one color dot of the first color component horizontally to the left. Further, the component device region DCA_3 is horizontally aligned with the first color dot of the third color component and located above the color dot, and the component device region DCA_1 is horizontally aligned with the third color of the first color component 83 200846750, and Located below the color dot, and the component device region DCA_2 is a third color dot horizontally opposite to the second color component and located below the color dot, wherein the component device regions DCA", DCA-2, DCA-1 are included in The component device area is listed. Further, the switching elements SEj, SE_2, and SE3 are electrodes which are respectively located in the element device regions dCAj, dca_2, and DCA3, and are lightly connected to the color point points of the first, second, and third color components. [00146] Similar to the color point of the extended tilde pattern mo, the color points of the tilvin pattern 1710 are distributed in the same color of the checkerboard pattern (ignoring the component device area). The main advantage of this arrangement is that the polarities of all color points of the extended pixel pattern 1710 are the same. Figure 17 (The illusion is the positive dot polarity pattern of the extended tilapia pattern. In the positive dot polarity pattern, all the color dots and the switching elements have positive polarity. Conversely, in the negative dot pattern, all the color dots Both the switching element and the switching element have a negative electrode. By interlacing these extended pixel patterns, the polarity of the color point of the display can be formed into a complete western checkerboard pattern, which will be described in detail later. 17(8)'s extended elementary pattern (4) has three color points' and τ color components are divided into three color points. The color point CD is 2-2, the first color component of the first color component, and the sample nio 2 ^The first color of the two color components, point f), constitutes the ^^ column of the prime color point: but these color points are separated from each other by at least one facet 痄 $ π see again, so that the color points of other elements can be interspersed to 1 in. Color dot CD 1 2, rn 9 〇 士 金 main door column. Just as _ π — ~ D-2-2 constitutes the color point of the second column of the denier pattern 1720, the color dots CD 丨 2 and CD 2 2 are at least spaced apart from each other by a one-two 2 颔邑 点 point. Furthermore, the extended pixel map 84 200846750 The second column of the sample 20 offsets the first column to make the color dot (3)! = void between the two CDs -1 -1, -2-1. The color dots CD_1-3 and CD_2-3 form the third column of the pixel pattern 172〇, and the width of each color dot. The third column is offset by the second column such that the color point CD 2 - 3 is adjacent to the gap between the color dots CDj 2, 2 2 =. The fourth column of the pixel pattern 1720 is the component device region column =, and is the component device region DCA less dca-2, (10) 3 = fine, the component device region is aligned with the color dot (3)] 3 = It is located below the color dot CD", and the component device ί : =A-2 is horizontally aligned with the color dot CD-2-3, and is located in the color scheme "7 and 3 below and the component device area DCA" is Located in component = eight. "Or the right side of D C A-2. That is, from left to right, the component device area column "knife is τ ο device area DCA", gap, component device area = A_2, and component device area dca_3. The color quality, point %3" constitutes the fifth column of the denier pattern 172G, and is located below the component device region dca" and horizontally aligned with the component device region DCA-3. — ^人2 constitutes the sixth column of the 172-inch enamel pattern and is located at the lower right of the color point 3-1. The color f dot CD—3—3 constitutes the seventh column of the pixel pattern and is located at the lower left of the color dot CD_3_2.曰[00148] In other words, the three color dots CD_L1, CD丄2, cd_匕3 of the first color of the extended pixel pattern 1720 constitute the left and right left f-tooth pattern 'and the second of the expanded pixel pattern 1720 The three color points of the color component, CD 1 and CD 2-2, CD-2, also constitute the left and right left ore maps = and the three color points of the third color component of the expanded pixel pattern 1720 are J, CD~3~ 2. CD-3-3 also constitutes a left and right left sawtooth pattern. In addition, 85 200846750 The first color knife is perpendicular to the second color component and horizontally offsets the width of at least two color dots in the first color knife. However, the third color component is 2 directly offset by the first and second color components and is located below the first and second color knives =, and the component device region is located in the third color component and the first and second Between color components. Further, the third color component is a width that shifts horizontally to the right by at least one color dot of the first color component. In addition, the component + device region DCAj is a second color dot horizontally aligned with the first color component and located below the color dot, and the component device region DCA-2 is a third color dot horizontally aligned with the second color component. Coordinate = below the color dot, and the component device area DCA-3 is horizontally aligned with the first color dot of the second color component and located above the color dot, wherein the component device regions DCAJ, DCA-2, dca" are included It is listed in the component device area. In addition, the 'switching elements SE-i, SE-2, and se 3 are electrodes respectively located in the Tt device region DCAj, DCA-2, DCA", and are sub-surfaced to the color of the first, second, and third color components. . [00149] Similar to the color of the magenta pattern 131〇, the color points of the alizarin pattern 1720 are distributed in the same color of the checkerboard pattern; The main advantage of this arrangement is that the polarities of the color points of the expanded 昼 图 pattern 172 均为 are the same. Fig. 17(b) shows the negative particle polarity pattern of the expanded tilapia pattern ,20. In the negative f-point polarity pattern, all the color point and the switching element have negative polarity. Conversely, in the positive dot polarity pattern, all of the _color dots and the switching elements have positive polarity. By interlacing these extended element patterns, the polarities of the color points of the display form a complete checkerboard pattern, which will be detailed later. [〇〇15〇] The expanded pixel pattern 1730 of Fig. 17(C) has three color points 86 200846750 quantities, and each color component is divided into three color dots. Color dot CD 3-1 constitutes the first column of the pixel pattern 1730, and the color dot [η 3 2

構成晝素圖樣1730的第二列,並位於顏色質點$工的 右下方。顏色質點CD一3一3構成晝素圖樣173〇的第三列、, 並位於顏色質點CD_3_2的左下方。晝素圖樣173〇 :第四 列為兀件裝置區域列向,並且是由元件裝置區域1、 DCA一2、DCA—3所構成。詳細而言’元件裝置區域dca 3 是與顏色質點CD一3—3水平對齊,並位於顏色質點cd 3 的下方。元縣置區域DCA—2是位於元件裝置區域dca— 的左方’而元件裝置區域DCAj是位於元件裝置區域 DCA_2的左方,並間隔元件裝置區域dca—2至少一 件裝置區域的寬度。亦即由左至右,元件裝置區域列 別為元件I置區域DCAJ、間隙、元件裝置區域dca 2 以及7L件裝置區域DCA_3。顏色質點CD」」、CD 2】槿 成晝素圖樣173 0的第五列。不過這些顏色f點彼此至― 隔-個顏色質點的寬度,以使其他畫素的顏色質點可以穿 CD^l 1 CV 2'1 1f ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ f -- --1刀別水平對齊於元件裝置區域DCA】、 =_2。顏色質,點CDj—2、cd_2_2構成晝素圖樣咖 的弟六列。如同第五列之顏色質點,顏色質點CD」』、 =2_2被此至少亦間隔—個顏色質點的寬度。再者,擴展 旦素圖樣1730之第六列偏移第五 、點 顏色質點CD丄3、CD_2—3構成晝素圖樣㈣的第七二, 被此至少亦間隔—個顏色質點的寬度。第七列偏移第 87 200846750 六列以使得顏色質點⑶-2」是鄰接於顏色質點CD】2、 CD-2-2之間的空隙。此外,開關元件SE i、SE 2 :SE 3 是分別位於元件裝置區域DCAj、DeA_2、Μ。。_ 兀件SE_1是耦接至顏色質點、cD i 2、cD } 3 之電極,而開關元件SE-2是耦接至顏色質點CD 2—「 3、Γ—2—3 ^極’且_元件犯―3是_至顏色 質點 〇〇丄1、〇)一3—2、(:1)—3一3之電極。 _51]換句話說,擴展晝素圖樣173G之第—顏色分 量之三個顏色質點CD丄卜CD^2、CD 1 3構成左右左 鑛齒圖案,而擴展晝素圖#173〇之第二顏色分量之三個顏 ^質點CD—2一 1、CD—2—2、CD—2」亦構成左右左鑛歯圖 案,且擴展晝素圖樣1730之第三顏色分量之三個顏色質點 CD—3—1 CD—3一2、CD—3—3仍構成左右左鋸齒圖案。此外, 第-顏色^是録對齊於第三顏色分量,並水平偏移第 =顏色分量至少二個顏色質點的寬度。不過,第三顏色分 量是=直偏移第一與第二顏色分量,並位於第一與第二顏 ^分量=上方,且元件裝置區域列向便是位於第三顏色分 里以及第一與第二顏色分量之間。再者,第三顏色分量是 水平向右偏移第二顏色分量至少一個顏色質點的寬度。此 外,7G件裝置區域DCAJ是水平對齊於第一顏色分量之第 一顏色質點,並位於此顏色質點上方,而元件裝置區域 DCA 一 2是水平對齊於第二顏色分量之第一顏色質點,並位 於此顏色質點上方,且元件裝置區域DCA—3是水平對齊於 第一顏色分1之第三顏色質點,並位於此顏色質點下方, 其中凡件襞置區域DCAJ、DCA—2、DCA—3是包含於元 88 200846750 件裝置區域列向。另外,開關元件SE_1、SE_2、SE_3是 分別位於元件裝置區域DCA_1、DCA_2、DCA_3,並分別 耦接第一、第二、第三顏色分量之顏色質點之電極。 [00152] 圖17(c)即為擴展晝素圖樣1730之正質點極性 圖案,在正質點極性圖案中,所有的顏色質點與開關元件 均具有正極性。相反地,在負質點極性圖案中,所有的顏 色質點與開關元件均具有負極性。將這些擴展晝素圖樣彼 此交錯,即可使顯示器之顏色質點的極性構成一個完整的 西洋棋盤圖案,而此將會於後詳述。 [00153] 圖17(d)之擴展畫素圖樣1740具有三個顏色分 量,而每個顏色分量又分割為三個顏色質點。顏色質點 CD_3_1構成畫素圖樣1740的第一列,而顏色質點CD__3_2 構成晝素圖樣Π40的第二列,並位於顏色質點CD_3_1的 右下方。顏色質點CD_3_3構成晝素圖樣1740的第三列, 並位於顏色質點CD_3_2的左下方。晝素圖樣1740之第四 列為元件裝置區域列向’並且是由元件裝置區域DCA__l、 DCA—2、DCA_3所構成。詳細而言,元件裝置區域DCA_3 是與顏色質點CD_3_3水平對齊,並位於顏色質點CD_3_3 的下方。元件裝置區域DCA_1是鄰接於元件裝置區域 DCA一3的右方,而元件裝置區域DCA一2是位於元件裝置 區域DCA_1的右方,並間隔元件裝置區域DCA_1至少一 個元件裝置區域的寬度(即元件裝置區域DCA_1、DCA_2 形成一個空隙)。亦即由左至右,元件裝置區域列向分別為 元件裝置區域DCA_3、元件裝置區域DCA_1、間隙以及元 件裝置區域DCA__2。顏色質點CD_1_1、CD_2_1構成晝素 89 200846750 圖樣1740的^五列。不過這些顏色質點彼此至少間隔一個 顏色質點的寬度’以使其他畫素的顏色f點可以穿J至其 令。此外’第五列偏移第四列以使得得顏色質點⑶厂 CD_2一 1分別水平對齊於元件裝置區域 顏色質點CD丄2、CD又2構成畫素圖樣m〇的第六-°, 且顏,質點CD丄2、CD_2_2彼此至少亦顧—個顏色fIt constitutes the second column of the altar pattern 1730 and is located at the lower right of the color dot. The color dot CD 3-1 forms the third column of the 173-inch enamel pattern, and is located at the lower left of the color dot CD_3_2. The enamel pattern 173〇: the fourth column is the direction of the device unit area, and is composed of the component device area 1, DCA-2, and DCA-3. In detail, the component device region dca 3 is horizontally aligned with the color dot CD 3-1 and is located below the color dot cd 3 . The meta-region DCA-2 is located to the left of the component device region dca- and the component device region DCAj is located to the left of the component device region DCA_2, and the spacer device device region dca-2 is at least one device region width. That is, from left to right, the component device areas are listed as the component I set region DCAJ, the gap, the component device region dca 2, and the 7L device region DCA_3. The color dot CD"", CD 2] is the fifth column of the 173 0. However, these colors f point to each other - the width of the color point of the color, so that the color points of other pixels can wear CD^l 1 CV 2'1 1f ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ f -- --1 knife Horizontally aligned to the component device area DCA], =_2. The quality of the color, the point CDj-2, cd_2_2 constitutes the six columns of the 昼素 pattern coffee. Like the color point of the fifth column, the color dot CD"" and =2_2 are at least spaced apart by the width of the color dot. Furthermore, the sixth column of the extended denier pattern 1730 is offset by the fifth point, and the dot color dots CD丄3 and CD_2-3 constitute the seventh two of the elementary pattern (4), and are at least spaced apart by the width of the color dot. The seventh column is offset by the eight columns of 2008 200846750 such that the color dot (3)-2" is adjacent to the gap between the color dot CD 2 and CD-2-2. Further, the switching elements SE i, SE 2 : SE 3 are located in the element device regions DCAj, DeA_2, Μ, respectively. . _ element SE_1 is an electrode coupled to a color dot, cD i 2, cD } 3, and the switching element SE-2 is coupled to a color dot CD 2 - "3, Γ - 2 - 3 ^ pole ' and _ component The sin-3 is the electrode of the _1 to the color 〇〇丄1, 〇) 3-2, (:1)-3 3 _51] In other words, the third color component of the extended morpheme pattern 173G The color dot CD丄CD^2, CD 1 3 constitutes the left and right left tooth pattern, and the extended color element of the second color component of the 昼素图#173〇CD-2, CD-2-2 CD-2" also constitutes the left and right left ore pattern, and the three color points of the third color component of the expanded element pattern 1730, CD-3-1 CD-3-2, CD-3-3 still constitute the left and right left sawtooth pattern. . In addition, the first color ^ is recorded to be aligned with the third color component, and horizontally offsets the width of the at least two color dots of the color component. However, the third color component is = directly offset by the first and second color components, and is located above the first and second color components =, and the component device region is listed in the third color score and the first Between the second color components. Furthermore, the third color component is a width that shifts horizontally to the right by at least one color dot of the second color component. In addition, the 7G device region DCAJ is horizontally aligned with the first color dot of the first color component and located above the color dot, and the component device region DCA-2 is horizontally aligned with the first color dot of the second color component, and Located above the color dot, and the component device area DCA-3 is a third color dot horizontally aligned with the first color component, and is located below the color dot, wherein the device region DCAJ, DCA-2, DCA-3 It is included in the meta-88 200846750 device area column. Further, the switching elements SE_1, SE_2, and SE_3 are electrodes respectively located in the element device regions DCA_1, DCA_2, and DCA_3, and coupled to the color mass points of the first, second, and third color components, respectively. 17(c) shows the positive dot polarity pattern of the expanded pixel pattern 1730, in which all the color dots and the switching elements have positive polarity. Conversely, in the negative dot polarity pattern, all of the color dots and the switching elements have a negative polarity. By interlacing these extended pixel patterns, the polarity of the color dots of the display forms a complete checkerboard pattern, which will be detailed later. [00153] The extended pixel pattern 1740 of Figure 17(d) has three color components, and each color component is further divided into three color dots. The color dot CD_3_1 constitutes the first column of the pixel pattern 1740, and the color dot CD__3_2 constitutes the second column of the pixel pattern Π40 and is located at the lower right of the color dot CD_3_1. The color dot CD_3_3 constitutes the third column of the altar pattern 1740 and is located at the lower left of the color dot CD_3_2. The fourth column of the pixel pattern 1740 is a component device region column direction ' and is composed of element device regions DCA__1, DCA-2, DCA_3. In detail, the component device area DCA_3 is horizontally aligned with the color dot CD_3_3 and is located below the color dot CD_3_3. The component device region DCA_1 is adjacent to the right of the component device region DCA-3, and the component device region DCA-2 is located to the right of the component device region DCA_1, and the spacer device device region DCA_1 is at least one component device region width (ie, the device) Device areas DCA_1, DCA_2 form a gap). That is, from left to right, the component device areas are listed as the component device region DCA_3, the component device region DCA_1, the gap, and the component device region DCA__2, respectively. The color dots CD_1_1 and CD_2_1 constitute the alizarin 89 200846750 The pattern of the 1740 is five columns. However, these color dots are separated from each other by at least one color dot width so that the other elements of the color f point can be worn by J. In addition, the fifth column is offset by the fourth column so that the color dot (3) factory CD_2-1 is horizontally aligned with the component device area color dot CD丄2, CD and 2 constitute the sixth pattern of the pixel pattern m〇, and the color , the dot CD 丄 2, CD_2_2 at least each other - a color f

點的寬度。再者’擴展晝素圖樣174G之第六列偏移第五列 以使得顏色質點CD丄2鄰接於顏色質點CD_U、CD 2 j ”的空隙。顏色質點CD丄3、CD_2」構成晝素圖樣“ 的第七列,而且彼此至少亦間隔一個顏色質點的寬度。第 七列偏移第六列以使得顏色質點CD—2—3是鄰接於顏色質 點CD丄2、CD—2_2之間的空障。此外,開關元件SE—i '、 SE—2、SE—3是分別位於元件裝置區域dCAj、DCA 2、 DCA一3。開關元件SE_1是麵接至顏色質點cd 1 1、 CD—1—2、CD—1 一3之電極,而開關元件SE—2是耦接至顏色 質點CD—2—1、CD—2—2、CD—2_3之電極,且開關元件SE—3 是耦接至顏色質點CD—3_1、CD_3—2、CD—3—3之電極。— [00154]換句話說,擴展晝素圖樣i74〇之第一顏色分 量之三個顏色質點CD_1_1、CD_1_2、CD一 1_3構成左右左 鋸齒圖案,而擴展晝素圖樣1740之第二顏色分量之三個顏 色貝點CD一2—1、CD_2_2、CD—2—3亦構成左右左鋸齒圖 案’且擴展畫素圖樣1740之第三顏色分量之三個顏色質點 CD—3一1、CD_3一2、CD_3—3仍構成左右左鋸齒圖案。此外, 第一顏色分量是垂直對齊於第二顏色分量,並水平偏移第 二顏色分量至少二個顏色質點的寬度。不過,第三顏色分 90 200846750 - 量是垂直向上偏移第一與第二顏色分量至少一個顏色分量 &amp; 的高度,且元件裝置區域列向是位於第三顏色分量以及第 一與第二顏色分量之間。再者,第三顏色分量是水平向左 •偏移第一顏色分量至少一個顏色質點的寬度。此外,元件 .裝置區域DCA_1是水平對齊於第一顏色分量之第一顏色 質點,並位於此顏色質點上方,而元件裝置區域DCA_2是 水平對齊於第二顏色分量之第一顏色質點,並位於此顏色 質點上方,且元件裝置區域DCA_3是水平對齊於第三顏色 • 分量之第三顏色質點,並位於此顏色質點下方,其中元件 裝置區域DCA_1、DCA—2、DCA—3是包含於元件裝置區 域列向。另外,開關元件SE_1、SE_2、SE_3是分別位於 元件裝置區域DCA_1、DCA_2、DCA_3,並分別耦接第一、 第二、第三顏色分量之顏色質點之電極。 [00155] 圖17(d)即為擴展畫素圖樣1740之負質點極性 圖案,在負質點極性圖案中,所有的顏色質點與開關元件 均具有負極性。相反地,在正質點極性圖案中,所有的顏 • 色質點與開關元件均具有正極性。將這些擴展晝素圖樣彼 此交錯,即可使顯示器之顏色質點的極性構成一個完整的 西洋棋盤圖案,而此將會於後詳述。 [00156] 在本發明之一實施例中,應用擴展畫素圖樣 1710、1720、1730、1740之顯示器會以類似圖13(b)的概 念而使用列向交錯的方式排列畫素。具體而言,應用擴展 畫素圖樣1710、1730之晝素具有第一種極性圖案,而應用 擴展晝素圖樣1720、1740之畫素具有相反的極性圖案。應 用擴展晝素圖樣Π20之晝素之第三顏色分量將會配置於 91 200846750 •應用擴展畫素圖樣1710之晝素之第一與第二顏色分量 -間。類似地’應用擴展畫素圖樣1710之晝素之第三顏色^ 量將會配置於應用擴展畫素圖樣1720之晝素之第〜與^ - 二顏色分量之間。應用擴展晝素圖樣1730、1740之晝素的 排列方式相同於應用擴展晝素圖樣171〇、172〇之晝素的才' 列方式。應用擴展晝素圖樣1730之晝素之第一顏色分息f 垂直對齊於應用擴展晝素圖# ΠΙΟ之晝素之第三顏 董,並偏移此第三顏色分量至少兩個顏色質點寬度。類乃 • 地,應用擴展晝素圖樣1740之晝素之第-顏色分量是= 對齊於應用擴展晝素圖樣172G之晝素之第三顏色分量,、, 偏移此第二顏色分量至少兩個顏色質點寬度。圖17(e)给並 此四個畫素Pl7l〇、P172〇、pl73〇、pi74〇的排列方;7^ 應用擴展畫素圖樣171〇之畫素pi71〇是標示為點陰= 號,而應用擴展晝素圖樣1720之畫素P1720是標記圮 至左下對角線陰影符號,且應用擴展晝素圖樣173G之書^ P1730是標記為左上至右下對角線陰影符號,又應用擴屏 ⑩ 畫素圖樣1740之晝素ΡΠ40是標記為垂直線陰影符號、 [00157]圖18(a)與i8(b)為依據本發明另一實施例&quot;之擴 展晝素圖樣1810之正質點極性圖案與負質點極性圖案。具 體而言’圖18(a)纟會示擴展晝素圖樣181〇之正質點極性圖 案。擴展晝素圖樣1810之第一顏色分量之三個顏色質點 CD_1—1、CD—1—2、CD一 1一3構成左右左鋸齒圖案(此亦為序 一鋸齒圖案),而擴展晝素圖樣1810之第二顏色分量之三 個顏色質點CD—2J、⑶一2一2、⑶―2」亦構成左右左鋸齒 圖案(此亦為序二鋸齒圖案),且擴展晝素圖樣181〇之第三 92 200846750The width of the point. Furthermore, the sixth column of the extended tiling pattern 174G is offset from the fifth column such that the color dot CD 丄 2 is adjacent to the space of the color dots CD_U, CD 2 j ”. The color dots CD 丄 3, CD _2 constituting the tiling pattern “ The seventh column, and at least separated from each other by the width of a color dot. The seventh column is offset from the sixth column such that the color dot CD-2-3 is adjacent to the air bubble between the color dots CD丄2 and CD-2_2. In addition, the switching elements SE-i', SE-2, and SE-3 are located in the device device regions dCAj, DCA2, DCA-3, respectively. The switching element SE_1 is surface-connected to the color dot cd 1 1 , CD 1-2 The electrode of the CD-1 to 3, and the switching element SE-2 is coupled to the electrode of the color dot CD-2, CD-2-2, CD-2_3, and the switching element SE-3 is coupled to the color The electrode of the dot CD-3_1, CD_3-2, CD-3-3. - [00154] In other words, the three color points CD_1_1, CD_1_2, CD-1_3 of the first color component of the expanded tilapia pattern i74〇 constitute left and right. The left zigzag pattern, and the three color components of the second color component of the expanded tilapia pattern 1740 are CD 2-1, CD_2_2, CD 2-3. The three color dots CD-3, 1, CD_3-2, and CD_3-3, which also constitute the left and right zigzag patterns' and the third color component of the expanded pixel pattern 1740, still constitute the left and right left sawtooth patterns. In addition, the first color component is Vertically aligned with the second color component and horizontally offset the width of the at least two color dots of the second color component. However, the third color component 90 200846750 - the amount is vertically offset from the first and second color components by at least one color component The height of the &amp; and the component device area column is located between the third color component and the first and second color components. Further, the third color component is horizontal to the left • the first color component is offset by at least one color dot In addition, the component device area DCA_1 is horizontally aligned with the first color dot of the first color component and located above the color dot, and the component device region DCA_2 is the first color dot horizontally aligned with the second color component. And located above the color dot, and the component device area DCA_3 is the third color dot horizontally aligned with the third color • component and is located in the color Below the point, the component device regions DCA_1, DCA-2, and DCA-3 are included in the component device region column direction. In addition, the switching devices SE_1, SE_2, and SE_3 are respectively located in the device device regions DCA_1, DCA_2, and DCA_3, and are respectively coupled. The electrode of the color dot of the first, second, and third color components. [00155] FIG. 17(d) is the negative dot polarity pattern of the expanded pixel pattern 1740. In the negative dot polarity pattern, all the color dots and switches The components all have a negative polarity. Conversely, in the positive dot polarity pattern, all of the color dots and the switching elements have positive polarity. By interlacing these extended pixel patterns, the polarity of the color dots of the display forms a complete checkerboard pattern, which will be detailed later. [00156] In one embodiment of the invention, a display employing extended pixel patterns 1710, 1720, 1730, 1740 will arrange pixels in a column-wise staggered manner similar to the concept of Figure 13(b). Specifically, the pixels applying the extended pixel patterns 1710, 1730 have a first polarity pattern, and the pixels to which the extended tilde patterns 1720, 1740 are applied have opposite polarity patterns. The third color component of the application element of the extended pixel pattern Π20 will be configured at 91 200846750 • The first and second color components of the pixel of the extended pixel pattern 1710 are applied. Similarly, the third color of the element that applies the extended pixel pattern 1710 will be placed between the first and second color components of the pixel of the extended pixel pattern 1720. The arrangement of the alizarins using the extended alizarin patterns 1730 and 1740 is the same as the method of applying the alizarins of the extended enamel patterns 171〇, 172〇. Applying the first color distribution f of the expanded element of the alizarin pattern 1730 is vertically aligned with the third color of the application of the expanded element, and offsets the width of the third color component by at least two color points. In the ground, the first color component of the element using the extended element pattern 1740 is = the third color component aligned with the element of the extended enthalpy pattern 172G, and the second color component is offset by at least two Color particle width. Figure 17 (e) gives the arrangement of the four pixels Pl7l〇, P172〇, pl73〇, pi74〇; 7^ applies the extended pixel pattern 171〇 pixel pi71〇 is marked as a point Yin = number, and The pixel P1720 that uses the extended alizarin pattern 1720 is a shadow symbol to the lower left diagonal line, and the book that uses the extended alizarin pattern 173G ^ P1730 is marked as the upper left to the lower right diagonal shading symbol, and the application of the expansion screen 10 The pixel pattern of the pixel pattern 1740 is marked with a vertical line shading symbol, and [00157] FIGS. 18(a) and 9(b) are the positive dot polarity patterns of the extended element pattern 1810 according to another embodiment of the present invention. Polar pattern with negative mass point. Specifically, Figure 18(a) shows the positive dot polarity pattern of the extended morpheme pattern 181〇. The three color dots CD_1-1, CD-1-2, and CD-11-3 of the first color component of the extended tilde pattern 1810 constitute a left and right left sawtooth pattern (this is also a sawtooth pattern), and the expanded tiling pattern is extended. The three color points CD-2J, (3) 1-2, 2, (3) ―2 of the second color component of 1810 also constitute a left and right left sawtooth pattern (this is also a sequence of two sawtooth patterns), and the expanded enamel pattern 181 〇 Three 92 200846750

顏色分量之三個顏色質點CD—3一 1、CD—3—2、CD—3 3仍構 成左右左鋸齒圖案(此亦為序二鋸齒圖案)。此外,第一顏 色分量是垂直對齊於第三顏色分量,並水平偏移第三顏色 分量至少二個顏色質點的寬度。不過,第二顏色分量是垂 直向上偏移第一與第三顏色分量至少一個顏色分量的高 度。再者,第二顏色分量是水平向右偏移第一顏色分量至 少一個顏色質點的寬度。此外,元件裝置區域列向包括元 件裝置區域DCA—1、DCA一2、DCA—3,並間隔於第二顏 色分1以及第一與第三顏色分量之間。詳細而言,元件裝 置區域DCA一 1是水平對齊於顏色質點CD一丨一丨,並位於此 顏色質點上方’而元件裝置區域DCA—2是水平對齊於顏€ 質點CD_2一3,並位於此顏色質點下方,且元件裝置區土 DCA一3是水平對齊於顏色質點CD一3—卜並位於此顏色^ 點下方。另外’開關元件SE—卜SE—2、SE—3是分別位方 元件裝置區域DC A j、DCA—2、難—3,因此元件裝置g 域列向亦可稱為開關元件列向,並且第—顏色分量盘第: 顏色分量是分別位於開關元件列向U以及 開關元件SE—1是_接至顏色質點CD—Li2、 iC ’而開關元件SE~2是耦接至顏色質黑 驗/Γ—2—2、CD—2-3之電極,且開關元件SE 3 - 點極陡!^广素圖樣181G+之正質點極性圖案,在正賀 性。相if 所有的顏色質點與開關元件均具有正極 性圖安,在自f 18(b)即為擴展畫素圖樣181〇_之負質點極 *在負貝點極性圖案中,所有的顏色f點與開關元 93 200846750 件均具有負極性。 [00158]圖18(〇)與18(d)為依據本發明另一實施例之擴 展畫素圖樣1820之正質點極性圖案與負質點極性圖案。擴 展晝素圖樣1820之第一顏色分量之三個顏色質點 CD—1 一1 CDj-2'CD-1-3構成左右左鋸齒圖案,而擴展 畫素圖樣182G之第二顏色分量之三個顏色f點cd 2 、 C严2、CD又3亦構成左右左鑛齒圖案,且擴展畫素圖 樣1820之第三顏色分量之三個顏色質點⑶力、 2 CD—3一3仍構成左右左鑛齒圖案。此外,第一顏 色分量是垂直對齊於第三顏色分量,並水平偏移第三顏色、 J量至少二,顏色質點的寬度。不過,第二顏色分量是垂 疮向下偏移,一與第三顏色分量至少一個顏色分量的高 ^ °再者’第二顏色分量是水平向右偏移第—顏色分量至 的此外,元件裝置區域列向包括元 域DCA—b DCA一2、DCA—3,並間隔於第二顏 ^里以及第-與第三顏色分量之間。詳細而言, 1是水平對_顏色f點CDj」,並位於此 = 2是水平對齊於顏色 DCA 3心工’亚位於此顏色質點上方,且元件裝置區域 點上方另冰齊於顏色質點CD」」,並位於此顏色質 元件壯晋2 ’開關元件心、SE~2、SE」是分別位於 ::-1、DCA-2、DCA-3。開關元件 SE 1 疋轉接至顏色質點CD丄卜CD丨2、CD } : 開關元件SE—2是減至顏色質點CD“而 -」之电極’且開關元件SE」_至顏色質點 94 200846750 α&gt;_3—1 ' CD—3—2' CD—3—3之電極。_ 18⑷即為擴展晝素 圖樣1820-之負質點極性圖案,在負質點極性圖案中,所有 的顏色質點與開關元件均具有負極性。相反地,圖18(d) 即為擴展晝素圖樣1820+之正質點極性圖案,在正質點極 性圖木中,所有的顏色質點與開關元件均具有正極性。根 據前述的概念,將這些擴展畫素圖樣181〇、182〇彼此^The three color dots CD-3, CD-3-2, and CD-3 of the color component still form a left and right left sawtooth pattern (this is also a sequence of zigzag patterns). Further, the first color component is vertically aligned to the third color component and horizontally offset from the width of the at least two color dots of the third color component. However, the second color component is a height that vertically offsets at least one color component of the first and third color components. Further, the second color component is a width that shifts the first color component horizontally to the right by at least one color dot. Further, the component device area is arranged to include the element device area DCA-1, DCA-2, DCA-3, and spaced between the second color component 1 and the first and third color components. In detail, the component device area DCA-1 is horizontally aligned with the color dot CD and located above the color dot, and the component device region DCA-2 is horizontally aligned with the dot CD_2-3, and is located here. Below the color dot, and the component device area DCA-3 is horizontally aligned with the color dot CD-3b and below the color ^ point. In addition, the 'switching element SE-b SE-2, SE-3 are respectively the bit-side device device regions DC A j, DCA-2, and hard--3, so the component device g-domain column direction may also be referred to as a switching device column, and The first-color component disk: the color component is located in the switching element column U and the switching element SE-1 is connected to the color dot CD-Li2, iC' and the switching element SE~2 is coupled to the color quality black test/ Γ—2—2, the electrode of CD—2-3, and the switching element SE 3 - point is extremely steep! ^ The pattern of the positive point of the 181G+ of the wide pattern is positive. Phase If all color points and switching elements have positive polarity, in f 18(b) is the extended pixel pattern 181〇_ negative point extremely * in the negative point polarity pattern, all colors f point Both the switch element 93 and 200846750 have negative polarity. 18(d) and 18(d) are a positive dot polarity pattern and a negative dot polarity pattern of an extended pixel pattern 1820 according to another embodiment of the present invention. The three color dots CD-1 - 1 CDj-2' CD-1-3 of the first color component of the extended pixel pattern 1820 constitute a left and right left sawtooth pattern, and the three colors of the second color component of the extended pixel pattern 182G f point cd 2, C strict 2, CD and 3 also constitute left and right left ore pattern, and the three color points of the third color component of the extended pixel pattern 1820 (3) force, 2 CD-3 3 still constitute left and right left ore Tooth pattern. Further, the first color component is vertically aligned with the third color component and horizontally offset by the third color, the amount of J is at least two, and the width of the color dot. However, the second color component is the downward offset of the acne, the height of at least one color component of the first and third color components, and the second color component is horizontally shifted to the right by the color component. The device area column includes the meta-domains DCA-b DCA-2, DCA-3, and is spaced between the second and the third and third color components. In detail, 1 is the horizontal pair _ color f point CDj", and is located here = 2 is horizontally aligned with the color DCA 3, the heart is 'above the color point above, and the component device area is above the ice color point CD "", and located in this color quality component 2' switching element core, SE~2, SE" are located at: -1, DCA-2, DCA-3. The switching element SE 1 疋 is switched to the color dot CD 丨 CD 丨 2, CD }: the switching element SE-2 is the electrode of the color dot CD "and-" and the switching element SE"_ to the color dot 94 200846750 α&gt;_3—1 'CD-3-2' CD-3-3 electrode. _ 18(4) is the negative polarity pattern of the extended element pattern 1820-. In the negative dot polarity pattern, all the color dots and the switching elements have negative polarity. Conversely, Fig. 18(d) shows the positive dot polarity pattern of the expanded alizarin pattern 1820+. In the positive dot polar graph, all the color dots and the switching elements have positive polarity. According to the foregoing concept, these extended pixel patterns are 181〇, 182〇 each other^

!曰’即可使如之顏色質點的極性構成—個完整的西洋 棋盤圖案,而此將會於圖l8(e)詳述。 I圓邮本發明之—實施财,應㈣展畫素㈤ 〇、咖之顯示器會以類似圖哪)的概念而使用^ 父錯的方式排列晝素。目18晴示顯示器删之 而顯不器刪之畫素是應用擴展畫素圖樣1810、1820, 具體而言,顯示器1_之每—列是由交替之擴展書 1810、1820所雄劣 二— ’、—京圖本!曰' can make the polarity of the color dot as a complete western checkerboard pattern, which will be detailed in Figure l8(e). I round the invention of the invention - the implementation of the financial, should (4) display (5) 〇, coffee display will be similar to the concept of the use of ^ father wrong way to arrange the elements. The 18th clear display is deleted and the pixel is deleted. The extended pixel pattern 1810, 1820 is applied. Specifically, each column of the display 1_ is composed of alternating extended books 1810 and 1820. ', - Jing Tuben

樣㈣夕壹1 列的開端均為應用擴展晝素S !•生m安旦素。在同—列上的所有晝素具有相同的質點本 性圖案,不過相鄰 、-尤 荦。庫用m主旦素便具有相反的質點極性圈 :應用擴展晝素圖樣182〇之畫素(如第之 /刀置將會配置於制擴展晝素_ 182 ㈣顏色 之下-列,即第二列)之第一 I第一…:素(如弟-歹1 1 w、a 乐興弟二顏色分量之間。名周 ,中,擴展畫素Rlpi(即列ri的第一個 在Θ 色分量將合配罟协桩尸4 士 &quot;、)之弟—彥員 之第ϋ色C素R2P1(即列R2的第-個畫素) 展畫素圖樣咖之一4:弟=_會配置於應用擴 第一盥繁一 ▲ a 一素(如弟一列之上一列,即第一列)之 4二顏色分量之間。在圖18⑷中,擴展畫素R2p2(即 95 200846750 • 列R2的第二個畫素)之第二顏色分量將會配置於擴展晝素 _ R1P2(即列R1的第二個晝素)之第一與第三顏色分量之 間。這些列是水平對齊,且於垂直方向彼此交錯,以使得 應用擴展晝素圖樣1810並位於第二列上之晝素之第三顏 色分量是垂直對齊於應用擴展晝素圖樣1810並位於第一 列上之晝素之第一顏色分量。類似地,應用擴展晝素圖樣 1820並位於第一列上之晝素之第三顏色分量是垂直對齊於 應用擴展晝素圖樣1820並位於第二列上之畫素之第一顏 色分量。圖18(e)繪示應用此種排列的範例,其中晝素 R1P1、R2P1、R3P卜 R1P3、R2P3、R3P3 是應用擴展畫素 圖樣1820,而晝素R1P2、R2P2、R3P2是應用擴展晝素圖 樣 1810 [00160]圖 18(f)繪示具有源極線 S0_1、S0—2、S0—3、 Sl_l、Sl_2、Sl_3 與閘極線 GO、G1、G2 之顯示器 1830。 一般而言,標示成SX__Y之源極線是用於任一列中之第X 個晝素的第Y個顏色分量,而標示成GZ之源極線是用於 弟Z列。電晶體的源極是搞接至源極線’而電晶體的閘極 是耦接至閘極線,且電晶體的汲極是耦接至各個顏色質點 的電極。為求說明清楚’特定的電晶體可表不成電晶體 T(SX_Y,GZ),其中電晶體是耦接至源極線SX_Y與閘極線 GZ。受制於圖18(f)的空間有限,顏色質點是標示為J_K 而有別於其他圖示中的CD_J_K,不過為求一致性,以下 的敘述中仍會沿用CD_JJC。此外,電性連接構件是標示 成粗黑線。舉例而言,在被閘極線G1以及源極線S0_1、 S0_2、S0_3所控制的晝素1860中,電晶體T(S0_1,G1)的 96 200846750 • 汲極是耦接至顏色質點CD_1_3,而顏色質點CD_1_3又耦 ^ 接至顏色質點CD_1_2,且顏色質點CD_1_2再耦接至顏色 • 質點CD_1J。類似地,電晶體T(S0_2, G1)的汲極是耦接 - 至顏色質點CD_2j,而顏色質點CD_2」又耦接至顏色質 點CD_2_2,且顏色質點CD_2_2再耦接至顏色質點 CD_2_3。電晶體T(S0_3, G1)的汲極是耦接至顏色質點 CD_3_3,而顏色質點CD_3_3又耦接至顏色質點CD_3_2, 且顏色質點CD_3_2再耦接至顏色質點CD_3__1。再者,電 籲晶體 T(S0_1,Gl)、T(S0—2, Gl)、T(S0__3, G1)的閘極是耦接 至閘極線 G1,而電晶體 T(S0_1,G1)、T(S0_2, G1)、T(S0_3, G1)的源極是分別耦接至源極線S0_1、S0_2、S0_3。類似 地,晝素1865是耦接至閘極線G1與源極線Sl_l、Sl_2、 Sl_3,而畫素1850是耦接至閘極線G2與源極線S0_1、 S0_2、S0_3,且晝素1875是耦接至閘極線GO與源極線 S1J、Sl_2、Sl_3,又晝素1870是耦接至閘極線G0與源 極線 S0_1、S0_2、S0_3 ◦ ⑩ [00161]每一條閘極線是從顯示器1830的左邊延伸至 右邊,並控制顯示器1830中同一列上的所有畫素,且對於 任一列上的畫素而言,顯示器1830會具有對應的閘極線。 此外,每一條源極線是從顯示器1830的頂邊延伸至底邊, 且顯示器1830具有多條源極線,其中源極線的數量是在任 一列上畫素數量的三倍(亦即一條源極線對應一個畫素的 一個顏色分量)。當顯示器進行操作時,每次僅有一條閘極 線會啟動(active),且在此啟動的閘極線上的所有電晶體會 藉由正向閘極脈衝而呈現導通的狀態,至於在其他閘極線 97 200846750 更可為了顏色質點而配置一個或多個的儲二,貫施例中 存電容是與顏色質點的電容一起充雷,、,二%谷。這些儲 下提供所謂的維持電荷。再者,匯流排:列狀態 可由如紹(A1)或鉻⑼之非透料體所組成。、七泉之材質 [00162]如圖18(f)所示,各列上的電晶體與元 域將顯示器1830切割成許多顏色質點領域,而每個二: 之顏色質點之質點極性便構成西洋棋盤圖案。如前所、、求, 構成西洋棋盤圖案之質點極性是用來增強 里: 邊緣電場。 ’kife的 [㈨163]晝素圖樣1810、182〇的一個 其顏,是因為畫素的第一、第三顏色分== 色分量之間的偏移所導致,所以畫素圖樣181〇、以汕亦適 上的電晶體則會因為接地的非啟動閘極線而〇 1 態。另外,所有的源極線均會同時啟動,而=現斷路的狀 提供影像資料至作動列上的電晶體,其中啟母條源極線會 閘極線所控制。所以根據閘極線與源極線的2列是由啟動 極線又被稱為匯流排線,而源極線亦可盍:作方式,閘 會對液晶電容進行充電至一個特定的灰::貧,線。電壓 而產生色彩。當電晶體在非啟動下,顏色併,藉由濾光片 處於電性隔離的狀態,而能夠維持電場=點的電極便是 晶。然而,寄生漏電是無法避免的,而=終以控制液 流失。對於列數目不多的小尺寸螢幕而士、、i荷將會全部 壓是經常在更新,所以漏電不算是個問^因為各列的電 目較多的大尺寸顯示H而言,各列在兩次=過對於列數 必須專待較長的時間。如此一來,本’、斤的日守刻之間 Ψ ^ -r ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ %某些眚施例中 98 200846750 用三角型的色彩配置(delta type color layout)。相較於傳統 條紋圖案色彩配置(stripe pattern color layout)而言,三角型 態色彩配§又具有較南的影像品質,但卻具有較差的文字顯 示品質。以採用條紋圖案色彩配置之顯示器而言,本發明 之實施例另提供一種新穎的驅動機制以提昇條紋圖案色彩 配置的效果,其中圖案色彩配置可應用圖14-18之晝素圖 樣,而在前述說明中的這些晝素圖樣是採用搭配開關元件 列反轉驅動機制。圖19(a)為依據本發明一實施例使用此新 穎驅動機制之顯示器1900。圖19(a)與圖18(f)類似,其差 別在於提供至某些源極線的訊號會延遲,所以相同的描述 便不再重述。具體而言,延遲之源極訊號SO 2 D、S1 1 D、 —— — _ S1 一3—D是分別施加到源極線SO—2、SI—1、S1—3上。延遲 之源極訊號SO一2—D、S1 一 1 一D、S1—3一D可利用將正常之源 極訊號(未繪示)進行延遲或其他習知電路而達成(如同圖 18(f)之設計)。此延遲的時間等於一次列向更新的時間。在 一實施例之應用中,此延遲之源極訊號可由正常之源極訊 號變化而來,而本實施例無需更改驅動電路與控制器的設 $十’便可應用本發明新颖之驅動機制。在另一實施例之應 用中’延遲之源極訊號是由時間控制器而產生,而本實施 例無需更改驅動電路與其他控制器的設計,便可應用本發 明新穎之驅動機制。此新穎之驅動機制亦於美國專利第 11751469號申請案中詳加揭露,而此由出叩l· Ong.所發 明之申請案標題為『應用於液晶顯示器之低成本開關元件 點反轉驅動機制 Low Cost Switching Element PointThe beginning of the sample (4) Xixi 1 is the application of extended 昼S S••生安安素. All the elements on the same column have the same texture of the particle, but adjacent, especially. The library uses m primary nucleus to have the opposite particle polarity circle: the application of the extended enamel pattern 182 〇 pixel (such as the first / knife set will be configured under the expanded _ _ 182 (four) color - column, that is The second column) The first I first...: prime (such as brother-歹1 1 w, a Le Xingdi two color components. Name week, medium, extended pixel Rlpi (ie the first one of the column ri The color component will be matched with the 弟 桩 桩 4 4 、 、 、 — — — — 彦 彦 彦 彦 彦 彦 彦 彦 彦 彦 员 彦 C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C Will be configured in the application to expand the first 盥 a ( a (such as the first column of a column, that is, the first column) between the four color components. In Figure 18 (4), the extended pixel R2p2 (ie 95 200846750 • column The second color component of the second pixel of R2 will be placed between the first and third color components of the extended element _ R1P2 (ie, the second element of column R1). These columns are horizontally aligned, And interlaced with each other in the vertical direction, such that the third color component of the pixel that applies the extended tilde pattern 1810 and located on the second column is vertically aligned with the application extended tilde pattern 1810 and is located at the first The first color component of the pixel on the column. Similarly, the third color component of the pixel using the extended tilde pattern 1820 and located on the first column is vertically aligned with the application extended tilde pattern 1820 and located on the second column. The first color component of the pixel. Figure 18(e) shows an example of the application of such an arrangement, in which the pixels R1P1, R2P1, R3P, R1P3, R2P3, and R3P3 are applied to the extended pixel pattern 1820, and the pixel R1P2 is used. R2P2 and R3P2 are application extended tilde patterns 1810. [00160] FIG. 18(f) shows a display having source lines S0_1, S0-2, S0-3, Sl_l, Sl_2, Sl_3 and gate lines GO, G1, G2. 1830. In general, the source line labeled SX__Y is the Yth color component for the Xth pixel in any column, and the source line labeled GZ is for the Z column. The source is connected to the source line' and the gate of the transistor is coupled to the gate line, and the drain of the transistor is an electrode coupled to each color dot. For the sake of clarity, the specific transistor can be The transistor T is not formed into a transistor T (SX_Y, GZ), wherein the transistor is coupled to the source line SX_Y and the gate line GZ. The space in Figure 18(f) is limited, and the color dot is labeled as J_K and is different from CD_J_K in other diagrams. However, for consistency, CD_JJC will still be used in the following description. In addition, the electrical connection member is marked as A thick black line. For example, in the pixel 1860 controlled by the gate line G1 and the source lines S0_1, S0_2, S0_3, the transistor T (S0_1, G1) 96 200846750 • The drain is coupled to the color The dot CD_1_3, and the color dot CD_1_3 is coupled to the color dot CD_1_2, and the color dot CD_1_2 is coupled to the color dot CD_1J. Similarly, the drain of the transistor T (S0_2, G1) is coupled - to the color dot CD_2j, and the color dot CD_2" is coupled to the color dot CD_2_2, and the color dot CD_2_2 is coupled to the color dot CD_2_3. The drain of the transistor T (S0_3, G1) is coupled to the color dot CD_3_3, and the color dot CD_3_3 is coupled to the color dot CD_3_2, and the color dot CD_3_2 is coupled to the color dot CD_3__1. Furthermore, the gates of the electric crystals T (S0_1, Gl), T (S0-2, G1), T (S0__3, G1) are coupled to the gate line G1, and the transistors T (S0_1, G1), The sources of T(S0_2, G1) and T(S0_3, G1) are respectively coupled to the source lines S0_1, S0_2, S0_3. Similarly, the pixel 1865 is coupled to the gate line G1 and the source lines S1_1, S1_2, and Sl_3, and the pixel 1850 is coupled to the gate line G2 and the source lines S0_1, S0_2, S0_3, and the pixel 1875 Is coupled to the gate line GO and the source lines S1J, Sl_2, Sl_3, and the memory 1870 is coupled to the gate line G0 and the source lines S0_1, S0_2, S0_3 ◦ 10 [00161] each gate line is From the left to the right of display 1830, and control all pixels on the same column in display 1830, and for any of the pixels on the column, display 1830 will have a corresponding gate line. In addition, each source line extends from the top edge to the bottom edge of the display 1830, and the display 1830 has a plurality of source lines, wherein the number of source lines is three times the number of pixels in any column (ie, one source) The polar line corresponds to a color component of a pixel). When the display is operating, only one gate line will be active at a time, and all the transistors on the gate line that is activated will be turned on by the forward gate pulse, as for other gates. The pole line 97 200846750 can be configured with one or more reservoirs for the color point. The capacitor in the embodiment is filled with the capacitance of the color point, and the second is valley. These stores provide so-called sustain charges. Furthermore, the bus bar: the column state can be composed of a non-permeable body such as Shao (A1) or chromium (9). The material of the seven springs [00162] As shown in Fig. 18(f), the transistors and the meta-domains in each column cut the display 1830 into a plurality of color dot areas, and the polarity of the dots of each of the two color dots constitutes the western ocean. Checkerboard pattern. As before, and so on, the particle polarity that constitutes the checkerboard pattern is used to enhance the inner: fringe electric field. 'kife's [(9) 163] 昼 图 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18电 The appropriate transistor will be in the state of the grounded non-starting gate line. In addition, all of the source lines are activated at the same time, and = the current open circuit provides image data to the transistor on the active column, where the source line of the starting bus is controlled by the gate line. Therefore, according to the gate line and the source line, the two columns are called the bus line, and the source line can also be used to: the gate charges the liquid crystal capacitor to a specific gray: Poor, line. The voltage produces color. When the transistor is not activated, the color is maintained in an electrically isolated state by the filter, and the electrode capable of maintaining the electric field = point is crystal. However, parasitic leakage is unavoidable, and = eventually the control fluid is lost. For small-sized screens with a small number of columns, the i-load will always be updated, so the leakage is not a question. Because the columns of the columns have more large-size displays H, the columns are Twice = too much time must be reserved for the number of columns. As a result, between the day and the day of the Ψ ^ -r ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ % in some cases 98 200846750 with a delta type color layout (delta type color layout). Compared to the traditional stripe pattern color layout, the triangle color has a more souther image quality, but has a poorer text display quality. In the case of a display with a stripe pattern color configuration, an embodiment of the present invention further provides a novel driving mechanism to enhance the effect of the stripe pattern color configuration, wherein the pattern color configuration can be applied to the altar pattern of FIGS. 14-18, and in the foregoing These enamel patterns in the description are based on the column switching inversion driving mechanism. Figure 19 (a) shows a display 1900 using this novel driving mechanism in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 19(a) is similar to Fig. 18(f) except that the signal supplied to some of the source lines is delayed, so the same description will not be repeated. Specifically, the delayed source signals SO 2 D, S1 1 D, —— _ S1 3-1D are applied to the source lines SO-2, SI-1, S1-3, respectively. The delayed source signals SO1-2D, S1-1D, S1-3-3D can be achieved by delaying the normal source signal (not shown) or other conventional circuits (like Figure 18(f). ))) The time for this delay is equal to the time at which the column is updated. In an embodiment of the application, the delayed source signal can be changed by the normal source signal, and the present embodiment can apply the novel driving mechanism of the present invention without changing the driving circuit and the controller. In another embodiment, the 'delayed source signal is generated by the time controller, and the present embodiment can apply the novel driving mechanism of the present invention without changing the design of the driver circuit and other controllers. This novel driving mechanism is also disclosed in detail in the application of U.S. Patent No. 1,751, 469, the entire disclosure of which is hereby incorporated herein by reference in its entire entire entire entire entire entire entire entire entire entire entire entire entire- Low Cost Switching Element Point

Inversion Driving Scheme for Liquid Crystal Display』。 99 200846750 [ΓΠ]Γ19⑻所示,#以延心源極訊號驅動時, 早一畫素中的顏色分量便會重新校正 個畫素1950、1955、1%0、1965是繪示^二而口,四 每個晝素的範圍是用陰影標示,而此险1900中。 19⑻,且無任何功能上的意義。晝素於解釋圖 1 r*i\ ^ 包括二個電晶體 T(S〇—⑹)、T(SG_2,G2)、T(SG—3 G1) 事 是圍繞電晶體’且電晶體是_接至這、\件衣置&amp;域 範圍)的電極。 〜顏色貝點(陰影背景 [00165]晝素1950之第一顏色分 CD—1_1、CD—12、CD J 3,且這二個顏色質點 右左鋸齒圖案。晝f 195G之顏色^貝點是排列成左 齊、垂直鄰接且位於由元件裝置是水平對 丁⑼一⑹)上方。晝素㈣之顏色‘:^之電+晶體 耦接至電晶體T(SG—1,G!)之汲極。藉由、、 的,極是 點CD_1_3的電極,書辛旦素1950之顏色質 G1)^^ ^ CD 1】的電極也耦接旦素1950之顏色質點 之第二顏色Μ:;體 ⑷之心:且^:有二個顏色質點⑶丄1、 案。-晝素_之顏色=1 色排列成左右左鑛齒圖 =⑽衣置區域圍繞之電晶體耶 素㈣之顏色質點CD—2」的電極是祕至電曰^ 1( , f°11 ^.1. CD 2 T ; %極’畫素1950之顏备柄一一 &quot;v貝”沾CD—2—2的電極亦輕接至電晶 100 200846750 體T(s〇〜2,G2)之汲極。藉由晝素1950之顏色質點CD $卜 CD—2〜2的電極,晝素195〇之顏色質點CDj 3 搞 電晶體聊―2,G2)之汲極。畫素195G之、第三二色分 里八有二個顏色質點CD—3—1、CD—3_2、CD」3,且這此 匕色質,排列成左右左鋸齒圖案。晝素195〇之顏色匕 H是 1^對齊、垂直鄰接且位於由元件裝置區域圍繞 日日體T(S0一3,G1)上方。晝素1950之顏色質點CD 3 3Inversion Driving Scheme for Liquid Crystal Display. 99 200846750 [ΓΠ]Γ19(8), when #Driven by the source signal, the color component in the early picture will be recalibrated. The pixels 1950, 1955, 1%0, 1965 are painted. The range of each of the four elements is indicated by a shadow, and this risk is 1900. 19 (8), and without any functional significance. Figure 1 r*i\ ^ includes two transistors T (S〇-(6)), T(SG_2, G2), T(SG-3 G1), which is around the transistor 'and the transistor is _ The electrode to this, \"Apparel &amp; field range". ~ color shell point (shadow background [00165] the first color of the prime 1950 is divided into CD-1_1, CD-12, CD J 3, and the two color points are right-left zigzag pattern. 昼f 195G color ^ bee point is arranged It is left-aligned, vertically adjacent, and located above the horizontal device pair (9)-(6) by the component device. The color of the 昼素(四) ‘:^ electric + crystal is coupled to the bungee of the transistor T (SG-1, G!). By means of , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Heart: and ^: There are two color points (3) 丄 1, case. - 昼素_的色=1 color arranged in left and right left ore tooth map = (10) the area around the coating area of the crystal yele (4) color point CD-2" electrode is secret to electric 曰 ^ 1 ( , f ° 11 ^ .1. CD 2 T ; % pole's 1950's face handle one by one &quot;v shell" dipped CD-2-2 electrode is also lightly connected to the crystal 100 200846750 body T (s〇~2, G2) The bungee of the 950. In the third two-color sub-eight, there are two color dots CD-3, 1, CD-3_2, CD"3, and the color of the enamel is arranged in a left-right left zigzag pattern. The color 昼 H of the 昼 〇 〇 是 is 1 aligned, vertically adjacent, and is located above the Japanese body T (S0 - 3, G1) by the component device area.昼素 1950 color dot CD 3 3

^ ^ ^ T(S〇^3^G1^^^ ° * t ^ 1950 =貝點CD—3—3的電極,晝素195〇之顏色質點CD」; &gt;電極亦耦接至電晶體T(S〇—3,Gl)之汲極。藉由畫素1950 點顏色質點CD—3—2、CD」」的電極,晝素195()之顏色質 ♦ CD—3—1的電極也耦接至電晶體t(s〇—3,gi)之汲極。晝 扳1960應用與晝素195〇相同的晝素圖樣,所以其内部連 髀方式均相同’於此便不再重述。相較於晝素195〇的電晶 〜T(S0—1,G1)、T(S0—2,G2)、T(S0—3,G1),畫素 1960 包括 目對應 ^ 電晶體 T(s〇 l G〇)、T(s〇—2 G1)、T(s〇 3 G2)。 =者,㊄晝素1950為正質點極性圖案時,畫素196〇為負 舄點極性圖案。 、 v [00^66]如圖19(a)所示,晝素195〇之三個顏色分量是 =直對背,而得以排除圖18(f)色彩對齊的問題。然而,為 〜成西洋棋盤圖案,第二顏色分量的極性必須與第一、第 色刀=的極性相反。此外,第二顏色分量之電晶體是 &gt;、第 第二顏色分量之電晶體位於不同列上。再者,某 列上所有開關元件(共享同一條閘極線)具有相同的極 生,而相郇列上所有開關元件便具有相反的極性。如此一 101 200846750 來’顯示ϋ測可採關關元件列反轉.辕動機制以使顏色 質點的極性構成西洋棋翻案,進而使每㈣色質點產生 四個液晶領域(LC domains)。 、 = 67]晝们955、1965是應用不同的畫素圖案而有 別於晝素、觸。晝素1955之第1色分量呈有三 個顏色質B CD丄卜CD丄2、CD丄3,且這㈣色㈣ 是排列成左右左鋸齒圖案。晝素1955之麵色質點CD 】^ ^ ^ T(S〇^3^G1^^^ ° * t ^ 1950 = electrode of the CD-3-3, the color point of the 〇 195 CD CD"; &gt; the electrode is also coupled to the transistor T (S〇—3, Gl) bungee. With the electrode of 1950 dot color dot CD—3—2, CD”, the color of the halogen 195() is also coupled to the electrode of CD-3-1. Connected to the bungee of the transistor t(s〇—3, gi). The 1960 application uses the same elemental pattern as the 昼素〇 ,, so the internal connection method is the same. 'There is no restatement here. Compared with the ICP 〇 T 电 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T l G〇), T(s〇—2 G1), T(s〇3 G2). = When the pigment is in the positive dot polarity pattern, the pixel 196〇 is the negative defect polarity pattern. 00^66] As shown in Fig. 19(a), the three color components of the pixel 195 are = straight to the back, and the problem of color alignment of Fig. 18(f) is excluded. However, for the western checkerboard pattern, The polarity of the second color component must be opposite to the polarity of the first and second color knife =. In addition, the transistor of the second color component is &gt; The transistors of the second color component are located on different columns. Furthermore, all switching elements (shared the same gate line) in a column have the same polarity, and all switching elements on the phase column have opposite polarities. Such a 101 200846750 to 'show the speculation of the closed component column reversal. The turbulence mechanism to make the polarity of the color particle constitute a chess turn, and then produce four LC domains for each (four) color point. 67] We used 955 and 1965 to apply different pixel patterns and different from the elements. The first color component of 昼素1955 has three color qualities: B CD丄CD丄2, CD丄3, and this (4) Color (4) is arranged in a zigzag pattern of left and right left. The color point of the plain 1955 is CD 】

是水平對齊、垂直鄰接且位於由元件I置區域圍繞之電晶 體T(S1_1,G2)下方。畫素1955之顏色質點CD—^的電極 是耦接至電晶體T(S1—1,G2)之汲極。藉由晝素1955之顏色 質點CD 一 1—1的電極,畫素1955之顏色質點'cd i 2的'電 極亦耦接至電晶體T(S1—1,G2)之汲極。藉由畫素19%之顏 色質點CD一1 一1、CD〜1一2的電極,晝素1955之顏色質點 CD一 1 一3的電極也耦接至電晶體T(S1j,G2)之汲極。畫素 1955之第二顏色分量具有三個顏色質點cD 2 1、 CD一2一2 CD一2一3 ’且這些顏色夤點疋排列成左右左鑛齒圖 案。畫素1955之顏色質點CD一2一3是水平對齊、垂直鄰接 且位於由元件裝置區域圍繞之電晶體T(S1—2,G〗)上方。書 素1955之顏色質點CD一2一3的電極是耦接至電晶體 丁(SI—2,G1)之汲極。藉由畫素1955之顏色質點CD〜2 3的 電極,晝素1955之顏色質點CD一2一2的電極亦耦接〜至電晶 體T(S1 一2,G1)之汲極。藉由畫素!955之顏色質點CD 2 2、 CD一2一3的電極,晝素1955之顏色質點CD〜2J的電極也 耦接至電晶體T(S1〜2,G1)之汲極。晝素1955之第三顏色分 量具有三個顏色質點CD一3j、⑶一3一2、CD」3,且這此 102 200846750 顏色貝”、、占s疋排列成左右左鑛齒圖案。晝素i955之顏色質點 CD:3/触疋水平胃齊、垂直鄰接且位於由元件裝置區域圍繞 IXSL3,G2)上方。晝素1955之顏色質點⑶—3—】 之二,Z轉接至電晶體T(S1、3,G2)之;及極。藉由晝素1955 之顏色質點CD 3 1沾+枚4 的電極亦耦接晝素1955之顏色質點CD-3-2 ^ 至免晶體T(S1J,G2)之汲極。藉由晝素1955 點⑶〜3〜1、CD—3J的電極,畫素1955之顏色質 素196~5座的電極也耦接至電晶體T(S1 -3,G2)之汲極。畫 趣方式μΓ用-舁晝素1955相同的晝素圖樣,所以其内部連 發τ/si =相同,於此便不再重述。相較於晝素1955的電晶 再者 ^ 電晶體 T(S1-IG1)、T(S1—2,G0)、T(S1 一3,G1)。 f點極=^955為負f點極性圖案時,晝素刚為正 垂直1二68]如,、19⑷所*,畫素1955之三個顏色分量是 A、n、a 而仵以排除圖18(〇色彩對齊的問題。如前所述, 第ιΓ年棋盤圖案’第二顏色分量的極性必須與第一、 弗二顏色分量的極性相反。 圖19师會示一種擴展晝素圖樣191〇(即為圖 〜I950)之正質點極性圖案。在晝素1910中,第 复ί此分量具有三個顏色質點CD-1—1、CD-1-2、CD-1 -3, 一 色質點是排列成左右左鑛歯圖案。元件裝置區域 一 ^水平對齊、垂直鄰接(此處所稱垂直 鄰接尚間隔一 方:p卩^點間距VDS的距離)且位於顏色質點CD一 1 一3下 胃元件SE—1是位於元件裝置區域DCA—},其中顏 103 200846750 色質點CD一 1—3的電極是耦接至開關元件SEj,而顏色質 點CD_1_2的電極是藉由顏色質點CD」」❸電極而编接至 開關兀件心,且顏色質點CD—1—1的電極是藉由顏色質 J CD-1-2 CD—1—3的電極而麵接至開關元件1。畫素 1910之苐二顏色分量具有三個顏色質點CD_2_1、 安—二_ CD-2-3,且這些顏色質點是排列成左右左鋸齒圖 木。弟二顏色分量是配置成與第一顏色分量垂直對齊,並It is horizontally aligned, vertically adjacent, and located below the dielectric crystal T (S1_1, G2) surrounded by the region of the element I. The electrode of the color dot CD-^ of the pixel 1955 is coupled to the drain of the transistor T (S1-1, G2). The electrode of the color dot 'cd i 2 of the pixel 1955 is also coupled to the drain of the transistor T (S1-1, G2) by the color of the 1955 color pixel CD 1-1. The electrode of the color point CD-1 to 3 of the halogen 1955 is also coupled to the transistor T (S1j, G2) by means of an electrode of 19% of the color dot CD-1, CD~1~2. pole. The second color component of the pixel 1955 has three color dots cD 2 1 , CD 2 2 2 CD 2 2 3 ' and these color dots are arranged in a left and right left ore pattern. The color dot CD 2-3 of the pixel 1955 is horizontally aligned, vertically adjacent, and located above the transistor T (S1 - 2, G) surrounded by the component device region. The electrode of the color point CD 2-1 of the book 1955 is coupled to the drain of the transistor D (SI-2, G1). By the pixel of the color point CD~2 3 of the pixel of 1955, the electrode of the color point CD of the halogen 1955 is also coupled to the drain of the electric crystal T (S1-2, G1). With pixels! The color of the 955 color dot CD 2 2, the CD one 2 to 3 electrode, the electrode of the color point CD~2J of the halogen 1955 is also coupled to the drain of the transistor T (S1~2, G1). The third color component of the 昼素1955 has three color points CD-3j, (3) 3-12, CD"3, and this 102 200846750 color shell", s 疋 疋 arranged into left and right left ore pattern. I955 color dot CD: 3 / touch level horizontal stomach, vertical adjacent and located above the component device area around IXSL3, G2). Alizarin 1955 color point (3) - 3 -] second, Z transfer to transistor T (S1, 3, G2); and pole. The electrode of CD 3 1 + 4 is also coupled to the color point CD-3-2 ^ of the Alizarin 1955 to the free crystal T (S1J) , G2) bungee. With the electrodes of 1955 points (3) ~ 3~1, CD-3J, the electrodes of the color quality 196~5 of the pixel 1955 are also coupled to the transistor T (S1 -3, G2) The bungee of the painting method is the same enamel pattern as the 舁昼素1955, so the internal burst τ/si = the same, so it will not be repeated here. Compared with the crystal crystallization of the 昼素1955 ^ Electron T (S1-IG1), T (S1 - 2, G0), T (S1 - 3, G1). f point pole = ^ 955 is a negative f point polarity pattern, the element is just vertical 1 2, 68],, 19 (4) *, the three color components of the pixel 1955 A, n, a and 仵 to exclude Figure 18 (the problem of color alignment. As mentioned earlier, the polarity of the second color component of the 1st year of the checkerboard pattern must be opposite to the polarity of the first and second color components. Figure 19 The teacher will show a positive particle polarity pattern of the extended morpheme pattern 191 〇 (that is, the figure ~ I950). In the 昼素 1910, the 复 ί this component has three color dots CD-1—1, CD-1-2 , CD-1 -3, one color point is arranged in the left and right left ore pattern. The component device area is horizontally aligned and vertically adjacent (here, the vertical adjacency is still separated by one: p卩^ the distance of the point VDS) and is located in the color The dot CD-1 1-3 lower stomach element SE-1 is located in the component device area DCA_}, wherein the electrode of the 10310346750 chromaticity point CD 1-3 is coupled to the switching element SEj, and the electrode of the color dot CD_1_2 is borrowed. It is connected to the switch core by the color dot CD"" electrode, and the electrode of the color dot CD_1-1 is connected to the switch by the electrode of the color quality CDD-1-2 CD-1 -3 Element 1. The two color components of the pixel 1910 have three color points CD_2_1, An-II_C D-2-3, and these color dots are arranged in left and right left zigzag patterns. The second color component is configured to be vertically aligned with the first color component, and

水平^偏移第二顏色分量,且偏移的距離為一個顏色質 =的亡度加上—個水平質點間距HDS,以使得第—顏色分 置與第:顏色分量間隔一個水平質點間距。元件裝置區域 DCA-2是水平對齊、垂直鄰接且位於顏色質點CD_2_1上 方:開關元件SE—2是位於元件裝置區域DCA_2,一其令顏 質點CD—2—1的電極是耦接至開關元件SE—2,而顏色質 =CD一2—2的電極是藉由顏色質點cd—2一 1的電極而耦接至 J關兀件SE—2,且顏色質點CD—2」的電極是藉由顏色質 點CD又1、CD—2—2的電極而叙接至開關元件SE 2。佥 1910 ^ ^ ^ ~ ^ C &lt;弟二顏色分量具有三個顏色質點CD_3J、 3-3,且這些顏色質點是排列成左右左鋸齒圖 :弟二顏色分量是配置成與第二顏色分量垂直對齊,並 右偏移第二顏色分量—個顏色質點的寬度加上-個 斟=貝點間距HDS的距離。元件裝置區域DCA—3是水平 垂直鄰接且位於顏色質點CD-3-3下方。開關元件 是位於元件裝置區域DCA一3,其中顏色質點CD_、3 的,極是耦接至開關元件SE_3,而顏色質點⑶3 2的電 極是藉由顏色質點CD_3—3的電極而耦接至開關元件 104 200846750 Ϊ33,2且Μ1的電極是藉由顏色質點 〜二的電極而耦接至開關元件SE_3。 是用於所述,由質點極性所構成的西洋褀盤圖案 =:之正;=^ 以及顏色二口 一 口貝巴貝點CD—2—1、CD—2—2、CD 2 3且古备批 性H安圖19(c)、、、日不旦素圖樣1910-之負質點極 CD lVCDi?l|7t# ^ 'SE-3 CD」-1、CDJ-2、CD-l—3、CD丄!、CD 3 2、CD 3 3 ^D1½/Γn#&quot;^,,&quot;,,,SE~2 -2-2、CD_2_3具有正極性,並標示為”+„。 [00171]圖19⑷緣示一種擴展晝素圖樣_(即為圖 19(a)之晝,1965)之正質點極性圖案。在晝素192〇中,第 一顏色分量具有三個顏色質點。!)」」^!)」」、^^^ 且這些顏色質點是排列成左右左鋸齒圖案。元件裝置區域 DCA—1是水平對齊、垂直鄰接(此處所_直鄰接尚間隔一 個垂直質點間距VDS的距離)且位於顏色質點CD ^ !上 方。開關元件SE一 1是位於元件裝置區域DCAj,其中顏 色質點CD一 1 一1的電極是耦接至開關元件SEj,而顏色質 點CD—1—2白勺電極是藉由顏色質點⑶」」的電極而輕接至 開關元件SE一 1 ,且顏色質點CD—丨一3的電極是藉由顏色質 點CD一1一1、CD一 1 一2的電極而耦接至開關元件SEj。晝素 1920之第二顏色分量具有三個顏色質點cD 2 !、 105 200846750 ^一2:2^、CD〜2〜3,且這些顏色質點是排列成左右左鋸齒圖 案二第二顏色=量是配置成與第一顏色分量垂直對齊,並 水平=右偏移第二顏色分量,且偏移的距離為一個顏色質 f的f度加上-個水平質點間距HDS,以使得第一顏色务 量與第1顏色分量間隔—個水平質點間距。元件裝置區域 DCA—2疋水平對齊、垂直鄰接且位於顏色質點cD—2—3下 方二開關兀件SE一2是位於元件裝置區域dCA一2,其中顏 色質點CD一2一3的電極是耦接至開關元件SE—2,而顏色質 點CD一2—2的電極是藉由顏色質點CD一2」的電極而耦接至 歼1關元件SE—2,且顏色質點CD—2—!的電極是藉由顏色質 點CD 一2—2、CD—2 一 3的電極而耦接至開關元件SE—2。畫素 1920之第三顏色分量具有三個顏色質點、 CD—ϋ、CD—3—3,且這些顏色質點是排列成左右左鑛齒圖 案、。第二顏色分量是配置成與第二顏色分量垂直對齊,並 水平向右偏移第二顏色分量一個顏色質點的寬度加上一個 水平質點間距HDS的距離。元件裝置區域DCA—3是水平 對齊、垂直鄰接且位於顏色質點CD—3j上方。―開關元件 SE—3是位於元件裝置區域DCA一3,其中顏色質點 的電極是耦接至開關元件SE一3,而顏色質點CD—3—2的電 極疋藉由顏色質點CD—3一3的電極而耦接至開關元件 SE一3 ’且顏色質點CD一3一3的電極是藉由顏色質點 一 1、CD—3—2的電極而麵接至開關元件3。 [00172]如前所述,由質點極性所構成的西洋棋盤圖案 是用於增強每個顏色質點的邊緣電場。圖19(d)繪示^素= 樣1920+之正質點極性圖案。亦即,開關元件SE } 106 200846750 以及顏色質點 CD 11、CD 1 2、CD 1 3、CD 3 1、 CD-3-2、CD—3—3具有正極性,並標示為’’+’,,且開關元件 SE—2以及顏色質點CD—2一1、CD_2—2、CD一2—3具有負極 性’並標示為。圖19(e)繪示畫素圖樣1920-之負質點極 性圖案。亦即,開關元件SE j、SE—3以及顏色質點 CD一 1—1、CD—12、CD—1—3、CD—3—1、CD—3—2、CD 3 3 具有負極性,並標示為,,_,,,且開關元件SE—2以及顏色質 點CD—2_1、CD—2—2、CD)」具有正極性,並標示為,5+,,。 [00173] 本發明之許多實施例可製作為2·2英对 QVGA240x320解析度規格之彩色顯示器,而此顯示器是採 用開關元件列反轉驅動機制。此外,彩色晝素的尺寸是高 141μιη且寬141μηι。每個晝素可利用彩色濾光材料而分成 三個顏色分量(即紅、綠與藍色)。如此一來,QVGA顯示 器在水平方向的解析度為720(240x3)個顏色分量,且在垂 直方向為320個顏色分量。每個顏色分量的理論尺寸是寬 47μιη且高141μιη,不過,有部份區域是要用於設置為元件 裝置區域。此外,顯示器在每列上具有720個開關元件, 並在每行上具有320個開關元件,以使開關元件的總數量 為720x320。元件裝置區域是由開關元件(薄膜電晶體)與儲 存電容所組成,且元件裝置區域的理論尺寸是寬47μηι且 高38·0μιη。然而,考量垂直與水平質點間距的因素後,元 件裝置區域的實際尺寸是寬41 μ m且高3 5 · 0 μ m。 [00174] 在顯示面板的製作過程中,可使用默克公司所 生產的垂直配向液晶,如型號MLC-6884之具有負介電異 向性特性之垂直配向液晶。日本日產化學工業株式會社所 107 200846750 生產型號SE_5300之聚亞醯胺可用於達成無預傾角的垂直 液晶配向效果。相較於其他採用突起物或是銦錫氧化物溝 槽幾何形狀之多域垂直配向液晶顯示器而言,本發明之面 板的製作過程是無需進行摩擦配向的步驟,且上下基板在 對組時亦無需高精準的對位。此外,在不同顏色質點與元 件裝置區域之間的連接導線(可為銦錫氧化物材質)的寬度 為3μπι,而上下偏振片是貼附於面板上,且一般的液晶層 間距(cell gap)約略介於 2·0μπι〜3·5μπι。 [00175] 在本發明之一個特定實施例中,顯示器是應用 圖18(a)-18(f)之畫素圖樣、質點極性圖案與晝素排列方式, 其中每個顏色分量示分割成三個顏色質點。如此一來,每 個顏色質點的理論尺寸是寬47μπι且高34·3μιη。然而,考 量垂直與水平質點間距的因素後,元件裝置區域的實際尺 寸是寬41μπι且高31.3μπι。在5伏特的外加電壓下,此顯 示器可達到高於600對比度之顯示效果。再者,以使用多 域垂直配向廣視角偏振片之顯示器而言,其具有非常寬的 視角,且各方向區域的視角均是大於士85° 。此外,以使用 一般線性偏振片且不含多域垂直配向廣視角光學補償膜之 顯示器而言,其水平或垂直方向區域的視角是大於土 85° , 而兩個對角線方向區域的視角亦大於士 50° 。另外,相較於 線偏振片而言,圓偏振片可增加為兩倍的光穿透率。亦即, 使用多域垂直配向圓偏振片之顯示器可同時提升光穿透率 與視角。 [00176] 儘管依據本發明之多域垂直配向液晶顯示器 可於較低製作成本下而具有廣視角,本發明之某些實施例 108 200846750 • 仍會以光學補償的方式進一步提升視角。舉例而言,本發 . 明之某些實施例是採用具有光軸是垂直指向(vertical ’ oriented)的負雙折射光學補償膜以提升視角,其中此光學 • 補償膜可貼附於上基板、下基板或兩者。其他的實施例可 採用具有單轴以及雙軸之光學補償膜,其中此補償膜可具 有正雙折射或負雙折射性質。再者,包含前述組合之多層 膜亦可被使用於顯示器上。其他實施例亦有使用圓偏振片 以同時提升光穿透率與視角。 • [00177]在本發明不同的實施例中,揭露出許多新穎的 結構與方式以使得無需利用基板上的實體形貌,即可製作 出多域垂直配向液晶顯示器。雖然本發明已以較佳實施例 揭露如上,然其並非用以限定本發明,任何熟習此技藝者, 在不脫離本發明之精神和範圍内,當可作些許之更動與潤 飾,特別是如其他形式的晝素定義、質點極性圖案、畫素 圖樣、極性、邊緣電場、電極、基板等等。因此本發明之 保護範圍當視後附之申請專利範圍所界定者為準。 【圖式簡單說明】 [0016] 圖1(a)〜1(c)為習知之單一領域垂直配向液晶顯 示器之畫素的示意圖。 [0017] 圖2為習知之多域垂直配向液晶顯示器之晝素 的示意圖。 [0018] 圖3(a)-3(b)為依據本發明一實施例之多域垂直 配向液晶顯示器之晝素的示意圖。 [0019] 圖4(a)-4(c)為依據本發明一實施例之畫素圖樣 109 200846750 的示意圖。 [0020] 圖5(a)-5(c)為依據本發明一實施例之質點極性 圖案與液晶顯示裝置的示意圖。 [0021] 圖5(d)-5(f)為依據本發明一實施例之質點極性 圖案與液晶顯不裝置的不意圖。 [0022] 圖6(a)-6(c)為依據本發明一實施例之質點極性 圖案與液晶顯不裝置的不意圖。 [0023] 圖6(d)-6(f)為依據本發明一實施例之質點極性 圖案與液晶顯示裝置的示意圖。 [0024] 圖7(a)-7(c)為依據本發明一實施例之晝素圖 樣、質點極性圖案與液晶顯示裝置的示意圖。 [0025] 圖7(d)-7(f)為依據本發明一實施例之畫素圖 樣、質點極性圖案與液晶顯示裝置的示意圖。 [0026] 圖8(a)-8(c)為依據本發明一實施例之晝素圖 樣、質點極性圖案與液晶顯示裝置的示意圖。 [0027] 圖8(d)-8(f)為依據本發明一實施例之晝素圖 樣、質點極性圖案與液晶顯示裝置的示意圖。 [0028] 圖9(a)-9(c)為依據本發明一實施例之晝素圖 樣、質點極性圖案與液晶顯示裝置的示意圖。 [0029] 圖9(d)-9(f)為依據本發明一實施例之畫素圖 樣、質點極性圖案與液晶顯示裝置的示意圖。 [0030] 圖10(a)_10(d)為依據本發明一實施例之晝素圖 樣與質點極性圖案的示意圖。 [0031] 圖ll(a)-U(b)為依據本發明一實施例之晝素圖 樣與質點極性圖案的示意圖。 110 200846750 [0032] 圖12(a)-12(c)為依據本發明一實施例之晝素圖 樣、質點極性圖案與液晶顯示裝置的示意圖。 [0033] 圖12(d)-12(f)為依據本發明一實施例之畫素圖 樣、質點極性圖案與液晶顯示裝置的示意圖。 - [0034] 圖13(a)為依據本發明一實施例之擴展晝素圖樣 的示意圖。 [0035] 圖13(b)-13(f)為依據本發明不同實施例之應用 多種擴展畫素圖樣之液晶顯示器的示意圖。 [0036] 圖14(a)為依據本發明一實施例之擴展晝素圖樣 的示意圖。 一 [0037]圖14(b)為應用多種擴展畫素圖樣於單一液晶顯 示器上的示意圖。 、、 一 [0038]圖15為依據本發明一實施例之擴展晝素圖樣的 示意圖。 [0039] 圖16為依據本發明一實施例之擴展晝素圖樣 示意圖。 7 [0040] 圖17(a)_17(d)為依據本發明不同實施例之 擴展畫素圖樣的示意圖。 [〇〇41]圖17(e)為應用多種擴展晝素圖樣於單一液 不器上的示意圖。 /、、、只 [0042]圖18(a)_18(b)為依據本發明不同實施例之 擴展畫素圖樣的示意圖。 ^ [0043]圖18(c)-18(d)為依據本發明不同實施例之多藉 擴展晝素目樣的示意圖。 [〇〇44]圖18(e)-18(f)為應用多種擴展晝素圖樣於單— 111 200846750 液晶顯示器上的示意圖。 [0045] 圖19(a)為應用多種擴展晝素圖樣於單一液晶顯 示器上的示意圖。 [0046] 圖19(b)-19(c)為依據本發明不同實施例之擴展 畫素圖樣與元件裝置區域的示意圖。 [0047] 圖19(d)-19(e)為依據本發明不同實施例之擴展 晝素圖樣與元件裝置區域的示意圖。 【主要元件符號說明】 100 :垂直配向液晶顯示器 105、205 :第一偏振片 110、210 :第一基板 120、220 ••第一電極 125、225 :第一配向層 130、235、237 :液晶 140、240 :第二配向層 145、245 :第二電極 150、250 :第二基板 155、255 :第二偏振片The horizontal ^ offsets the second color component, and the offset distance is a color quality = the degree of death plus a horizontal particle spacing HDS, such that the first color component is spaced from the first: color component by a horizontal dot spacing. The component device region DCA-2 is horizontally aligned, vertically adjacent and located above the color dot CD_2_1: the switching element SE-2 is located in the component device region DCA_2, and the electrode of the face 102-1 is coupled to the switching device SE -2, and the electrode of color quality = CD 2-1 is coupled to the J element SE-2 by the electrode of the color dot cd-2, and the electrode of the color dot CD-2" The color dot CD 1 and the CD-2-2 electrode are connected to the switching element SE 2 .佥1910 ^ ^ ^ ~ ^ C &lt; brother two color components have three color points CD_3J, 3-3, and these color points are arranged in left and right left zigzag: the second color component is configured to be perpendicular to the second color component Align and right offset the second color component - the width of a color dot plus - 斟 = the distance of the dot spacing HDS. The component device area DCA-3 is horizontally vertically adjacent and located below the color dot CD-3-3. The switching element is located in the component device area DCA-3, wherein the color dots CD_, 3 are coupled to the switching element SE_3, and the color dot (3) 32 electrode is coupled to the switch by the electrode of the color dot CD_3-3 Element 104 200846750 Ϊ33,2 and the electrode of Μ1 is coupled to switching element SE_3 by an electrode of color dot ~2. It is used for the description of the Western 褀 图案 图案 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Batch H Antu 19(c),,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, CD丄!, CD 3 2, CD 3 3 ^D11⁄2/Γn#&quot;^,,&quot;,,,SE~2 -2-2, CD_2_3 has positive polarity and is marked as "+„. [00171] Fig. 19(4) shows a positive dot polar pattern of an extended morpheme pattern _ (i.e., Fig. 19(a), 1965). In Alizarin 192, the first color component has three color dots. !)""^!)"", ^^^ and these color points are arranged in a left and right zigzag pattern. The component device area DCA-1 is horizontally aligned, vertically adjacent (here, the distance between adjacent vertical dot spacings VDS) is above the color dot CD ^ ! The switching element SE-1 is located in the component device region DCAj, wherein the electrode of the color dot CD-1 is coupled to the switching element SEj, and the electrode of the color dot CD_1-2 is by the color dot (3)" The electrodes are lightly connected to the switching element SE-1, and the electrodes of the color dot CD-丨3 are coupled to the switching element SEj by the electrodes of the color dots CD-1, CD-1. The second color component of the prime 1920 has three color points cD 2 !, 105 200846750 ^ a 2: 2 ^, CD ~ 2 ~ 3, and these color dots are arranged in left and right left zigzag pattern 2 second color = amount is Configuring to be vertically aligned with the first color component, and horizontally = right offsetting the second color component, and the offset distance is f degrees of a color quality f plus - a horizontal particle spacing HDS, such that the first color traffic Interval with the first color component - a horizontal particle spacing. The component device area DCA-2 is horizontally aligned, vertically adjacent, and located below the color dot cD-2-3. The two switch components SE-2 are located in the component device region dCA-2, wherein the color dot CD-22-3 electrode is coupled. Connected to the switching element SE-2, and the electrode of the color dot CD 2-1 is coupled to the 关1 off element SE-2 by the electrode of the color dot CD-2", and the color dot CD-2-! The electrodes are coupled to the switching element SE-2 by electrodes of color dots CD-2-2, CD-2-3. The third color component of the 1920 has three color points, CD-ϋ, CD-3—3, and these color points are arranged in left and right left ore patterns. The second color component is a distance configured to be vertically aligned with the second color component and horizontally offset to the right by the width of one color dot of the second color component plus a horizontal dot pitch HDS. The component device area DCA-3 is horizontally aligned, vertically adjacent, and located above the color dot CD-3j. ―The switching element SE-3 is located in the component device area DCA-3, wherein the electrode of the color dot is coupled to the switching element SE-3, and the electrode of the color dot CD-3-2 is by the color dot CD-3-3 The electrode is coupled to the switching element SE-3' and the electrode of the color dot CD-3-3 is surface-contacted to the switching element 3 by the electrodes of the color dot-1 and the CD-3-2. [00172] As previously mentioned, the checkerboard pattern consisting of the polarity of the dots is a fringe electric field for enhancing the color point of each color. Fig. 19(d) shows a positive dot polarity pattern of 素+ 1920+. That is, the switching element SE } 106 200846750 and the color dots CD 11 , CD 1 2, CD 1 3, CD 3 1 , CD-3-2, CD-3-3 have positive polarity and are labeled as ''+', And the switching element SE-2 and the color dot CD-2, CD_2-2, CD-2-3 have a negative polarity' and are marked as. Fig. 19(e) shows the negative dot polar pattern of the pixel pattern 1920-. That is, the switching elements SE j, SE-3 and the color dots CD-1, CD-12, CD-1, CD-3, CD-3-2, CD33 have negative polarity, and Marked as,, _,,, and the switching element SE-2 and the color dot CD-2_1, CD-2-2, CD) have positive polarity and are labeled as 5+,. [00173] Many embodiments of the present invention can be fabricated as a color display of a 2⁄2 inch to QVGA 240x320 resolution specification, and this display employs a switching element column inversion driving mechanism. Further, the size of the colored halogen is 141 μm high and 141 μη wide. Each element can be divided into three color components (i.e., red, green, and blue) using a color filter material. As a result, the QVGA display has a resolution of 720 (240 x 3) color components in the horizontal direction and 320 color components in the vertical direction. The theoretical size of each color component is 47 μm wide and 141 μm high, however, some areas are intended to be used as the component device area. In addition, the display has 720 switching elements per column and 320 switching elements per line such that the total number of switching elements is 720x320. The device device area is composed of a switching element (thin film transistor) and a storage capacitor, and the theoretical size of the device device region is 47 μm wide and 38. 0 μm high. However, considering the factors of the vertical and horizontal particle spacing, the actual size of the component device area is 41 μm wide and 3 5 · 0 μ m high. [00174] In the manufacturing process of the display panel, a vertical alignment liquid crystal produced by Merck, such as a vertical alignment liquid crystal having a negative dielectric anisotropy characteristic of the model MLC-6884, can be used. Nissan Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. 107 200846750 Polyamines of the production model SE_5300 can be used to achieve vertical liquid crystal alignment without pretilt angle. Compared with other multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal displays using protrusions or indium tin oxide trench geometries, the fabrication process of the panel of the present invention does not require the step of rubbing alignment, and the upper and lower substrates are also in the group. No need for high precision alignment. In addition, the width of the connecting wires (which may be indium tin oxide material) between the different color dots and the device device region is 3 μm, and the upper and lower polarizing plates are attached to the panel, and a general liquid crystal layer gap (cell gap) It is approximately between 2·0μπι~3·5μπι. [00175] In a particular embodiment of the invention, the display is applied to the pixel pattern of FIG. 18(a)-18(f), the dot polarity pattern and the pixel arrangement, wherein each color component is divided into three Color dot. As a result, the theoretical size of each color dot is 47 μm wide and 34. 3 μm high. However, considering the factors of the vertical and horizontal dot spacing, the actual size of the component device area is 41 μm wide and 31.3 μm high. At an applied voltage of 5 volts, this display achieves a display contrast of more than 600 contrast. Further, in the case of a display using a multi-domain vertical alignment wide viewing angle polarizing plate, it has a very wide viewing angle, and the viewing angle in each direction region is larger than ±85°. In addition, in a display using a general linear polarizing plate and not including a multi-domain vertical alignment wide viewing angle optical compensation film, the viewing angle of the horizontal or vertical direction region is greater than the earth 85°, and the viewing angles of the two diagonal direction regions are also Greater than ± 50°. In addition, the circularly polarizing plate can be increased to twice the light transmittance as compared with the linear polarizing plate. That is, a display using a multi-domain vertical alignment circular polarizing plate can simultaneously increase light transmittance and viewing angle. [00176] While the multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display in accordance with the present invention can have a wide viewing angle at lower manufacturing costs, certain embodiments of the present invention 108 200846750 • The viewing angle is still further enhanced in an optically compensated manner. For example, some embodiments of the present invention employ a negative birefringent optical compensation film having an optical axis that is vertically 'oriented' to enhance viewing angle, wherein the optical compensation film can be attached to the upper substrate and the lower surface. Substrate or both. Other embodiments may employ an optical compensation film having both uniaxial and biaxial, wherein the compensation film may have positive birefringence or negative birefringence properties. Further, a multilayer film comprising the foregoing combination can also be used on a display. Other embodiments have also used circular polarizers to simultaneously increase light transmittance and viewing angle. • [00177] In various embodiments of the present invention, a number of novel structures and arrangements have been disclosed to enable the fabrication of multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal displays without the need for physical topography on the substrate. While the invention has been described above by way of a preferred embodiment, it is not intended to limit the invention, and may be modified and modified, particularly as such, without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention. Other forms of halogen definition, particle polarity pattern, pixel pattern, polarity, fringe field, electrode, substrate, etc. Therefore, the scope of the invention is defined by the scope of the appended claims. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS [0016] Figs. 1(a) to 1(c) are diagrams showing the pixels of a conventional single-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display. 2 is a schematic diagram of a pixel of a conventional multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display. 3(a)-3(b) are schematic diagrams of a pixel of a multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display according to an embodiment of the invention. 4(a)-4(c) are schematic diagrams of a pixel pattern 109 200846750 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention. 5(a)-5(c) are schematic views showing a dot polarity pattern and a liquid crystal display device according to an embodiment of the present invention. 5(d)-5(f) are schematic views of a dot polarity pattern and a liquid crystal display device in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention. 6(a)-6(c) are schematic views of a dot polarity pattern and a liquid crystal display device according to an embodiment of the present invention. 6(d)-6(f) are schematic diagrams showing a dot polarity pattern and a liquid crystal display device according to an embodiment of the present invention. 7(a)-7(c) are schematic diagrams of a halogen pattern, a dot polarity pattern, and a liquid crystal display device according to an embodiment of the present invention. 7(d)-7(f) are schematic diagrams of a pixel pattern, a dot polarity pattern, and a liquid crystal display device according to an embodiment of the present invention. 8(a)-8(c) are schematic diagrams of a halogen pattern, a dot polarity pattern, and a liquid crystal display device according to an embodiment of the present invention. 8(d)-8(f) are schematic views of a halogen pattern, a dot polarity pattern, and a liquid crystal display device according to an embodiment of the present invention. 9(a)-9(c) are schematic diagrams of a halogen pattern, a dot polarity pattern, and a liquid crystal display device according to an embodiment of the present invention. 9(d)-9(f) are schematic diagrams showing a pixel pattern, a dot polarity pattern, and a liquid crystal display device according to an embodiment of the present invention. 10(a)-10(d) are schematic diagrams of a pixel pattern and a particle polarity pattern according to an embodiment of the present invention. 11(a)-U(b) are schematic views of a halogen pattern and a dot polarity pattern according to an embodiment of the present invention. [0082] FIGS. 12(a)-12(c) are schematic diagrams showing a halogen pattern, a dot polarity pattern, and a liquid crystal display device according to an embodiment of the present invention. 12(d)-12(f) are schematic diagrams showing a pixel pattern, a dot polarity pattern, and a liquid crystal display device according to an embodiment of the present invention. [0034] FIG. 13(a) is a schematic diagram of an expanded pixel pattern in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention. 13(b)-13(f) are schematic diagrams of liquid crystal displays employing a plurality of extended pixel patterns in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention. 14(a) is a schematic diagram of an expanded pixel pattern in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention. [0037] Figure 14 (b) is a schematic diagram of the application of various extended pixel patterns on a single liquid crystal display. [0038] FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of an expanded pixel pattern according to an embodiment of the present invention. 16 is a schematic diagram of an expanded pixel pattern according to an embodiment of the invention. [0040] Figures 17(a)-17(d) are schematic diagrams of expanded pixel patterns in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention. [Fig. 41] Fig. 17(e) is a schematic view showing the application of a plurality of extended morphological patterns on a single liquid. [0042] Figures 18(a)-18(b) are schematic diagrams of extended pixel patterns in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention. [0043] Figures 18(c)-18(d) are schematic diagrams of a multi-borrowing element in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention. [〇〇44] FIGS. 18(e)-18(f) are schematic diagrams showing the application of various extended pixel patterns on the single-111 200846750 liquid crystal display. 19(a) is a schematic diagram of applying a plurality of extended pixel patterns to a single liquid crystal display. 19(b)-19(c) are schematic diagrams showing extended pixel patterns and component device regions in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention. 19(d)-19(e) are schematic diagrams showing an expanded pixel pattern and component device area in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention. [Main component symbol description] 100: Vertical alignment liquid crystal display 105, 205: First polarizing plate 110, 210: First substrate 120, 220 • First electrode 125, 225: First alignment layer 130, 235, 237: Liquid crystal 140, 240: second alignment layer 145, 245: second electrode 150, 250: second substrate 155, 255: second polarizer

172、174、176、272、274、276 :觀 I 200:多域垂直配向液晶顯示器 260 :突起物 300:多域垂直配向液晶顯示器 302、402 :第一偏振片 305、405 :第一基板 112 200846750 • 307 :第一配向層 . 310、320、330、410、420、430、440、1950、1955、 • 1960、1965 :畫素 ‘ 311、32卜331 :第一電極 312、313、322、323、332、333 :液晶 315、325、335 :第二電極 3 5 2 ·弟—配向層 355:第二基板 • 357 :第二偏振片 400、510-、510+、520(520-、520+)、610(610-、610+)、 620(610- 、 610+) 、 710(710- 、 710+) 、 730(730- 、 730+)、 810(810- 、 810+) 、 830(830- 、 830+) 、 910(910- 、 910+)、 930(910·、910+)、1010(1010- 1〇1〇+)、1030(1030·、1030+)、 1110(1110- 、 1110+) 、 1210(1210- 、 1210+) 、 1230(1230-、 1230+)、1310(1310-、1310+)、1410(1410-、1410+)、 1510(1510·、1510+)、1610(1610-、1610+)、1710(1710_、 • 1710+)、1720(1720-、1720+)、1730(1730-、1730+)、 1740(1740-、1740+)、1810(1810-、1810+)、1820(1820-、 1820+)、1910(1910·、1910+)、1920(1920-、1920+):畫素 圖樣 401 :液晶顯示器 408 :電晶體 450、500、550、600、650、750、900、1320、1340、 1400、1900 :顯示器 CD—1—1、CD 1 2、CD 1 3、CD 1 4、CD 1 5、 113 200846750 CD—1—6、CD—2 Jl、CD—2—2、CD—2—3、CD—2 4、CD—2—5、 CD—2—6、CD 3—1、CD—3—2、CD 3—3、CD—3—4、CD—3—5、 CD—3—6、CD—4—卜 CD—4_2、CD—4—3、CD—4—4、CD—4_5、 CD__4_6 :顏色質點172, 174, 176, 272, 274, 276: View I 200: multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display 260: protrusion 300: multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display 302, 402: first polarizing plate 305, 405: first substrate 112 200846750 • 307: first alignment layer. 310, 320, 330, 410, 420, 430, 440, 1950, 1955, • 1960, 1965: pixels '311, 32 331: first electrodes 312, 313, 322, 323, 332, 333: liquid crystal 315, 325, 335: second electrode 3 5 2 · brother - alignment layer 355: second substrate • 357: second polarizing plate 400, 510-, 510+, 520 (520-, 520 +), 610 (610-, 610+), 620 (610-, 610+), 710 (710-, 710+), 730 (730-, 730+), 810 (810-, 810+), 830 ( 830-, 830+), 910 (910-, 910+), 930 (910·, 910+), 1010 (1010- 1〇1〇+), 1030 (1030·, 1030+), 1110 (1110-, 1110+), 1210 (1210-, 1210+), 1230 (1230-, 1230+), 1310 (1310-, 1310+), 1410 (1410-, 1410+), 1510 (1510·, 1510+), 1610 (1610-, 1610+), 1710 (1710_, • 1710+), 1720 (1720-, 1720+), 1730 (1730-, 1730+), 1740 (1740-, 1740+), 18 10 (1810-, 1810+), 1820 (1820-, 1820+), 1910 (1910·, 1910+), 1920 (1920-, 1920+): pixel pattern 401: liquid crystal display 408: transistor 450, 500 , 550, 600, 650, 750, 900, 1320, 1340, 1400, 1900: display CD 1-1, CD 1 2, CD 1 3, CD 1 4, CD 1 5, 113 200846750 CD 1-6, CD-2 Jl, CD-2-2, CD-2-3, CD-2 4, CD-2-5, CD-2-6, CD 3-1, CD-3-2, CD 3-3, CD—3-4—CD—3—5, CD—3—6, CD—4—Bu CD—4_2, CD—4—3, CD—4—4, CD—4_5, CD__4_6: color dots

SE—1、SE—2、SE—3、SE—4 :開關元件 HDS :水平質點間距 VDS :垂直質點間距 GO、G1、G2、G3、G4 :閘極線 S3、S4、S5、S6、S7、S8、SOJ、S0_2、SO」、Sl_l、 Sl_2、Sl_3 :源極線 P(0,1)、P(l,l)、P(0,0)、P(1,0)、P(2,0)、P(2,l):晝素 T(S0—1,GO)、T(S0—2, G0)、T(S0_3, G0)、T(S0_1,Gl)、 T(S0—2, Gl)、T(S0_3, Gl)、T(S0—1,G2)、T(S0—2, G2)、 T(S0_3, G2):電晶體 DCA—1、DCA_2、DCA—3、DCA—4 ··元件裝置區域 SO 2 D、SI 1 D、SI 3_D :源極訊號SE-1, SE-2, SE-3, SE-4: Switching element HDS: horizontal particle spacing VDS: vertical particle spacing GO, G1, G2, G3, G4: gate lines S3, S4, S5, S6, S7 , S8, SOJ, S0_2, SO", Sl_l, Sl_2, Sl_3: source line P(0,1), P(l,l), P(0,0), P(1,0), P(2 , 0), P (2, l): Alizarin T (S0-1, GO), T (S0-2, G0), T (S0_3, G0), T (S0_1, Gl), T (S0-2 , Gl), T(S0_3, Gl), T(S0-1, G2), T(S0-2, G2), T(S0_3, G2): transistor DCA-1, DCA_2, DCA-3, DCA— 4 ··Component device area SO 2 D, SI 1 D, SI 3_D : source signal

114114

Claims (1)

200846750 十、申請專利範圍: h一種液晶顯示器之晝素,包括: 一第一列,具有: :第一序一顏色質點,包含於一第一顏色分量 序二顏色質點,包含於一第二顏色分量 第序二顏色質點,包含於一第三顏色分量 中該第—序—顏色質點具有—顏色質點寬度, 二f—序—顏色質點、該第-序二顏色質點以及該第— 序二顏點兩兩至少間隔該顏色質點寬度; 一第二列,具有: 一,二序一顏色質點,包含於該第一顏色分量; 以及一第二序二顏色質點,包含於該第二顏色分量; 一第二序三顏色質點,包含於該第三顏色分量。 中請專利範圍f 1項所述之液晶顯示器之晝素, 八 弟歹】水平偏移讀第二列至少一個顏色質點寬产。 盆=申請專利範圍第2項所述之液晶顯示器之;产;, 八 第序顏色質點與該第二序一顏色質點幵^成—乂 右鋸齒圖案。 反 ι =申請專利範圍第2項所述之液晶顯示器之畫素, 其中該第一序—顏色質點與該第二序一顏色質點形成」 左鋸齒圖案。 X 石 苴ft申請專利範圍第1項所述之液晶顯示器之畫素, 其t該第二序一顏色質點、該第二序二顏色質點以及該第 一序二顏色質點兩兩至少間隔該顏色質點寬度。 115 200846750 更包請專利範圍f 1項所述之液晶顯示器之書辛, •更包括—弟三列,該第三列具有: 二,^序一顏色質點,包含於該第一顏色分量; 二Ϊ三,顏色質點,包含於該第二顏色分量,·以及 弟二序二顏色質點,包含於該第三顏色分量; 更包^如t4專利範㈣6項所述之液晶顯示11之晝素, 更匕括一弟四列,該第四列具有: 一、 • 二f四序一顏色質點,包含於該第一顏色分量; If四序二顏色質點,包含於該第二顏色分量;’以及 弟四序二顏色質點,包含於該第三顏色分量; 其中專利範圍帛1項所述之液晶顯示器之書素, 序三,_'該第—序二顏色質點、該第— ·.點、f =點、5亥第一序—顏色質點、該第二序二顏色質 色中:弟―序二顏色質點是分佈於西洋棋盤圖案的同-顏 1項所述之液晶顯示器之晝素, 10·如申請專利範圍第 更包括: 第一開關元件,輕接至該篦_ &amp; ^ m ^ t 戽— 們设王成弟序一顏色質點與該第 A —顏色質點; 总Γ第二開關元件,柄接至該第—序二顏色質點與該第 序一顏色質點;以及 第一開關元件,耦接至該第一序三顏色質點與該第 116 200846750 二序三顏色質點。 如^申&gt;!奮專利範圍第10項所述之液晶顯示器之晝 ,、,、中该弟一開關元件、該第二開關元件以及該第二開 關元件是配設成具有相同的極性。 弟—開 素 12.如申請專利範圍第10項所述之液晶顯示器之蚩 更包括: 一 一ί —70件裝置區域,内含該第一開關元件; 一,=70件裝置區域,内含該第二開關元件;以及 第—70件裝置區域,内含該第三開關元件。 素 如申請專利範圍第10項所述之液晶顯示蒸之晝 /、中該第一開關元件為一薄膜電晶體。 一 素 1 甘申請專利範圍第13項所述之液晶顯示器之晝 八中該薄膜電晶體包括: — 一源極,耦接至一源極線; 閘極,耦接至一閘極線;以及 及極輕接至該該第一序一顏色質點斑兮望一 顏色質點。 π㈣m弟一序一 種液晶顯示器之晝素,包括: -顏色Uit::具有數個序一顏色質點’而該些序 寬产鱼、~ =併1、一序一鋸齒圖案,並具有一顏色質點 見度與一顏色質點高度;以及 戶' 1色分量’具有數個序二顏色質點,而該些序 一顏色貝點疋排列成一序二鑛齒圖宰; 顏色;量水平偏移該第二㈣ 117 200846750 主16’如申請專利範圍第15項所述之液晶顯示器之書 :顏tiT弟,顏色分量,該第三顏色分量具有數個序 案:、且二:一而°亥些序三顏色質點是排列成一序三鋸齒圖 =W X弟一顏色分量水平偏移該第三顏色分量至少該~ 色質點寬度的兩倍。 ^哀顏 音,^如Λ請專利範圍第16項所述之液晶顯示器之畫 、^弟顏色分置是與該第二顏色分量垂直對齊。 士申明專利範圍第17項所述之液晶顯示器之畫 素,其中該第三顏色分量是與該第一顏色分量垂直對齊, 如申明專利範圍第15項所述之液晶顯示器之畫 ”,其中該第一顏色分量包括三個序一顏色質點,且該 一鋸齒圖案具有一右左右鋸齒圖案。 •士申明專利範圍第19項所述之液晶顯示器之晝 二’、中&quot;亥第—顏色分I包括三個序二顏色質點,且該序 二鋸齒圖案具有一右左右鋸齒圖案。 21·如申請專利範圍第15項所述之液晶顯示器之晝 素,其中該第一顏色分量包括三個序一顏色質點,且該序 一鋸齒圖案具有一左右左鋸齒圖案。 22·如申請專利範圍第15項所述之液晶顯示器之畫 素’其中該第-顏色分量包括四個序一顏色質點,且該序 一鑛齒圖案具有一右左右左鋸齒圖案。 ^ 23·如申請專利範圍第22項所述之液晶顯示器之晝 素,其中該第二顏色分量包括四個序二顏色質點,且該序 二鑛齒圖案具有一右左右左鋸齒圖案。 24.如申請專利範圍第15項所述之液晶顯示器之晝 200846750 素,其中該第一顏色分量包括四個序一顏色質點, 一鋸齒圖案具有一左右左右鋸齒圖案。 以序 •如申明專利範圍第15項所述之液晶顯示 幸,JL φ兮哲* n不為之畺 .....甲4罘一顏色分量包括六個序一顏色質點,日过皮 鋸μ圖案具有一左右右左左左鋸齒圖案。 26·如申請專利範圍第15項所述之液晶顯示哭之圭 ΐ洋顏色質點與該些序二顏色質點“ 千圖案的同一顏色中。 27·如申請專利範圍第16項所述之液晶顯示器之書 素’更包括: 旦 一第一開關元件,耦接至該些序一顏色質點; :^開關元件’柄接至該些序二顏色f點;以及 一第三開關元件,耦接至該些序三顏色質點。 =申請專利範圍第27項所述之液晶顯示界之全 5:::該第-開關元件、該第二開關元第; 關兀件是配設成具有相同的極性。 〆弟-開 音請專利範圍第15項所述之液晶顯示器之查 素,更包括一第三顏色分量,哕旦/之旦 二顏色皙戥^ 弟二顏色刀置具有數個序 =且i序顏色質點是排列成一序三鑛齒圖 :八旦::二鋸二圖案具有—顏色分量高度,又該第—顏 刀3V:由偏仏亥第二顏色分量至少該顏色分量高度。A 29項所述之液 顏色質點寬度。 ^千偏^弟—顏色分量至少該 ^中請專利㈣第29項所述之液晶顯示器之晝 119 200846750 素’更包括: 一f =開關元件,耦接至該第一顏色分量; 二f =開關元件,耦接至該第二顏色分量;以及 一第三開關元件,耦接至該第三顏色分量。 I,』·如^申7專利範圍第31項所述之液晶顯示器之晝 二:中该第—開關元件、第二開關元件以及第三開關元 彳疋垂直對齊,並位於—開關元件列上。200846750 X. Patent application scope: h A liquid crystal display element comprising: a first column having: a first order color point, comprising a first color component sequence two color dots, included in a second color The component second color point is included in a third color component, the first-order color particle has a color particle width, a second f-order-color particle, the first-order two-color dot, and the first-order second color Point two or two at least the color dot width; a second column having: a first, a second color, a color dot, included in the first color component; and a second sequential color particle, included in the second color component; A second order three color dot is included in the third color component. The patent of the liquid crystal display described in the patent range f1, the eight-dimensional 歹] horizontal offset read the second column at least one color point wide production. Pot = the liquid crystal display according to item 2 of the patent application; production;, 8th order color point and the second order one color point 乂^ into - 右 right sawtooth pattern. The pixel of the liquid crystal display of claim 2, wherein the first order-color dot and the second-order-one color dot form a left zigzag pattern. The pixel of the liquid crystal display according to Item 1, wherein the second-order color point, the second-order two-color point, and the first-order two-color point are at least spaced apart from each other. Particle width. 115 200846750 Further, please refer to the book of the liquid crystal display described in the patent range f1, and include the third column, the third column has: two, a sequence of color particles, included in the first color component; The third color component is included in the second color component, and the second color component is included in the third color component; and the liquid crystal display 11 is as described in the t4 patent model (4). Further, the fourth column has: a second f-four-order color particle included in the first color component; If four-order two-color particle is included in the second color component; The fourth color sequence of the second color component is included in the third color component; wherein the patent range is 书1, the book of the liquid crystal display, the third, the _' the first-order two-color particle, the first--. f = point, 5 hai first order - color point, the second order two color color: brother - sequence two color points are distributed in the Western checkerboard pattern of the same - color 1 item of the liquid crystal display, 10. If the scope of the patent application includes: the first switch element Piece, lightly connected to the 篦 _ &amp; ^ m ^ t 戽 - we set Wang Chengdi a color point and the first A - color point; the total Γ second switching element, the handle is connected to the first - order two color point and a first color dot; and a first switching element coupled to the first sequential three color dot and the first 116 200846750 second order three color dot. The liquid crystal display device of claim 10, wherein the first switching element, the second switching element, and the second switching element are disposed to have the same polarity. The invention further comprises: a liquid crystal display according to claim 10, further comprising: a device area containing the first switching element; and a device area of 70 pieces, including The second switching element; and the 70th device region include the third switching element. For example, in the liquid crystal display evaporation method described in claim 10, the first switching element is a thin film transistor. The thin film transistor of the liquid crystal display of claim 13 includes: - a source coupled to a source line; a gate coupled to a gate line; And extremely lightly connected to the first order, a color point, and a color point. π (four) m brother order a liquid crystal display of the elements, including: - color Uit:: has a number of order color point ' and the order of wide production fish, ~ = and 1, a sequence of zigzag pattern, and has a color point Visibility and height of a color point; and the household '1 color component' has a plurality of ordered two color points, and the order one color point points are arranged into a sequence of two ore teeth; color; quantity horizontal offset of the second (4) 117 200846750 The main 16's liquid crystal display book as described in claim 15 of the patent scope: Yan TiT brother, color component, the third color component has several preambles: and two: one and one half The color dots are arranged in a sequence of three zigzag patterns = WX brother one color component horizontal offset the third color component at least twice the width of the ~ chroma point. ^ 哀颜音, ^ If you want to draw the picture of the liquid crystal display described in the scope of the patent, the color division is vertically aligned with the second color component. The pixel of the liquid crystal display of claim 17, wherein the third color component is vertically aligned with the first color component, such as the painting of the liquid crystal display according to claim 15 of the patent specification, wherein The first color component includes three sequential color points, and the one sawtooth pattern has a right and left zigzag pattern. • The second and second color of the liquid crystal display according to claim 19 of the patent scope of the patent scope The first color component includes three orders. The first color component includes three orders. The first two color components include three orders. a color dot, and the sequence of a sawtooth pattern has a left and right zigzag pattern. The pixel of the liquid crystal display of claim 15 wherein the first color component comprises four sequential color dots, and The singular-toothed tooth pattern has a right-left and left-left zigzag pattern. [23] The pixel of the liquid crystal display of claim 22, wherein the second color component comprises The second color dot is in the form of a liquid crystal display, wherein the first color component includes four orders. A color dot, a zigzag pattern has a zigzag pattern of about left and right. In the order of the liquid crystal display as described in claim 15 of the patent scope, JL φ兮哲*n is not for it.....A4罘一The color component includes six order-one color dots, and the day-over-saw μ pattern has a left-right left-left and left-left sawtooth pattern. 26· The liquid crystal display as described in claim 15 of the patent scope and the color of the color and the order The two color dots are in the same color of the thousand patterns. 27. The booklet of the liquid crystal display of claim 16 further comprising: a first switching element coupled to the sequence of color points; : ^ a switching element 'handle connected to the two a color f point; and a third switching element coupled to the three color dots. = All of the liquid crystal display circles described in claim 27 of the patent scope 5::: the first switching element, the second switching element; the contacts are arranged to have the same polarity. 〆弟-开音 Please refer to the liquid crystal display of the 15th patent range, including a third color component, 哕旦/旦旦二色皙戥^ 弟二色刀置 has several orders = and i The ordered color dots are arranged in a sequence of three ore teeth: eight denier:: the two saws two patterns have a - color component height, and the first - the knives 3V: the second color component is at least the color component height. A liquid color point width as described in item A29. ^千偏^弟—The color component is at least the patent of the liquid crystal display according to item 29 (4) Item 29, 200846750 The prime includes: an f = switching element coupled to the first color component; a switching element coupled to the second color component; and a third switching element coupled to the third color component. I, the second embodiment of the liquid crystal display according to claim 31, wherein the first switching element, the second switching element and the third switching element are vertically aligned and located on the switching element column . 音,如申,清專利範圍帛32 ’所述之液晶顯示器之畫 、,二中^亥第一顏色分量是位於該開關元件列向之一第一 侧,而该第二顏色分量是位於該開關元件列向之一第二侧。 34· —種液晶顯示器之晝素,包括·· 二第-顏色分量’具有數個序—顏色質點,而該些序 質列成一序一鑛齒圖案,並具有-顏色質點 見度與一顏色質點高度;以及 一鮮色分量’具有數個序二顏色質點,而該些序 一乡員色貝點疋排列成一序二鋸齒圖案;以及 一第三顏色分量’具有數個序三顏色質點, 三顏色質點是排列成一序三鋸齒圖案; μ二序 其中該第-顏色分量水平偏移該第二顏色分量至 顏色質點寬度,且該第—顏色分量水平偏移 = 量至少該顏色質點寬度的兩倍。 罘一顏色刀 35.如申請專利範圍第34項所述之液晶顯示器之全 素:中该序一錫齒圖案具有一顏色分量高度,又节从二 顏色分量垂直偏移該第二顏色分量至少該顏色 120 200846750 素Λ6.包如括申請專利範圍第35項所述之液晶顯示器之晝 一開關元件’ _至該第__顏色分量; 二=開關元件’编接至該第二顏色分量;以及 -乐三開關元件,純至該第三顏色分量。 素,盆t二請專利範圍第36項所述之液晶顯示器之畫Sound, such as the liquid crystal display of the patent scope 帛32', wherein the first color component of the second component is located on one of the first sides of the column of the switching element, and the second color component is located at the The switching elements are arranged in one of the second sides. 34·—a type of liquid crystal display, including ······················································································· a color point height; and a fresh color component 'having a plurality of ordered two color dots, and the ordering ones are arranged in a sequence of two zigzag patterns; and a third color component 'having a plurality of sequential three color dots, The three color dots are arranged in a sequence of three sawtooth patterns; the μ second sequence wherein the first color component is horizontally offset from the second color component to the color dot width, and the first color component is horizontally offset=the amount is at least the color dot width double.颜色一色刀 35. The holographic display of the liquid crystal display of claim 34, wherein the tin-tooth pattern has a color component height, and the second color component is vertically offset from the second color component. The color 120 200846750 Λ Λ 6. The package includes the first switching element ' _ to the _ _ color component of the liquid crystal display of claim 35; the second = switching element 'coupled to the second color component; And - Le three switching elements, pure to the third color component. Plain, potted t 2, please refer to the liquid crystal display painting described in item 36 of the patent scope 側,而該第二顏色分量是里二二:T °亥開關凡件列向之一第二側。 ❿ 12)The side, and the second color component is the second side: the T ° Hai switch is one of the second sides of the column. ❿ 12)
TW96134791A 2007-05-21 2007-09-19 Large-pixel multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal using fringe fields TWI338797B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US11/751,387 US7956958B2 (en) 2005-09-15 2007-05-21 Large-pixel multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display using fringe fields

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW200846750A true TW200846750A (en) 2008-12-01
TWI338797B TWI338797B (en) 2011-03-11

Family

ID=40104677

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW96134791A TWI338797B (en) 2007-05-21 2007-09-19 Large-pixel multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal using fringe fields

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN101311804B (en)
TW (1) TWI338797B (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI399601B (en) * 2009-05-27 2013-06-21 Innolux Corp Thin film transistor substrate and liquid crystal display panel

Families Citing this family (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI431364B (en) * 2010-03-10 2014-03-21 Kyoritsu Optronics Co Ltd Liquid crystal displays having color dots with embedded polarity regions
CN103217802B (en) * 2013-04-19 2015-04-29 深圳市华星光电技术有限公司 Liquid crystal display panel and device thereof
CN103926735A (en) 2013-06-28 2014-07-16 上海天马微电子有限公司 Color film substrate, manufacturing method thereof, display panel and device
US9613573B2 (en) * 2014-05-09 2017-04-04 Syndiant, Inc. Light modulating backplane with configurable multi-electrode pixels
CN110503928B (en) * 2018-05-18 2021-09-07 晶典有限公司 Generating a five-dot shaped video stream for a light modulating backplane having configurable multi-electrode pixels
DE102020100055A1 (en) * 2020-01-03 2021-07-08 Audi Aktiengesellschaft Display device with a transparent screen element, motor vehicle

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR100878241B1 (en) * 2002-09-27 2009-01-13 삼성전자주식회사 Thin-film transistor substrate for multidomain liquid crystal display
CN1648722A (en) * 2004-01-20 2005-08-03 鸿扬光电股份有限公司 Ultra-miniature Transflective Vertical Alignment LCD with Wide Viewing Angle
CN100492141C (en) * 2004-09-30 2009-05-27 卡西欧计算机株式会社 Vertical alignment type active matrix liquid crystal display element

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI399601B (en) * 2009-05-27 2013-06-21 Innolux Corp Thin film transistor substrate and liquid crystal display panel
US8619223B2 (en) 2009-05-27 2013-12-31 Chimei Innolux Corporation Thin film transistor substrate and LCD panel

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TWI338797B (en) 2011-03-11
CN101311804B (en) 2010-09-01
CN101311804A (en) 2008-11-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI363214B (en) Pixels using associated dot polarity for multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal display
US9190022B2 (en) Three-dimensional display device
CN101123735B (en) High resolution 2D/3D switchable display device
US8552925B2 (en) Stereoscopic image display apparatus
US7365707B2 (en) Display system for displaying images within a vehicle
TW200846750A (en) Large-pixel multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal using fringe fields
US8174465B2 (en) Stereoscopic image display apparatus
KR101230067B1 (en) 3d image display
JP7348808B2 (en) liquid crystal display device
JPWO2012023327A1 (en) Stereoscopic image display device
TW201246915A (en) Image display device
CN103135278A (en) Display device
US20160370921A1 (en) Liquid crystal grating, display device and drive method thereof
TWI290251B (en) Display device
CN102636923A (en) Display device and liquid crystal element
US9007363B2 (en) Display apparatus and method of displaying three dimensional image
TW200933242A (en) Pixels having polarity extension regions for multi-domain vertical alignment liquid crystal displays
JPS63274918A (en) Liquid crystal stereoscopic display device
TWI338798B (en) Display unit with interleaved pixels
JP2016173516A (en) Liquid crystal lens device and image display device
TW200847116A (en) Low cost switching element point inversion driving scheme for liquid crystal display
JPH10232366A (en) 3D image display device
CN118918860B (en) Pixel structure and display panel, display device
US20240402543A1 (en) Display device, in particular for a vehicle, with switchable sharing and private modes
JPH0540541Y2 (en)

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
MM4A Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees